SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Preface, Contents General Technical Specifications Power Supply Modules Digital Modules Analog Modules

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Reference Manual

Special Signal Modules Interface Modules RS 485 Repeater TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Appendices Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules Dimension Drawings Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) List of Abbreviations Glossary, Index
SIMATIC

The following supplement is part of this documentation: No. 1 Designation Product information

Drawing number
A5E00201782-02

Edition 02/2004

A B C D E F

This manual is part of the documentation package with the order numbers: Programmable Controller S7-300: 6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0 ET 200M Distributed I/O Device: 6ES7153-1AA00-8BA0

Edition 02/2004
A5E00105505-03

Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and graded according to severity by the following texts:

! ! !

Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Correct Usage
Note the following:

Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Copyright W Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Siemens AG Bereich Automation and Drives Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Disclaim of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG 2004 Technical data subject to change. A5E00105505-03

Preface

Purpose of the manual

The information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator actions, function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-300. How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-300 or ET 200M system is described in the installation manuals for each system.

Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual, it is necessary to have a general knowledge of automation and programmable logic controllers.

Scope of this manual

The present documentation package contains reference manuals for all the modules current at the time the manuals were published. We reserve the right to enclose a product information leaflet containing up-to-date information on the module with new modules and modules with a new product version.

Changes compared with the previous version

Compared to the previous version, of the Module Data reference manual, the following chapters and appendices have been thoroughly revised and new modules added, as necessary: Preface Chapter 1 General Technical Specifications Chapter 3 Digital Modules, Chapter 4 Analog Modules Appendix A Signal Module Parameter Sets Glossary Note: The previous version of this Module Data reference manual can be recognized by the number in the footer: A5E00105505-02. The current number is: A5E00105505-03.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

iii

Preface

Approbations
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

CE Approval
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Identification for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)

Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Standards
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

iv

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Preface

How the manual fits in S7-300

Manual

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data

Reference Manual

Description of operation, functions and technical specifications of the CPU. Description of operation, functions and technical specifications of the CPU. Description of configuration, installation, wiring, networking and commissioning of an S7-300. Description of configuration, installation, wiring, networking and commissioning of an S7-300. Description of the individual technological functions: Positioning, counting, pointtopoint coupling, control. The CD contains examples for the technological functions. Descriptions of functions and technical specifications of signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules.

CPU Data: CPU 312 IFM 318-2 DP

Operating Manual

S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation

Installation manual

Automation system S7-300, installation: CPU 312

IFM 318-2 DP Manual

CPU 31xC: Technological Functions Examples

Module data reference manual
You are reading this manual

Reference Manual

Instruction List

CPU 312 IFM 318-2 DP CPU 31xC and CPU 31x

Getting Started

The instruction set lists of the CPUs and their execution times. A list of executable blocks (OBs/SFCs/SFBs) and their execution times. Getting Started documents use a concrete example to guide you through the individual commissioning steps until you have a functioning application.

CPU 31x: Commissioning CPU 31xC: Commissioning CPU 31xC: Positioning with analog output CPU 314C: Positioning with digital output CPU 31xC: Counting CPU 31xC: Rules CPU 31xC: Point-to-point connection CPU 317-2 PN/DP: Configuration of the PROFInet interface X2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Preface

ET 200M
Distributed Peripheral manual

Manual
Signal modules for process automation reference manual

Description of configuration, assembly, wiring. Description of use in process automation, parameterization with SIMATIC PDM, digital input modules, digital output modules. Descriptions of functions and technical specifications of signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules.

Reference Manual
Module data reference manual
You are reading this manual

Reference Manual

Navigation
To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following access aids: At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual. An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on each page of each chapter. You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual. At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you fast access to the information you need.

Recycling and disposal

Because of its low-emission equipment, it is possible to recycle the S7-300. For ecologically harmless recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certificated disposal service for electronic scrap.

vi

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Preface

Additional support
Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about the products described in this manual. http://www.ad.siemens.com/automation/partner

Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC S7 programmable controller. Please contact your local training center or the central training center in Nuremberg, D 90327 Germany. Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200. Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

vii

Preface

A&D Technical Support

Worldwide, available 24 hours a day:

Nuernberg Johnson City Beijing

Technical Support Worldwide (Nuernberg) Technical Support

24 hours a day, 365 days a year Phone: Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +49 (180) 5050-222 +49 (180) 5050-223 adsupport@ siemens.com +1:00

Europe / Africa (Nuernberg) Authorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Phone: Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +49 (180) 5050222 +49 (180) 5050-223 adsupport@ siemens.com +1:00

United States (Johnson City) Technical Support and Authorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 AM to 500 PM Phone: Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +1 (423) 262 2522 +1 (423) 262 2289 simatic.hotline@ sea.siemens.com 5:00

Asia / Australia (Beijing) Technical Support and Authorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Phone: Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +86 10 64 75 75 75 +86 10 64 74 74 74 adsupport.asia@ siemens.com +8:00

The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines and the authorization hotline are generally German and English.

viii

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Preface

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the internet at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support where you will find the following: The newsletter, which constantly provides you with uptodate information on your products. The right documents via our Search function in Service & Support. A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their experiences. Your local representative for Automation & Drives. Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under Services.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

ix

Preface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents
1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7-300s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rated Voltages of the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIPLUS S7-300 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area . . . . Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A; (6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; (6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24; (6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC; (6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24; (6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-2 1-6 1-8 1-9 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-16 1-17 2-1 2-2 2-6 2-9 2-14 3-1 3-4 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-16 3-18 3-20

Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xi

Contents

3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.9.4 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.20.1 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.23.1 3.23.2 3.23.3 3.24 3.25 3.26

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; Source Input; (6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V (6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125; (6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V (6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230; (6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed; (6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC; (6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x UC24/48 V . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; with diagnostic interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A; (6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-22 3-26 3-27 3-29 3-32 3-34 3-36 3-38 3-40 3-42 3-44 3-46 3-49 3-53 3-56 3-59 3-63 3-66 3-69 3-72 3-76 3-77 3-80 3-81 3-84 3-87

xii

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

3.27 3.28 3.29 3.29.1 3.29.2 3.29.3 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33 3.33.1 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.11.1 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15

Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-93 3-96

Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-104 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A; (6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113 Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A; parameterizable (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0) . . 3-116 Assigning Parameters to the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-119 4-1 4-3 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-24 4-28 4-31 4-31 4-32 4-34 4-35 4-39 4-40 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-50 4-51 4-53 4-56 4-58 4-66 4-67 4-70 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module . . . . . . Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the analog input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xiii

Contents

4.16 4.17 4.18 4.18.1 4.18.2 4.19 4.19.1 4.19.2 4.19.3 4.19.4 4.20 4.20.1 4.20.2 4.20.3 4.21 4.21.1 4.21.2 4.22 4.22.1 4.22.2 4.23 4.23.1 4.23.2 4.24 4.24.1 4.24.2 4.25 4.25.1 4.25.2 4.26 4.26.1 4.26.2 4.27 4.27.1 4.27.2 4.27.3

Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits; (6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits

4-71 4-75 4-77 4-81 4-83 4-86 4-89 4-92 4-93 4-94

Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; synchronous; (6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits; (6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits; (6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0) . . . . 4-125 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . 4-135 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) . . . . . . 4-138 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . 4-150 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit; synchronous; (6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . 4-169 4-172 4-174 4-175

xiv

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

4.28 4.28.1 4.28.2 4.29 4.29.1 4.29.2 4.30 4.30.1 4.30.2 4.31 4.31.1 4.31.2 5

Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-5 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-15 5-17 5-20 5-21 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; (6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; (6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoder Value Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gray/Dual Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred Encoder Value and Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeze Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SM 338; POS-INPUT Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SM 338; POS-INPUT Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications of the 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10 5.4.11 5.4.12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xv

Contents

Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and Characteristics; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Terminal Assignment and Terminal Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Signal-Line Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 6-2 6-3 6-5 6-7 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6 8-1 8-2 8-4 8-4 8-6 8-10 8-10 8-12 8-12 8-14 8-16 8-18 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-23 8-24 A-1 A-1 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-11 A-19 A-27 A-30 A-36 A-39 A-41

RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11

xvi

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program . Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawings of the Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1 B-1 B-2 B-5 B-7 C-1 C-2 C-8

Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5

Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15 Dimension Drawings for Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16 D-1 E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 F-1

D E

Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1 E.2 E.3 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage .

List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xvii

Contents

Figures
2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ModuleView and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 20 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC (Source Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230VAC . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; D0 32 x VAC 120/230 /1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x AC 120/230 V/1 A . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 V DC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-10 2-10 2-14 2-15 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-18 3-20 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-33 3-34 3-36 3-38 3-40 3-42 3-44 3-47 3-47 3-50 3-51 3-54 3-57 3-60 3-67 3-70 3-73 3-74 3-82 3-85

xviii

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data record 1 of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-readability of the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module . . . . . . Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module . . . . . Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan time of an analog input or output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI

3-88 3-94 3-97 3-101 3-102 3-107 3-107 3-111 3-111 3-114 3-117 3-120 3-121 4-29 4-30 4-34 4-35 4-37 4-38 4-47 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-54 4-54 4-55 4-55 4-56 4-56 4-57 4-58 4-61 4-62

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xix

Contents

4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-56 5-1 5-2 5-3 6-1 6-2 6-3 7-1

Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Module view and block diagram of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . 4-87 8-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92 4-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Calculation of the filter and processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . 4-126 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . 4-170 Calculation of the processing time and the time for updating the output . 4-173 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . 4-195 Module view of the simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Module view of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 RC Network with 10 MW for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

xx

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

7-2 7-3 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-17 A-18 A-19 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6

Isolation between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector . . . . . . . . Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring-loaded terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate . . . . . . . Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331 with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332 with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . .

7-5 7-7 8-2 8-5 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-11 8-15 8-17 8-19 8-22 8-23 8-24 A-4 A-6 A-8 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-27 A-31 A-32 A-37 A-40 A-42 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-5 B-6 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-8 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-3 C-4 C-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xxi

Contents

C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-18 C-19 C-20 C-21 C-22 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26 E-1

Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for Insert and Remove Function with Active Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition . . Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-5 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-17 C-18 C-18 C-19 E-3

xxii

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

Tables
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V, Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data record no. 0 (static parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the data record for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependence of the output values on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A. Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL, error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A . . Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-10 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-15 1-16 1-17 2-5 2-7 2-11 2-15 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-27 3-28 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-31 3-63 3-63 3-64 3-64 3-76 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-90 3-91 3-91 3-104 3-104 3-105

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xxiii

Contents

3-28 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39

Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module 4-8 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Possible analog value resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges + 10 V to + 1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges + 500 mV to + 80 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges + 20 mA to + 3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 10 kW and from 150 W to 600 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . 4-26 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position

xxiv

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-56 4-57 4-58 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-72 4-73 4-74 4-75 4-76 4-77 4-78

of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits to channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan times in 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed to channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups Scan Times in Software Filter, 8 Channels Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups . . Scan Times in Software Filter, 8 Channels Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in 5F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-32 4-33 4-40 4-43 4-44 4-59 4-63 4-72 4-73 4-73 4-74 4-81 4-82 4-83 4-85 4-90 4-91 4-93 4-95 4-96 4-103 4-104 4-105 4-106 4-113 4-120 4-120 4-121 4-123 4-129 4-131 4-134 4-136 4-137 4-143 4-145 4-148 4-150 4-151 4-152

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xxv

Contents

4-79 4-80 4-81 4-82 4-83 4-84 4-85 4-86 4-87 4-88 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 6-1 7-1 7-2 7-3 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12

Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . 4-152 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . 4-168 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . 4-175 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . 4-181 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits . . . 4-187 Measuring ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199 Output ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200 Special signal modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Meaning of the switch settings of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . 5-6 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: ConnecModules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of 32-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Selection for SIMATIC TOP connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection 8-18 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . A-9 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . A-9 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . A-16 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18

xxvi

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Contents

A-13 A-14 A-15 A-16 A-17 A-18 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-27 A-28 A-29 A-30 A-31 A-32 A-33 A-34 B-1 D-1

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . Codes for the modes of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for the measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits . . . . . . . . . Codes for the smoothing mode settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for the output ranges of the analog output module SM332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-19 A-24 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-26 A-28 A-28 A-28 A-29 A-30 A-35 A-35 A-35 A-36 A-36 A-38 A-39 A-41 A-41 A-43 A-43 B-2 D-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

xxvii

Contents

xxviii

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

What are general technical specifications?

General technical specifications include the following: the standards and test values which the modules of the S7-300 programmable logic controller maintain and satisfy the test criteria to which the S7-300 modules were tested.

In this chapter
Section 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 Standards and Approvals Electromagnetic Compatibility Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7-300s Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection Rated Voltages of the S7-300 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive Area Contents Page 1-2 1-6 1-8 1-9 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-16 1-17

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-1

General Technical Specifications

1.1

Standards and Approvals

CE approval
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and safety-related requirements of the following EU directives and conforms with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable controllers announced in the Official Journals of the European Community: 73/23/EEC Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage Limits (Low-Voltage Directive) 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC Directive) 94/9/EU Devices and protection systems for use as prescribed in potentially explosive areas (Guidelines for Explosion Protection)

The declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik A&D AS RD4 Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg

1-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with S S UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with S UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) UL 1604 (Hazardous Location) CSA-213 (Hazardous Location) S S S

HAZ. LOC.

APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx Note The currently applicable approvals can be found on the nameplate of the particular module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-3

General Technical Specifications

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

in accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection n) II 3 G EEx nA II T4..T5

Identification for Australia

The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements of standard AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

IEC 61131
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests).

Shipbuilding approval
Classification Societies: ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) BV (Bureau Veritas) DNV (Det Norske Veritas) GL (Germanischer Lloyd) LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping) Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

1-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Use in an industrial environment

SIMATIC products have been designed for use in an industrial environment.
Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment EMC Directive Industry Requirements in respect of: Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4: 2001 Immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2001

Use in residential environments

If you operate an S7-300 in a residential area, you must ensure Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions. Suitable measures to achieve interference suppression according to Limit Value Class B: installation of the S7-300 in grounded cabinets and control boxes use of filters in supply lines

Warning Personal injury or property damage can result. In areas subject to danger of explosion, personal injury or property damage can result if you withdraw connectors while an S7-300 is in operation. Always isolate the S7-300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before withdrawing connectors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-5

General Technical Specifications

1.2

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Introduction
In this section you will find details of the noise immunity of S7-300 modules and details of radio interference suppression. The S7-300 modules satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the law applicable to EMC on the European domestic market.

Definition of EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.

Pulse-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules compared to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the S7-300 system complies with the specifications and directives on electric design.
Table 1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference Tested with Satisfies degree of severity 3 3

Pulse-Shaped Interference

Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 Bursts (fast transient bursts) to IEC 61000-4-4

Discharge in air:"8 kV Contact discharge: "4 kV 2 kV (supply cable) 2 kV (signal cable > 3 m) 1 kV (signal cable < 3 m)

Energy-rich single impulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5 External protective circuit required (refer to the manual S7-300 Programmable Logic Controller, Hardware and Installation, Chapter Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection)

Asymmetrical coupling

2 kV (supply cable) Direct voltage with protective elements 2 kV (signal/ data cable only > 3 m) possibly with protection elements 1 kV (supply cable) Direct voltage with protection elements 1 kV (signal line only > 3 m) possibly with protection elements

Symmetrical coupling

1-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-300 system to the public network, you must ensure Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55022.

Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows the EMC behavior of the S7-300 modules with regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables.
Table 1-3 Sinusoidal Interference Test values Satisfies degree of severity

Sinusoidal Interference

HF irradiation (electromagnetic fields) according to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz according to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz HF conductance on cables and cable shields according to IEC 61000-4-6 Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 80 MHz 3 3

Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1.
From 30 to 230 MHz From 230 to 1000 MHz Measured at a distance of 10 m (98.4 ft.) < 40 dB (mV/m)Q < 47 dB (mV/m)Q

Interference emission via the mains AC power supply in accordance with EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1.
From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz From 0.5 to 5 MHz From 5 to 30 MHz < 79 dB (mV)Q < 66 dB (mV)M < 73 dB (mV)Q < 60 dB (mV)M < 73 dB (mV)Q < 60 dB (mV)M

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-7

General Technical Specifications

1.3

Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries

Shipping and storage of modules

S7-300 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2, in respect of shipping and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or stored in their original packing. Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transportation. Mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.
Table 1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules Condition Free fall (in shipping packing) Temperature Atmospheric pressure Relative humidity Sinusoidal oscillations to IEC 60068-2-6 Shock according to IEC 60068-2-29 Permitted range v 1m from 40 _C to + 70_C 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponding to an altitude of 1000 to 3500 m) 10 to 95 %, no condensation 5 9 Hz: 9 150 Hz: 3.5 mm 9.8 m/s2

250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

Transporting backup batteries

Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. Special approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for S7-300 systems. The lithium content of the backup battery is approximately 0.25 g.

1-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Storing backup batteries

Backup batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. The maximum shelf life is 5 years.

Warning Improper handling of backup batteries can result in injury and damage to property. If backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe burning. Observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the S7-300 programmable logic controller: never charge them never heat them never throw them in the fire never damage them mechanically (drill, squeeze, etc.)

1.4

Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7-300s

Operating conditions
S7-300 systems are intended for stationary use in locations protected against the weather. The operating conditions surpass the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3. Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements) Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

Use with additional measures

The S7-300, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures: in locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation in hostile environments caused, for instance, by dust accumulation corrosive vapors or gases strong electric or magnetic fields in installations requiring special monitoring, for example elevators electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-300 in a cabinet or in a housing.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-9

General Technical Specifications

Ambient mechanical conditions

The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-300 modules are listed in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.
Table 1-5 Mechanical Conditions Continuous 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.5 g constant acceleration Occasional 0.075 mm amplitude 1 g constant acceleration

Frequency Range in Hz 10 v f v 58 58 v f v 150

Reducing vibrations
If your S7-300 modules are exposed to severe shock and/or vibrations, you must take the appropriate measures to reduce the acceleration and/or amplitude, respectively. We recommend that you install the S7-300 on vibration-damping materials (for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings).

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests for ambient mechanical conditions.
Table 1-6 Test ... Vibrations Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test Test Standard Vibration test according to IEC 60068 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) Remarks Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 10 Hz v f v 58 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.075 mm 58 Hz v f v 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each other Type of shock: half-sine Severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/ direction in each of three axes perpendicular to each other

Shock

Shock test to IEC 60068, Part 2-29

1-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
You can use S7-300s under the following climatic conditions:
Table 1-7 Climatic Conditions Permitted range from 0 to 60_C from 0 to 40_C 10 to 95 % Non-condensing, corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class 2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2 Corresponding to an altitude of 1000 to 2000 m Test: 10 ppm; 4 days Test: 1 ppm; 4 days Remarks

Climatic Conditions Temperature: horizontal installation: vertical installation: Relative humidity

Atmospheric pressure Concentration of contaminants

1080 to 795 hPa SO2: < 0.5 ppm; RH < 60 %, non-condensing H2S: < 0.1 ppm; RH < 60 %, non-condensing

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-11

General Technical Specifications

1.5

Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection

Test voltages
Insulation stability must be demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Table 1-8 Test Voltages Test Voltage 500 VDC 2500 VDC DC 4000 V

Circuits with rated voltage Ue to other circuits or to ground < 50 V < 150 V < 250 V

Protection class
Protection Class I according to IEC 60536 in other words, protective conductor connection to rail necessary

Protection against ingress of foreign bodies and water

Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC 60529, that is, protection against contact with standard probes. There is no special protection against the ingress of water.

1-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

1.6

Rated Voltages of the S7-300

Rated operating voltages

The modules of the S7-300 operate with different rated voltages. The following table contains the rated voltages and the corresponding tolerances.
Table 1-9 Rated Voltages Rated voltage 24 VDC 120 VAC 230 VAC Tolerance Range 20.4 to 28.8 VDC 93 to 132 VAC 187 to 264 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-13

General Technical Specifications

1.7

SIPLUS S7-300 modules

Definition
SIPLUS S7-300 modules are modules that can be used under extended environmental conditions. Extended environmental conditions mean: operation possible at temperatures from 25C to +60C occasional, brief condensation permitted increased mechanical stress permissible

Comparison with standard modules

The functional scope and technical specifications for the SIPLUS S7-300 modules are the same as those of the standard modules. The mechanical and climatic environmental conditions as well as their test method have changed. The SIPLUS S7-300 modules have their own order numbers (see table 1-10)

Project engineering in STEP 7

The SIPLUS S7-300 modules are not included in the hardware catalog. Please design your installation with the corresponding standard modules according to the table 1-10.

1-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

The following table contains all SIPLUS S7-300 modules. The order numbers of the corresponding standard modules have been included as an aid to configuration. You can refer to the description and technical specifications in the special section on the standard module.
Table 1-10 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Module SIPLUS S7-300-SIMATIC module for use under extended environmental conditions Standard modules

as of order no. IM 153-1 CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 314 CPU 315-2 DP IM 365 SM 321 digital input module; SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 x 24 V-125 VDC SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC SM 322 digital output module; SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A SM 322, DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI8/DO8 x DC 24V/0.5A Analog input module SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 x 12 bits Analog output module SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 x 12 bits SM 334 analog I/O module; SM 334; AI4/AO 2 x 12 bits 6AG1334-0KE00-2AB0 6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0 6AG1332-5HB01-2AB0 6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0 6AG1331-7KB02-2AB0 6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0 6AG1323-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0 6AG1322-1BH01-2AA0 6AG1322-1HF10-2AA0 6AG1322-1CF00-2AA0 6AG1322-1FF01-2AA0 6AG1322-8BF00-2AB0 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0 6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0 6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0 6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0 6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0 6AG1321-1BH02-2AA0 6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0 6AG1321-7BH01-2AB0 6AG1321-1CH20-2AA0 6AG1321-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0 6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0 6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0 6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0 6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0 6AG1153-1AA03-2XB0 6AG1312-5BD00-2AB0 6AG1313-5BE00-2AB0 6AG1314-1AF10-2AB0 6AG1315-2AG10-2AB0 6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0 6ES7312-5BD00-0AB0 6ES7313-5BE00-0AB0 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-15

General Technical Specifications

1.8

Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

Ambient mechanical conditions

Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3M4.

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests for ambient mechanical conditions of SIPLUS S7-300 modules.
Table 1-11 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test Test ... Vibrations Test Standard Vibration test according to IEC 6008 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) Remarks Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 5 Hz  f  9 Hz, constant amplitude of 3.5 mm 9 Hz  f  150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g oscillation period: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each other

Shock

Shock test according to IEC 6008 Type of shock: half-sine Part 2-27 severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/ direction in each of three axes perpendicular to each other

1-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
You can use SIPLUS S7-300 modules under the following climatic conditions: Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3K5.
Table 1-12 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions Ambient Condition Temperature: horizontal installation vertical installation Relative humidity Permitted range 25 C to 60 C 25 C to 40 C From 5 to 95 % Remarks

Occasional, brief condensation, corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class 2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2 Test: 10 ppm; 4 days 1 ppm; 4 days

Pollutant concentration (according to IEC 721 3-3; class 3C3)

SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Relative humidity < 60% H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Relative humidity < 60%

1.9

Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive Area

The following sections contain important information in the following languages.

In this chapter
Section 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.5 1.9.6 1.9.7 1.9.8 1.9.9 1.9.10 1.9.11 Topic Using the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area Utilisation de lET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement risque dexplosion en zone 2 Aplicacin del ET 200M / S7-300 en reas con peligro de explosin, zona 2 Impiego dellET 200M / S7-300 nellarea a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosieve gebied zone 2 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionsfarlige omrde zone 2 ET 200M / S7-300:n kytt rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyhyke 2 Anvndning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskomrde zon 2 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso, zona 2 Xphsh thj susKeuhj ET 200M / S7 300 se ...

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-17

General Technical Specifications

1.9.1

Einsatz der ET 200M / S7-300 im explosionsgefhrdeten Bereich Zone 2

Zone 2
Explosionsgefhrdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfhigen Atmosphre unterschieden.
Zone 2 Explosionsgefahr explosive Gasatmosphre tritt nur selten und kurzzeitig auf nein Beispiel Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in geschlossenen Rumen auerhalb der Zone 2 Standardanwendungen von dezentraler Peripherie

sicherer Bereich

Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise fr die Installation des Dezentralen Peripheriegertes ET 200M und der SIMATIC S7-300 im explosionsgefhrdeten Bereich.

Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zum ET 200M und zu den verschiedenen S7-300Baugruppen finden Sie im Handbuch.

Fertigungsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Zulassung
II 3 G Prfnummer: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 02ATEX1096 X nach EN 50021 : 1999

Hinweis II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 drfen nur in Baugruppen mit der Zulassung Automatisierungssysteme SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M der Gertekategorie 3 eingesetzt werden.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

18

General Technical Specifications

Instandhaltung
Fr eine Reparatur muss die betroffene Baugruppe an den Fertigungsort geschickt werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgefhrt werden.

Besondere Bedingungen
1. Das Dezentrale Peripheriegert ET 200M und die SIMATIC S7-300 mssen in einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches Gehuse eingebaut werden. Diese mssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54 (nach EN 60529) gewhrleisten. Dabei sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu bercksichtigen, in denen das Gert installiert wird. Fr das Gehuse muss eine Herstellererklrung fr Zone 2 vorliegen (gem EN 50021). 2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinfhrung dieses Gehuses unter Betriebsbedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebsbedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 C sein kann, mssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatschlich gemessenen Temperaturen bereinstimmen. 3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinfhrungen mssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gem EN 50021) entsprechen. 4. Alle Gerte, einschlielich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgngen von ET 200M- und S7-300-Systemen angeschlossen werden, mssen fr den Explosionsschutz Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein. 5. Es mssen Manahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % berschritten werden kann. 6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0 C bis 60 C 7. Innerhalb des Gehuses ist an einem nach dem ffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen: Warnung Das Gehuse darf nur kurze Zeit geffnet werden, z. B. fr visuelle Diagnose. Bettigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen). Diese Warnung kann unbercksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine explosionsgefhrdete Atmosphre herrscht.

Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen

Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen finden Sie im Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-19

General Technical Specifications

1.9.2

Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone 2 Explosion Hazard Explosive gas atmosphere occurs only seldom and for a short time No Example Areas around flange joints with flat gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces Outside zone 2 Standard distributed I/O applications

Safe area

Below you will find important information on the installation of the ET 200M distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 in a hazardous area.

Further Information
You will find further information on the ET 200M and the various S7-300 modules in the manual.

Production Location
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Certification
II 3 G Test number: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 02ATEX1096 X to EN 50021 : 1999

Note II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be used in Modules with SIMATIC S7-300/ET 200M automation systems belonging to equipment category 3.

1-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected module must be sent to the production location. Repairs can only be carried there.

Special Conditions
1. The ET 200M distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 must be installed in a cabinet or metal housing. These must comply with the IP 54 degree of protection as a minimum. The environmental conditions under which the equipment is installed must be taken into account. There must be a manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available for the housing (in accordance with EN 50021). 2. If a temperature of > 70 C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 C can be reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the temperatures actually measured. 3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021). 4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and outputs of fail-safe signal modules must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion protection. 5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot be exceeded by more than 40 %. 6. Ambient temperature range: 0 C to 60 C 7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an easily visible position when the housing is opened: Warning The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections). You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).

List of Approved Modules

You will find the list of approved modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-21

General Technical Specifications

1.9.3

Utilisation de l'ET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement risque d'explosion en zone 2

Zone 2
Les environnements risque d'explosion sont rpartis en zones. Les zones se distinguent par la probabilit de prsence d'une atmosphre explosive.
Zone 2 Risque d'explosion Formation rare et brve d'une atmosphre gazeuse explosive Non Exemple Environnement de raccords joints plats dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux ferms A l'extrieur de la zone 2 Utilisation standard de priphrie dcentralise

Zone sre

Vous trouverez ci-aprs des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station de priphrie dcentralise ET 200M et du SIMATIC S7-300 dans un environnement prsentant un risque d'explosion.

Informations complmentaires
Des informations complmentaires sur l'ET 200M et les divers modules S7-300 se trouvent dans le manuel.

Lieu de production
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Homologation
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999

Numro de contrle :

KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Nota II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent tre utiliss Les modules homologus que dans des automates SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M de catgorie 3.

1-22

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Entretien
Si une rparation est ncessaire, le module concern doit tre expdi au lieu de production. La rparation ne doit tre effectue qu'en ce lieu.

Conditions particulires
1. La station de priphrie dcentralise ET 200M et le SIMATIC S7-300 doivent tre installs dans une armoire ou un botier mtallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut alors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est install. Le botier doit faire lobjet dune dclaration de conformit du fabricant pour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021). 2. Si dans les conditions dexploitation, une temprature > 70 C est atteinte au niveau du cble ou de lentre du cble dans ce botier, ou bien si la temprature au niveau de la drivation des conducteurs peut tre > 80 C, les capacits de rsistance thermique des cbles doivent corespondre aux tempratures effectivement mesures. 3. Les entres de cbles utilises doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exig et tre conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021). 4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccords aux entres et sorties de modules de signaux scurit intrinsque doivent tre homologus pour la protection antidflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas tre dpasse de plus de 40% sous linfluence de transitoires. 6. Plage de temprature ambiante : 0 C 60 C 7. A lintrieur du botier, il faut placer, un endroit bien visible aprs ouverture, une plaquette comportant lavertissement suivant : Avertissement Ouvir le botier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, nactionnez aucun commutateur, ne dconnectez aucun module et ne dbanchez pas de cbles lectriques (connexions). Le respect de cet avertissement nest pas impratif sil est certain que lenvironnement ne prsente pas de risque dexplosion.

Liste des modules homologus

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules homologus : http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ rfrence ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-23

General Technical Specifications

1.9.4

Aplicacin de la ET 200M / S7-300 en reas con peligro de explosin, zona 2

Zona 2
Las reas con peligro de explosin se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se diferencian segn la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmsfera capaz de sufrir una explosin.
Zona 2 Peligro de explosin Ejemplo

La atmsfera explosiva de gas reas alrededor de uniones abridadas con slo se presenta rara vez y muy juntas planas en tuberas en locales brevemente cerrados fuera de la zona 2 Aplicaciones estndar de la periferia descentralizada

rea segura No

A continuacin encontrar importantes informaciones para la instalacin de la unidad perifrica descentralizada ET 200M y del SIMATIC S7-300 en reas con peligro de explosin.

Otras informaciones
Encontrar otras informaciones relativas a la ET 200S y a los distintos mdulos S7-300 en el Manual.

Lugar de fabricacin
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Homologacin
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 segn norma EN 50021 : 1999

Nmero de comprobacin: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Nota II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden Los mdulos con la homologacin utilizarse nicamente en los autmatas programables SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M de la categora de equipo 3.

1-24

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Mantenimiento
Para una reparacin se ha de remitir el mdulo afectado al lugar de fabricacin. Slo all se puede realizar la reparacin.

Condiciones especiales
1. La unidad perifrica descentralizada ET 200M y el SIMATIC S7-300 se han de montar en un armario elctrico de distribucin o en una carcasa metlica. stos deben garantizar como mnimo el grado de proteccin IP 54. Para ello se han de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deber contar con una declaracin del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme a EN 50021). 2. Si durante la operacin se alcanzara una temperatura > 70 C en el cable o la entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80 C en la bifurcacin de hilos, debern adaptarse las propiedades trmicas de los cables a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente. 3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de proteccin IP exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021). 4. Todos los dispositivos inclusive interruptores, etc. conectados a las entradas y salidas de mdulos de seales de alta disponibilidad deben estar homologados para la proteccin contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensin nominal pueda rebasar en ms del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios. 6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0 C hasta 60 C 7. Dentro de la caja deber colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su apertura un rtulo con la siguiente advertencia: Precaucin Abrir la caja slo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnstico visual. Durante este tiempo Ud. no deber activar ningn interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar mdulos ni separar conductores elctricos (conexiones enchufables). Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmsfera existente no hay peligro de explosin.

Lista de los mdulos homologados

En la internet hallar Ud. una lista con los mdulos homologados: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ bajo el ID de asignacin 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-25

General Technical Specifications

1.9.5

Impiego dell'ET 200M / S7-300 nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2

Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono distinte secondo la probabilit della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.
Zona 2 Pericolo di esplosione L'atmosfera esplosiva si presente solo raramente e brevemente No Esempio Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambienti chiusi Al di fuori della zona 2 Applicazioni standard di periferia decentrata

Area sicura

Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione dell'unit di periferia decentrata ET 200M e del SIMATIC S7-300 nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.

Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sull'ET 200M e sulle diverse unit S7-300 si trovano nel manuale.

Luogo di produzione
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Autorizzazione
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999

Numero di controllo:

KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Avvertenza II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere Le unit con l'autorizzazione impiegate solo nei sistemi di controllori programmabili SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M della categoria di apparecchiature 3.

1-26

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, l'unit interessata deve essere inviata al luogo di produzione. La riparazione pu essere effettuata solo l.

Condizioni particolari
1. L'unit di periferia decentrata ET 200M e il SIMATIC S7-300 devono essere montati in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021). 2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 C o se in condizioni di esercizio la temperatura nella derivazione dei fili pu essere > 80 C, le caratteristiche di temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente misurata. 3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021). 4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli ingressi/uscite di unit di segnale ad elevata sicurezza, devono essere stati omologati per la protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa essere superata per pi del 40% da parte di transienti. 6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0 C a 60 C 7. Allinterno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo lapertura, una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento: Attenzione Il contenitore pu rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare o innestare unit e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori). Non necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se noto che non c unatmosfera a rischio di esplosione.

Elenco delle unit abilitate

La lista con le unit omologate si trova in Internet al sito: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ allID di voce 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-27

General Technical Specifications

1.9.6

Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosief gebied zone 2

Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een explosieve atmosfeer.
Zone 2 Explosiegevaar Een explosieve gasatmosfeer treedt maar zelden op en voor korte duur Neen Voorbeeld Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten vertrekken Buiten de zone 2 Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale periferie

Veilig gebied

Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van het decentrale periferieapparaat ET 200M en van de SIMATIC S7-300 in het explosief gebied.

Verdere informatie
In het handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de ET 200M en over de verschillende S7-300-modulen.

Productieplaats
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strasse 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Vergunning
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999

Keuringsnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Opmerking II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen slechts worden Modulen met de vergunning gebruikt in automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M van de apparaatcategorie 3.

1-28

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moet de betreffende module naar de plaats van vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd.

Speciale voorwaarden
1. Het decentrale periferieapparaat ET 200M en de SIMATIC S7-300 moeten worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt genstalleerd. Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden ingediend (volgens EN 50021). 2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 C of als onder bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 C kan zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen. 3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021). 4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de inen uitgangen van tegen fouten beveiligde signaalmodulen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC. 5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door transinten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden. 6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0 C tot 60 C 7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing: Waarschuwing De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen). Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.

Lijst van de toegelaten modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten modulen vindt u in het internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-29

General Technical Specifications

1.9.7

Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige omrde zone 2

Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige omrder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfre.
Zone 2 Eksplosionsfare Eksplosiv gasatmosfre optrder kun sjldent og varer kort Nej Eksempel Omrder rundt om flangeforbindelser med flade pakninger ved rrledninger i lukkede rum Uden for zone 2 Standardanvendelser decentral periferi

Sikkert omrde

I det flgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af det decentrale periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige omrde.

Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om ET 200M og de forskellige S7-300-komponenter findes i manualen.

Produktionssted
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Godkendelse
II 3 G Kontrolnummer: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 02ATEX1096 X efter EN 50021 : 1999

Bemrk II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 m kun monteres Komponenter med godkendelsen i automatiseringssystemer SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M - udstyrskategori 3.

1-30

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Vedligeholdelse
Skal den pgldende komponent repareres, bedes De sende den til produktionsstedet. Reparation m kun udfres der.

Srlige betingelser
1. Det decentrale periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet. Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse skal der tages hjde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er installeret. Der skal vre udarbejdet en erklring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021). 2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindfringen p dette hus nr op p en temperatur p > 70 C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen p reforegreningen kan vre > 80 C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk mles. 3. De benyttede kabelindfringer skal vre i overensstemmelse med den krvede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021). 4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til fejlsikre signalkomponenter, skal vre godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af type EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. Der skal trffes foranstaltninger, der srger for, at den nominelle spnding via transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %. 6. Omgivelsestemperaturomrde: 0 C til 60 C 7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, nr kabinettet bnes. Dette skilt skal have flgende advarsel: Advarsel Kabinettet m kun bnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne forbindelse ikke p kontakter, trk eller ist ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser). Denne advarsel skal der ikke tages hjde for, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosfre.

Liste over godkendte komponenter

Listen med de godkendte komponenter findes p internettet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-31

General Technical Specifications

1.9.8

ET 200M / S7-300:n kytt rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyhyke 2

Vyhyke 2
Rjhdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyhykkeisiin. Vyhykkeet erotellaan rjhdyskelpoisen ilmakehn olemassa olon todennkisyyden mukaan.
Vyhyke 2 Rjhdysvaara Rjhtv kaasuilmakeh ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja lyhytaikaisesti Ei Esimerkki Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteill varustuilla laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa vyhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset

turvallinen alue

Seuraavasta lydtte trkeit ohjeita hajautetun ulkopiirilaitteen ET 200M ja SIMATIC S7-300 asennukseen rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.

Listietoja
Listietoja ET 200M:n ja erilaisiin S7-300-rakenneryhmiin lydtte ohjekirjasta.

Valmistuspaikka
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Hyvksynt
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999

Tarkastusnumero: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Ohje II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa saadaan Rakenneryhmt hyvksynnn kytt ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 automatisointijrjestelmiss SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M.

1-32

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten tytyy kyseinen rakenneryhm lhett valmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siell.

Erityiset vaatimukset
1. Hajautettu ulkopiirilaite ET 200M ja SIMATIC S7-300 tytyy asentaa kytkentkaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon. Niden tytyy olla vhintn kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tllin on huomioitava ympristolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle tytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vyhykett 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan). 2. Kun johdolla tai tmn kotelon johdon sisnviennill saavutetaan > 70 C lmptila tai kun kyttolosuhteissa lmptila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 C, tytyy johdon lmptilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lmptiloja. 3. Kytettyjen johtojen sisnohjauksien tytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia. 4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetn virheilt suojattujen signaalirakenneryhmien tuloille ja lhdille, tytyy olla hyvksyttyj tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC rjhdyssuojausta varten. 5. Toimenpiteet tytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjnnite voi transienttien kautta ylitty enemmn kuin 40 %. 6. Ympristlmptila-alue: 0 C ... 60 C 7. Kotelon sislle, avauksen jlkeen nkyvlle paikalle, on kiinnitettv kilpi, jossa on seuraava varoitus: Varoitus Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia varten. l tllin kyt mitn kytkimi, ved tai liit mitn rakenneryhmi, lk erota mitn shkjohtoja (pistoliittimi). Tt varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, ett minknlaista rjhdysvaarannettua ilmakeh ei ole olemassa.

Hyvksyttyjen rakenneryhmien lista

Lista hyvksiytyist rakennesarjoista lytyy internetist osoitteesta: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ kyttjtunnuksella 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-33

General Technical Specifications

1.9.9

Anvndning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskomrde zon 2

Zon 2
Explosionsriskomrden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att en atmosfr med explosionsfara freligger.
Zon 2 Explosionsfara Explosiv gasatmosfr uppstr endast sllan eller kortvarigt Nej Exempel Omrden kring flnsfrbindelser med packningar vid rrledningar i slutna utrymmen Utanfr zon 2 Standardanvndning av decentral periferi

Skert omrde

Nedan fljer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av den decentrala periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATICS7-300 i ett explosionsriskomrde.

Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om ET 200M och de olika S7-300-komponentgrupperna finner du i handboken.

Tillverkningsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Godknnande
II 3 G Kontrollnummer: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 02ATEX1096 X enligt EN 50021 : 1999

Anvisning Komponentgrupper med godknnande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 fr endast anvndas i automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET200M frn apparatgrupp 3.

1-34

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Underhll
Vid reparation mste den aktuella komponentgruppen insndas till tillverkaren. Reparationer fr endast genomfras dr.

Srskilda villkor
1. Den decentrala periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATICS7-300 mste monteras i ett kopplingsskp eller metallhus. Dessa mste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Drvid ska omgivningsvillkoren dr enheten installeras beaktas. Fr kpan mste en tillverkardeklaration fr zon 2 freligga (enligt EN 50021). 2. Om en temperatur p > 70C uppns vid husets kabel resp kabelinfring under driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trdfrgreningen kan vara > 80C under driftvillkor, mste kabelns temperaturegenskaper verensstmma med den verkligen uppmtta temperaturen. 3. De anvnda kabelinfringarna mste uppfylla kraven i det krvda IPskyddsutfrandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021). 4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till felskrade signalenheters in- och utgngar, mste vara godknda fr explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. tgrder mste vidtas s, att mrkspnningen ej kan verskridas med mer n 40% genom transienter. 6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0 C till 60 C 7. Nr huset ppnats ska en skylt med fljande varning monteras p ett tydligt synligt stlle huset: Varning Huset fr endast ppnas under kort tid, t ex fr visuell diagnos. Anvnd drvid inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frnskilj inga elektriska ledningar (insticksanslutningar). Ingen hnsyn mste tas till denna varning om det r skert att det inte rder ngon explosionsfarlig atmosfr.

Lista ver godknda komponentgrupper

Lista ver godknda enheter terfinns i Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-35

General Technical Specifications

1.9.10

Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso 2

Zona 2
As reas expostas ao perigo de exploso so divididas em zonas. As zonas so diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existncia de uma atmosfera explosiva.
Zona 2 Perigo de exploso S raramente e por um breve perodo de tempo surgem atmosferas explosivas Exemplo reas em torno de ligaes flangeadas com vedaes chatas em tubulaes em recintos fechados fora da zona 2 Aplicaes descentralizadas de periferia descentralizada

rea segura No

A seguir, o encontrar avisos importantes para a instalao do aparelho perifrico descentralizado ET 200M e da SIMATIC S7-300 em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso.

Mais informaes
Para obter mais informaes sobre o ET 200M e os diversos grupos construtivos S7-300, consulte o manual.

Local de produo
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

Licena
II 3 G Nmero de ensaio: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999

KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Aviso II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 s podem ser Componentes com a licena aplicados em sistemas de automao SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M da categoria de aparelho 3.

1-36

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

Reparo
Os grupos construtivos em questo devem ser remetidos para o local de produo a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas l deve ser efetuado o reparo.

Condies especiais
1. O aparelho perifrico ET 200M e a SIMATIC S7-300 devem ser montados em um armrio de distribuio ou em uma caixa metlica. Estes devem garantir no mnimo o tipo de proteo IP 54. Durante este trabalho devero ser levados em considerao as condies locais, nas quais o aparelho ser instalado. Para a caixa dever ser apresentada uma declarao do fabricante para a zona 2 (de acordo com EN 50021). 2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaa sob as condies operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 C, ou caso sob condies operacionais a temperatura na ramificao do fio poder atingir > 80 C, as caratersticas de temperatura devero corresponder s temperaturas realmente medidas. 3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de proteo IP e seo 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021). 4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em entradas e sadas de mdulos de sinais protegidos contra erro, devem possuir a licena para a proteo de exploso do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tenso nominal atravs de transitrios no possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %. 6. rea de temperatura ambiente: 0 C at 60 C 7. No mbito da carcaa deve ser colocada, aps a abertura, em um ponto bem visvel uma placa com a seguinte advertncia: Advertncia A carcaa deve ser aberta apenas por um breve perodo de tempo, por ex. para diagnstico visual. No acione nenhum interruptor, no retire ou conecte nenhum mdulo e no separe nenhum fio eltrico (ligaes de tomada). Esta advertncia poder ser ignorada caso se saiba que no h nenhuma atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de exploso.

Lista dos componentes autorizados

A lista com os mdulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ sob o nmero de ID 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-37

General Technical Specifications

1.9.11

ET 200M / S7-300 , 2

2
. .
2 2

ET 200M SIMATIC S7-300 .

ET 200M () S7-300 .

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Strae 50 92224 Amberg Germany

II 3 G EN 50021 : 1999 EEx nA II T3 .. T6

: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M 3.

1-38

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

General Technical Specifications

. .

1. ET 200M SIMATIC S7-300 . IP 54. , . 2 ( EN 50021). 2. 70 C 80 C, . 3. IP 54 7.2 ( EN 50021). 4. , .., , EEx nA EEx nC. 5. , 40 %. 6. : 0 C 60 C 7. : , .. . , ( ). , .

: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ 13702947

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

1-39

General Technical Specifications

1-40

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

Introduction
Various power supply modules are available to supply your S7-300 programmable controller and the sensors/actuators with 24 VDC.

Power supply modules

This chapter describes the technical specifications of the power supply modules of the S7-300 programmable controller. In addition to the technical specifications, this chapter describes the following: The characteristics Connection Diagram Block Diagram Line protection Reaction to atypical operating conditions

In this chapter
Section 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Contents Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A (6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; (6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0) Page 2-2 2-6 2-9 2-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-1

Power Supply Modules

2.1

Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A; (6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)

Order number SIMATIC Outdoor module

6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 305 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features: Output current 2 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to DC power supply (rated input voltage 24/48/72/96/110 VDC) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply

2-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

Terminal assignment of the PS 305; 2 A

LED for 24 VDC output voltage available 24 VDC

On/Off switch for 24 VDC I Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor L+1 M1

L+2 M2 L+2 M2 L+2 M2

Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage

Strain-relief assembly Figure 2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-3

Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 305; 2 A (6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 80 125 120 Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor

Approx. 740 g Input Rating

Input voltage

Isolation voltage rating (24 V to input) Tested with

150 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit > 10 ms min. 1 s 75% 64 W 16 W

Rated value Voltage range At 24 V At 48 V At 72 V At 96 V At 110 V

24/48/72/96/1 VDC 10 16.8 to 138 VDC 2.7 A 1.3 A 0.9 A 0.65 A 0.6 A 20 A 5 A2s Output Rating

Rated input current

Reliable isolation Buffering of supply failures (at 24/48/72/96/1 V) 10

Repeat rate

Efficiency Power input Power loss

Inrush current (at 25 _C) I2t (at inrush current)

Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED

Output voltage

Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time Rated value

24 VDC 24 V " 3 %, stable at no load max. 3 s 2 A; 1) Can be connected in parallel

1)

With limited input voltage range > 24 V (24 to 138 VDC) the PS 305 can be loaded with 3 A.

Output current

Short-circuit protection Residual ripple

Electronic, nonlatching, from 1.65 to 1.95 x IN max. 150 mVss

2-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 305; 2 A

L+1 M1 U 24 VDC I/

L+2 M2

Figure 2-2

Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 305 power supply module (2 A): Rated current at 110 VDC: 10 A Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ...
... the output circuit is overloaded:

... Then ...

24 VDC LED
Flashes Dark

I > 3.9 A (dynamic) 3 A < I v 3.9 A (static)

Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery

... the output is short-circuited

An overvoltage occurs on the primary side There is an undervoltage on the primary side

Dark

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-5

Power Supply Modules

2.2

Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; (6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features: Output current 2 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to single-phase AC system (input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 2 A

LED for 24 VDC output voltage available 24 VDC 230V Voltage Selector

On/Off switch for 24 VDC

L1 N

Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage

L+ M L+ M

Strain-relief assembly

Figure 2-3

Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)

2-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 2 A

L1 N U 24 VDC I/

L+ M

Figure 2-4

Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module (2 A): Rated current at 230 VAC: 6 A Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ...
... the output circuit is overloaded:

... Then ...

24 VDC LED
Flashes Dark

I > 2.6 A (dynamic) 2 A < I v 2.6 A (static)

Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery

... the output is short-circuited

An overvoltage occurs on the primary side There is an undervoltage on the primary side

Dark

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-7

Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 2 A (6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 50 125 120 Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor

Approx. 420 g Input Rating

Input voltage

Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) Tested with

250 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min 1 s 83 % 58 W typ. 10 W

Rated value Rated value Permitted range At 230 V At 120 V

120 / 230 VAC 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz 0.5 A 0.8 A 20 A 1 A2s Output Rating

System frequency

Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V)

Rated input current

Repeat rate

Efficiency Power input Power loss

Inrush current (at 25C) I2t (at inrush current)

Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED

Output voltage

Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time Rated value

24 VDC 24 V " 5 %, stable at no load max. 2.5 s

Output current 2 A, Cannot be connected in parallel Short-circuit protection Residual ripple Electronic, nonlatching, 1.1 to 1.3 x IN max. 150 mVss

2-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

2.3

Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0

Order number SIMATIC Outdoor module

6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (5 A) has the following salient features: Output current 5 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to single-phase AC system (input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-9

Power Supply Modules

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 5 A

LED for 24 VDC output voltage available 24 VDC Voltage Selector On/Off switch for 24 VDC I Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor L1 N 230V

L+ M L+ M L+ M

Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage

Strain-relief assembly Figure 2-5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 5 A

L1 N U 24 VDC I/

L+ M

Figure 2-6

Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)

2-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module (5 A): Rated current at 230 VAC: 10 A Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ...
... the output circuit is overloaded:

... Then ...

24 VDC LED
Flashes Dark Dark

I > 6.5 A (dynamic) 5 A < I v 6.5 A (static)

Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery

... the output is short-circuited An overvoltage occurs on the primary side There is an undervoltage on the primary side

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-11

Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 80 x 125 x 120 Approx. 740 g Input Rating Input voltage Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor

Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) Tested with

250 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min 1 s 87 % 138 W typ. 18 W

Rated value Rated value Permitted range At 120 V At 230 V

120 / 230 VAC 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz 2A 1A 45 A 1.2 A2s Output Rating

System frequency

Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V)

Rated input current

Repeat rate

Efficiency Power input Power loss

Inrush current (at 25 _C) I2t (at inrush current)

Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED

Output voltage

Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time Rated value

24 VDC 24 V " 5 %, stable at no load max. 2.5 s 5A Cannot be connected in parallel

Output current

Short-circuit protection Residual ripple

Electronic, nonlatching, from 1.1 to 1.3 x IN max. 150 mVss

2-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 80 x 125 x 120 Approx. 570 g Input Rating Input voltage Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor

Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) Tested with

250 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min. 1 s 84% 143 W 23 W

Rated value Rated value Permitted range At 120 V At 230 V

120/230 VDC 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz 2.1 A 1.2 A 45 A 1.8 A2s Output Rating

System frequency

Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V)

Rated input current

Repeat rate

Efficiency Power input Power loss

Inrush current (at 25 _C) I2t (at inrush current)

Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED

Output voltage

Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time Rated value

24 VDC 24 V " 3 % max. 3 s 5 A; cannot be connected in parallel Electronic, nonlatching, from 1.1 to 1.3 x IN max. 150 mVss

Output current

Short-circuit protection

Residual ripple

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-13

Power Supply Modules

2.4

Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0

Characteristics
The PS 307 power supply module (10 A) has the following salient features: Output current 10 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to single-phase AC system (input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply

Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 10 A

LED for 24 VDC output voltage available

24 VDC 230V I

Voltage Selector On/Off switch for 24 VDC

L1 N

L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M

Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage

Strain-relief assembly

Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor

Figure 2-7

Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)

2-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Power Supply Modules

Basic circuit diagram of the PS 307; 10 A

L1 N U 24 VDC I/

L+ M

Figure 2-8

Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)

Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example, Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module (10 A): Rated current at 230 VAC: 16 A Tripping characteristic (type): C.

Reaction to atypical operating conditions

Table 2-4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ...
... the output circuit is overloaded:

Reaction of the module

24 VDC LED
Flashes Dark

I > 13 A (dynamic) 10 A < I v 13 A (static)

Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery

... the output is short-circuited

An overvoltage occurs on the primary side There is an undervoltage on the primary side

Dark

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

2-15

Power Supply Modules

Technical specifications of the PS 307; 10 A (6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Input Rating Input voltage 200 x 125 x 120 1.2 kg Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor

120 / 230 VAC 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz 1.7 A 3.5 A 55 A 9 A2s Output Rating

Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) Tested with

250 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min 1 s 89 % 270 W typ. 30 W

Rated value Rated value Permitted range At 230 V At 120 V

System frequency

Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V)

Rated input current

Repeat rate

Efficiency Power input Power loss

Inrush current (at 25 C) I2t (at inrush current)

Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED

Output voltage

Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time Rated value

24 VDC 24 V " 5 %, stable at no load max. 2.5 s

Output current 10 A, Cannot be connected in parallel Short-circuit protection Residual ripple Electronic, nonlatching, from 1.1 to 1.3 x IN max. 150 mVss

2-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Structure of the chapter

The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects: 1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here 2. Module overview on the most important properties of the modules 3. Sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module 4. Information that is generally valid in other words, relating to all digital modules (for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics) 5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special characteristics of the module): a) for digital input modules b) for digital output modules c) for relay output modules d) for digital input/output modules

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and 128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-1

Digital Modules

In this chapter
Section 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 Module Overview Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Digital Module Parameter Assignment Diagnostics of the Digital Modules Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24; (6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC; (6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24; (6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; Source Input; (6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V (6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125; (6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC (6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230; (6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 16 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed; (6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC (6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0) Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A; (6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0) Contents Page 3-4 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-16 3-18 3-20 3-22 3-34 3-36 3-38 3-40 3-42 3-44 3-46 3-49 3-53 3-56 3-59 3-66 3-69 3-72 3-81

3-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Section 3.25 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33

Contents Digital Input module SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0) Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0) Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0) Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0) Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A; (6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0) Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 16/DO16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0) Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0) Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Page 3-84 3-87 3-93 3-96 3-100 3-106 3-110 3-113 3-116

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-3

Digital Modules

3.1

Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task.
Table 3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC with hardware and diagnostic interrupts (-7BH01-) (-1BH10-) Number of inputs 32 DI; isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC Switches; two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs) Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon edge change Settable input delays Special Features No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 short-circuit-pro of sensor supplies for 8 channels each External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors No No No No No 32 DI; isolated in groups of 8 120 VAC 16 DI; isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC 16 DI; isolated in groups of 16 16 DI; isolated in groups of 16 16 DI, source input, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input

Module Characteristics

(-1BL00-)

(-1EL00-)

(-1BH02-)

(-1BH50-)

Rated input voltage Suitable for...

24 VDC

24 VDC

3-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Table 3-2

Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48V SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC (-1CH20-) (-1CH00-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 1 24 to 48 VDC, 24 to 48 VAC Switches; two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 8 48 to 125 VDC 16 DI; isolated in groups of 4 120/230 VAC Switches; two and three-wire AC proximity switches No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 8 DI, isolated in groups of 2 120/230 VAC SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC (-1FH00-) SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC (-1FF01-) (-1FF10-) 8 DI; isolated in groups of 1 120/230 VAC SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

Module Characteristics
Number of inputs Rated input voltage Suitable for...

Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon edge change Settable input delays Special Features

No No No No No

No No No No No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-5

Digital Modules

Table 3-3

Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC 0.5 A (-1BL00-) 32 DO; isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A 24 VDC SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/ 1A (-1FL00-) 32 DO; isolated in groups of 8 1.0 A 120 VAC SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A (-1BH01-) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A 24 VDC SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A High Speed (-1BH10-) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A 24 VDC SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VDC/ 1A (-1FH00-) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A 120/230 VAC

Module Characteristics
Number of outputs

(-5GH00-) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 1 0.5 A 24 to 48 VDC, 24 to 48 VAC

Output current Rated load voltage Suitable for... Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Substitute value output Special Features

Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No

3-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Table 3-4

Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

SM 322; DO 8 x 24VDC/ 2A SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt (-8BF00-) 8 DO; isolated in groups of 8 SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/ 1.5 A SM 322; DO8 x 120/ 230 VAC/2A SM 322; DO8 x 120/ 230 VAC/ 2A ISOL (-5FF00-) 8 DO; isolated in groups of 1

Module Characteristics
Number of outputs

(-1BF01-) 8 DO; isolated in groups of 4

(-1CF00-) 8 DO; isolated and reverse polarity protection, in groups of 4 1.5 A 48 to 125 VDC

(-1FF01-) 8 DO; isolated in groups of 4

Output current Rated load voltage Suitable for...

2A 24 VDC

0.5 A 24 VDC

2A 120/230 VAC

2A 120/230 VAC

Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. No No No No Fuse blown display. Replaceable fuse for each group No Yes Yes Yes -

Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Substitute value output Special Features

No No No No

No Yes Yes Yes Redundant driving of a load possible

No No No No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-7

Digital Modules

Table 3-5

Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module

SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120 VAC (-1HH01-) SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC (-1HF01-) SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A (-5HF00-) SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A (-1HF10-)

Characteristics
Number of outputs Rated load voltage Suitable for... Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Substitute value output Special Features

16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 to 120 VDC, 48 to 230 VAC

8 outputs, isolated in groups of 2 24 to 120 VDC, 48 to 230 VAC

8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 230 VAC

8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 24 to 120 VDC, 48 to 230 VAC

AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and indicator lights No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No

3-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Table 3-6

Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16x24 VDC/ 0.5 A (-1BL00-) SM 323; DI 8/DO 8x 24 VDC/0.5 A (-1BH01-) SM 327; DI 8/DX 8x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable (-1BH00-)

Characteristics

Number of inputs Number of outputs Rated input voltage Output current Rated load voltage Inputs suitable for... Outputs suitable for... Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon edge change Settable input delay Substitute value output Special Features

16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC 0.5 A 24 VDC

8 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC 0.5 A 24 VDC

8 digital inputs and 8 individually parameterizable inputs or outputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC 0.5 A 24 VDC

Switches and two, three and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs). Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-9

Digital Modules

3.2

Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission digital modules successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps
Table 3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module

Step 1. 2.

Procedure Select the module Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 network

Refer To... Section 3.1 and specific module section from Section 3.5 Mounting section in the Installation Manual for the programmable logic controller being used:

S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware

and Installation or S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation or

ET 200M Distributed I/O Device

3. 4. Assign parameters to module Commission configuration Section 3.3 Commissioning section in the Installation Manual for the programmable controller being used:

S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware

and Installation or S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation or ET 200M Distributed I/O Device 5. If commissioning was not successful, diagnose configuration Section 3.4

3-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.3

Digital Module Parameter Assignment

Introduction
Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics of dome modules by means of parameter assignment. The information contained in this section refers only to the programmable digital modules: Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with process and diagnosis alarm, synchronous; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0) Digital input module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0) Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0) Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0) Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. You must perform parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU. When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above. You can also change the dynamic parameters in the running user program in an S7 logic control using SFC. Note, however, that after a change from RUN STOP, STOP RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A. Parameter Static Dynamic Settable with PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) SFC 55 in the user program CPU Operating State STOP STOP RUN

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-11

Digital Modules

Parameters of the digital modules

The settable parameters are listed in the special section on the module.

3.4

Diagnostics of the Digital Modules

Introduction
The information contained in this section refers only to the digital modules with diagnostics capability. For the S7-300, these modules are as follows: Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with hardware and diagnostic interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC (6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0) Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0) Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the Diagnostics parameter field in STEP 7. Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the digital module and forwarded to the CPU. The SF LED on the digital module lights. If you have programmed Enable Diagnostic Interrupt in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

3-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

The digital modules with diagnostics capability indicate errors for you by means of their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the digital module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified. The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).

Diagnostic messages interrupt processing by the digital modules

You will find the diagnostic messages with their possible causes and remedial action, together with a description of possible interrupts in the specific section on the module.

3.5

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24; (6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 Module

6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC has the following salient features: 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-13

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Backplane bus interface

24V

24V

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Input byte x

Input byte (x+2)

Input byte (x+1)

Input byte (x+3)

Figure 3-2

Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

3-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 120 Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 32 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Input voltage Insulation tested with Current consumption 500 VDC max. 15 mA typ. 6.5 W

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Unshielded Shielded

Data for Selecting a Sensor

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

24 VDC 13 to 30 V 30 to + 5 V typ. 7 mA 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 32 32 16

Input current Input delay

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Between the different circuits Yes Yes 16 75 VDC / 60 VAC

Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Permitted potential difference

Permitted bias current

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-15

Digital Modules

3.6

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC; (6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 32 x 20 VAC features the following characteristics: 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 120 VAC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC

1L

3L

1N 2L

backplane bus IM

3N 4L

2N

4N

Channel number Status display - green Figure 3-3 ModuleView and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 20 VAC

3-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 300 g Data for Specific Module No 32 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Input voltage Interrupts Diagnostic functions Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel None None

Data for Selecting a Sensor

Unshielded Shielded
Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously

Rated value For 1 signal For 0 signal Frequency range

120 VAC 74 to 132 V 0 to 20 V 47 to 63 Hz

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Input current

At 1 signal
Input delay

typ. 21 mA max. 15 ms max. 25 ms According to IEC 61131, type 2 Possible max. 4 A

Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C 32 24

From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0
Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Vertical configuration
Up to 40 _C Isolation 32 Yes Yes 8 120 VAC 250 VAC 2500 VDC max. 16 mA typ. 4 W

Permitted bias current

Between channels and

backplane bus
In groups of Permitted potential difference

Between the channels

Between Minternal and

the inputs

Between the inputs of

the different groups
Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-17

Digital Modules

3.7

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24; (6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 module

6AG1321-1BH02-2AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC has the following salient features: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Backplane bus interface

M 24 V

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC

3-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Input voltage Data for Selecting a Sensor

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0

24 VDC 13 to 30 V 30 to + 5 V

Input current At signal 1 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 typ. 7 mA 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA Input delay

Unshielded Shielded

Input characteristic curve

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 16 16

Permitted bias current

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between the different circuits

Yes

Permitted potential difference 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 10 mA typ. 3.5 W

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-19

Digital Modules

3.8

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0)

Order number:
6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed has the following salient features: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). Supports clocked operation

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed

Backplane bus interface

M 24 V

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-5 Module view and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC High Speed

3-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable Yes 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Input voltage Data for Selecting a Sensor

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0

24 VDC 13 to 30 V 30 to + 5 V

Input current At signal 1 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 typ. 7 mA 25 to 75 ms 25 to 75 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA Input delay

Unshielded Shielded

Input characteristic curve

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 16 16

Permitted bias current

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between the different circuits

Yes

Permitted potential difference 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 110 mA typ. 3.8 W

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-21

Digital Modules

3.9

Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 module

6AG1321-7BH01-2AB0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts features the following characteristics: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Input characteristic curve according to IEC 61131, Type 2 Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). 2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors Sensor supply (Vs) status display Group error display Supports clocked operation Supports the parameter changing during the RUN function Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt Programmable input delays

3-22

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

L+

SF

L+
Brokenwire detection

Vs

L+

Vs Vs

Vs

Brokenwire detection

Backplane bus interface

M 24 V

Channel number Status display green Fault indicator red Encoder supplies Vs green Figure 3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-23

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders

The figure below shows how encoder can additionally be supplied by means of Vs with a redundant voltage source for example, via another module).
L+ Short-circuitproof driver Digital input module Vs M to the sensors 1 L+ 2 L+

Figure 3-7

Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder

In order to detect a broken wire, it is necessary to wire the encoder contact with a resistor.

L +/ Vs

E x.x

15 kW ... 18 kW

Figure 3-8

Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

3-24

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Parameter changing during the RUN is possible Yes Yes gives the last valid output value before the parameterization 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics and encoder L+ 24 VDC Yes Diagnostic functions Interrupts

Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt

Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible

Group error display Diagnostics information read-out Wire-break

Behavior of the non parameterized inputs

Monitoring of yes, at I < 1 mA

Number of inputs Length of cable

Sensor Power Supply Outputs Number of outputs Output voltage 2 min. L+ (2.5 V) 120 mA 0 to 150 mA Permitted Yes, electronic

Unshielded Shielded

With load Rated value Permitted range

Output current

Reverse polarity protection

Additional (redundant) supply Short-circuit protection

Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Yes 16 16

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1

24 VDC 13 to 30 V *30 to + 5 V typ. 7 mA According to IEC 61131, type 2 Possible max. 2 mA 10 to 18 kOhm

Input current Input characteristic curve

Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Permitted bias current

From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without sensor supply VS)

max. 130 mA max. 90 mA typ. 4 W

Resistive circuit of the sensor for detecting broken wires

Time/Frequency Internal processing time for status processing (in non synchronous operation)

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display

Inputs Sensor power supplies (Vs)

Green LED per channel Green LED per output

Release of process and diagnosis alarm Parameters can be assigned Rated value

max. 40 ms

Input delay Yes typ. 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-25

Digital Modules

3.9.1

Synchronicity

Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved for the SIMATIC with an equidistant DP bus cycle and synchronization of the following free running single cycles: Free running of the user program. The length of the cycle time can vary due to acyclic program branches. Free running, variable DP cycle at the PROFIBUS subnetwork Free running cycle at the DP slave back plane bus. Free running cycle during signal processing and conversion in the electronic modules of the DP slave. In the case of equidistance the DP cycle runs in phase and with the same length. The procedure levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the synchronous peripheral are synchronized in this cycle. The E/A data are therefore transferred at defined and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).

Requirements
The DP-Master and DP-Slave must support the synchronicity. They require STEP 7 from Version 5.2.

Module filtering mode Synchronicity

In synchronous operation, the following conditions apply:
Filter and processing time TWE between reading the current value and loading it into the transfer buffer (the specified value for TWE applies, independent of the activation of the hardware interrupt or diagnosis) including an input delay time of TDPmin Diagnostic interrupt 255 to 345 ms

100 ms 2.5 ms max. 4 x TDP

Note In synchronous mode the input delay of the inputs is always set to 100 ms independent of the input delay parameterized in STEP 7

Further information
Further information on clock synchronicity is given in the Online help of STEP 7, in the manual Local peripheral system ET 200Mand in the manual Clock synchronicity.

3-26

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.9.2

Assigning Parameters to SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in the reference manual, section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC in the table below. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Table 3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 Parameter Enable Value Range Default Settings No No (DC) Static Module Parameter Type Dynamic Scope

Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt

Input delay/voltage type

Yes/no Yes/no 0.1 ms (DC) 0.5 ms (DC) 3 ms (DC) 15 ms (DC) 20 ms (DC/AC)

Module

Diagnostics

Sensor supply missing Wire-break

Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no

No No No No

Static

Channel group

Rising edge Falling edge

Dynamic

Channel group

Assignment of the encoder supplies to channel groups

The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups: inputs 0 to 7 and inputs 8 to 15. In these two channel groups, you parameterize the diagnostics for the encoder supply, too.

Assigning interrupt parameters to channel groups

The table below shows the channels that can be combined to form a channel group if you would like to parameterize interrupt processing. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-27

Digital Modules

Table 3-9

Assigning Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 Parameter... Can Be Set in Following Channel Groups 0 and 1 2 and 3 4 and 5 6 and 7 8 and 9 10 and 11 12 and 13 14 and 15 0 to 7 8 to 15 0 and 1 2 and 3 Channel Group Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 :

Hardware interrupt (for falling, rising or both types of pulse edges)

Diagnostic interrupt for missing sensor supply Diagnostic interrupt for wirebreak

Tolerances of the programmable input delays

Table 3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 Programmed Input delay 0.1 ms 0.5 ms 3 ms (preset) 15 ms 20 ms Tolerance 60 to 140 ms 400 to 900 ms 2,6 to 3,3 ms 12 to 15 ms 17 to 23 ms

3-28

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.9.3

Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 CPU Operating State POWER ON RUN STOP POWER OFF Power Supply L+ to Digital Module L+ exists L+ missing L+ exists L+ missing L+ exists L+ missing Input Value of Digital Module Process value 0 signal Process value 0 signal

Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC.
Table 3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagnostics Channel group Channel group Channel group Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module No Yes Parameters can be assigned

Sensor supply missing Wire-break Module not parameterized. External auxiliary supply missing Internal auxiliary power missing Fuse blown Incorrect parameter on module Watchdog timeout EPROM error RAM error Hardware interrupt lost

SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-29

Digital Modules

Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly in STEP 7.

Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

A failure of the supply voltage of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module. The input value is initially held for 20 to 40 ms before the 0 signal is transferred to the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not modify the process value (refer to Table 3-11). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 3.9.4).

Failure of the supply voltage with redundant encoder incoming supply

Note If an external redundant source is applied simultaneously to the sensor supply (Vs), a failure in the internal sensor supply causes a failure of the internal and/or external sensor supply and/or a blown fuse to be indicated instead of a regular sensor supply failure.

Short-circuit of sensor supply Vs

Irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a short-circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs.

3-30

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Causes of error and remedial measures

Table 3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V, Causes of Error and Remedial Action Diagnostics Message Lack of encoder supply External auxiliary voltage missing Internal auxiliary voltage missing Fuse blown Wrong parameters in module Watchdog tripped Possible Error Cause Overload of sensor supply Short circuit of sensor supply to M Power supply L+ to module missing Power supply L+ to module missing Fuse in module defective Fuse in module defective One parameter or the combination of parameters is not plausible Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective EPROM error Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective RAM error Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, since the previous interrupt was not acknowledged; configuration error possible Module not parameterized Fault during startup Remedy Eliminate overload Eliminate short circuit Feed supply L+ Feed supply L+ Replace module Replace module Reassign module parameter Eliminate interference Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module Change interrupt processing in CPU and reconfigure module parameters, if required The error continues until the module is configured with new parameters Reassign module parameters

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-31

Digital Modules

3.9.4

Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Introduction
This section describes the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC with regard to its interrupt behavior. The following interrupts exist: Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.9.2).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC can trigger a hardware interrupt for every channel group with a rising or falling edge, or both, of a signal status change. Perform parameter assignment one channel group at a time. It can be modified at any time (in RUN mode using the user program). Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU (OB 40). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority classes with low priority. You can set in the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40) how the programmable logic controller has to react to an edge change. When the hardware interrupt OB is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module. The module can buffer one interrupt per channel. If no higher priority run-time levels are waiting to be processed, the buffered interrupts (of all modules) are serviced one after the other by the CPU according to the order in which they occurred.
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-32

Digital Modules

Hardware interrupt lost

In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that channel before it has been processed by the CPU, a diagnostic interrupt hardware interrupt lost is triggered. More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt buffered on this channel has been executed.

Interrupt-triggering channels
The channel triggered by the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the OB 40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable. Figure 3-9 shows the assignment of the bits to the local data double word 8.
Byte 6/7 From 8 Variable OB40_MDL_ADDR OB40_POINT_ADDR Data type WORD DWORD B#16#0 See Figure 3-9 Description Address of the interrupt triggering module Display of the interrupt triggering inputs

LB 8

LB 9

LB 10

LB 11 1 0 Bit no. LD 8

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

reserved Edge change: Channel 8 Edge change: Channel 9 Edge change channel 10 Edge change: Channel 15

Edge change: Channel 0 Edge change: Channel 1 Edge change channel 2 Edge change: Channel 7 Figure 3-9 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-33

Digital Modules

3.10

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; Source Input; (6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC (source input) has the following salient features: 16 inputs, source input, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

L+

Backplane bus interface

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC (Source Input)

3-34

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage (reference potential is L+)

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

24 VDC 13 V to 30 V +30 V to 5 V typ. 7 mA 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA

Input current Input delay

Unshielded Shielded

Input characteristic curve

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 16 Yes 16

Permitted bias current

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the different circuits

Permitted potential difference 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 10 mA typ. 3.5 W

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-35

Digital Modules

3.11

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V (6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x UC24/48 V features the following characteristics: 16 inputs, isolated electrically Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V Rated input voltage from 24 to 48 DC) Inputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required configuration

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48 VUC

0 1 2 3

0 1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Backplane bus interface

4 5 6 7

4 5 6 7

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48VUC

3-36

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Input voltage Interrupts Diagnostic functions Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LEDs per channel None None Data for Selecting a Sensor

Rated value At signal 1 At signal 0 Frequency range

24 or 48 VDC/ 24 or 48 VAC 14 V to 60 V 5 V to 5 V 0 to 63 Hz

Unshielded Shielded

Input current 16 16 At signal 1 At signal 0 typ. 2.7 mA 1 to +1 mA

Horizontal configuration Up to 60C All other configuration types Up to 40 C

Input delay From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 max. 16 ms max. 16 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels In groups of

Yes Yes 1

Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Permitted potential difference

170 VDC, 120 VAC 170 VDC, 120 VAC

Permitted bias current

max. 1 mA

Between the channels and the backplane bus Between the inputs of the different groups

Insulation tested with

Between the channels and the backplane bus Between the inputs of the different groups

1500 VAC 1500 VAC

Current consumption

From the backplane bus

max. 100 mA

Power dissipation of the module Operation with 24 V Operation with 48 V typ. 1.5 W typ. 2.8 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-37

Digital Modules

3.12

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125; (6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1321-1CH20-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC features the following characteristics: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 Rated input voltage 48 to 125 VDC Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1M 48 to 125 V

12 M Backplane bus interface 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2M 48 to 125 V

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

3-38

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 120 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously at UE Up to 60 V Up to 146 V 8 8 8 8 6 8 Input voltage Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Sensor Selection Data

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1 From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

48 VDC to 125 VDC 30 V to 146 V 146 V to 15 V typ. 3.5 mA 0.1 ms to 3.5 ms 0.7 ms to 3.0 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1 mA

Unshielded Shielded

Input current Input delay

Horizontal installation Up to 50 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C

Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Isolation

Permitted bias current

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of

Yes Yes 8 146 VDC / 132 VAC 1500 VDC max. 40 mA typ. 4.3 W

Permiss. potential differences Between the different circuits

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-39

Digital Modules

3.13

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V (6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics: 16 inputs, electrically isolated in groups of 4 120/230 VAC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three-wire proximity switches (alternating voltage)

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC

N M Backplane bus interface N

N M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230VAC

3-40

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 240 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 All load voltages must be of the same phase Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 120/230 V Input voltage Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

SensorSelection Data

Unshielded Shielded

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 Frequency range At signal 1 120 V, 60 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz

120/230 VAC 79 to 264 V 0 to 40 V 47 to 63 Hz

Input current typ. 8.0 mA typ. 16.0 mA max. 25 ms max. 25 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 2 mA

Input delay

16 16

0 to 1 0 to 1

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 C Vertical configuration Up to 40 C

Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Isolation

Yes Yes 4

Permitted bias current

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels In groups of

Permitted potential difference

Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups

500 VAC 230 VAC 4000 VDC

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

max. 29 mA typ. 4.9 W

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-41

Digital Modules

3.14

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230; (6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1321-1FF01-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics: 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 2 120/230 VAC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

1N

2N M Backplane bus interface

3N

4N M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

3-42

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 240 g Data for Specific Module No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Input voltage Interrupts Diagnostic functions Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel None None

Data for Selecting a Sensor

Unshielded Shielded

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 Frequency range At signal 1

120/230 VAC 79 to 264 V 0 to 40 V 47 to 63 Hz

Input current

120 V, 60 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz
8 8 Input delay

typ. 6.5 mA typ. 11 mA

Horizontal configuration

Up to 60 _C
Vertical configuration

Up to 40 _C
Isolation

At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

max. 25 ms max. 25 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 2 mA

Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of

Yes Yes 2 230 VAC 500 VAC 4000 VDC max. 29 mA typ. 4.9 W

Permitted bias current

Permitted potential difference

Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-43

Digital Modules

3.15

Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL has the following distinguishing characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 120/230 VAC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire AC proximity switches

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

1 4 7 10 M 11 14 17 M Backplane bus interface 20 21 24 27 30 31 34 37 M 40

Status display green

Channel number

Figure 3-15

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

3-44

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 240 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No Input voltage 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 All load voltages must be of the same phase Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 120/230 VAC Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Data for Selecting a Sensor

Unshielded Shielded

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 Frequency range At signal 1 120 V, 60 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz

120/230 VAC 79 to 264 V 0 to 40 V 47 to 63 Hz

Input current typ. 7.5 mA typ. 17.3 W max. 25 ms max. 25 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 2 mA

Input delay

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 C Vertical configuration Up to 40 C

8 8

0 to 1 0 to 1

Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels In groups of

Yes Yes 1

Permitted bias current

Permitted potential difference

Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups

230 VAC 500 VAC

Insulation tested with

Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups

1500 VAC 2000 VAC

Current consumption

From the backplane bus

max. 100 mA typ. 4.9 W

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-45

Digital Modules

3.16

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient features: 32 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-46

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A

24 V

1 L+

3 L+

24 V

1M

Backplane bus interface

3M

24 V

2L+

4 L+

24 V

2M

4M

Channel number Status display -green Figure 3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Terminal assignment
The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Output byte x

Output byte (x + 2)

Output byte (x + 1)

Output byte (x + 3)

Figure 3-17

Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-47

Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module No 32 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At signal 1 At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range At signal 0 (leakage current) From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

min. L + (0.8 V)

Output current 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA

Unshielded Shielded

Output delay (for resistive load) max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W

Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 2 A Yes Yes 8 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 110 mA max. 160 mA typ. 6.6 W Green LED per channel None None max. 4 A max. 3 A

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits

For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 For lamp load

max. 10 Hz L + (53 V), typ. Yes, electronic 1 A, typ.

Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without load)

Threshold on

Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

3-48

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.17

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A has the following distinguishing characteristics: 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8 1.0 A output current 120/230 VAC rated load voltage Blown fuse indicator for each group Suitable for AC solenoids, contactors, starters, fractional horsepower motors and indicator lights Group error display

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-49

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 x VC 120/230/1 A

SF1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SF3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SF2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 2 3 4

SF4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Channel numbers

Status display green Error display - red

SF

1 L1

2 L1

Backplane bus interface

SF

1N 1 L1

2N 2 L1

1N

2N

Figure 3-18

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; D0 32 x VAC 120/230 /1 A

3-50

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment
The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Output byte x

Output byte (x + 2)

Output byte (x + 1)

Output byte (x + 3)

Figure 3-19

Terminal assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x AC 120/230 V/1 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-51

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 32 x 120 VAC/1.0 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WxHxD (in millimeters) Weight 80 x 125 x 117 Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At signal 1
Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module Output current

min. L1 (0,8 V)

At 1 signal
Rated value Permitted range Permitted current surge (per group) 1A 10 mA to 1 A 10 A (for 2 AC scan cycles) max. 2 mA

Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable

No 32 max. 600 m max. 1000 m

Unshielded Shielded
Rated load voltage L1

At 0 signal

Leakage current
At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 1 AC scan cycle 1 AC scan cycle max. 60 V max. size 4 to NEMA max. 50 W

Voltages, Currents, Potentials 120/230 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz

Output delay (for resistive load)

Permitted frequency range

Total current of the outputs (per group)

Blocking voltage Zero transition Size of the motor starter

Horizontal configuration
up to 60 _C up to 40 _C Up to 40_C

max. 3 A max. 4 A max. 4 A

Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Vertical configuration
Isolation

For redundant To increase

Actuation of digital input Switch rate

actuation of a load performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible

Between channels and

backplane bus
In groups of Permitted potential difference

Yes Yes 8

Between the channels

Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups

250 VAC 250 VAC DC 4000 V max. 190 mA max. 10 mA typ. max. 25 W

For resistive load Inductive loads, For lamp load

max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz 1 Hz

according to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Short-circuit protection of the output

No

From the backplane bus From load voltage L1

(without load)
Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel No Yes Red LED (SF)

Group error display

3-52

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.18

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1322-1BH01-2AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient features: 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-53

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

1 L+

M Backplane bus interface

24 V

1M

2 L+

24 V

2M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

3-54

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 190 g Data for Specific Module No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At signal 1 At signal 1

min. L + (0.8 V)

Output current

Rated value Permitted range

At signal 0 (leakage current)

0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA

Unshielded Shielded

Output delay (for resistive load)

From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W

Load resistor range Lamp load max. 4 A max. 3 A max. 2 A Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

Up to 40 _C
Isolation

Triggering a digital input Yes Yes 8 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 80 mA max. 80 mA typ. 4.9 W Green LED per channel None None Switch rate

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels

In groups of
Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits

For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 For lamp load

max. 10 Hz L + (53 V), typ. Yes, electronic 1 A, typ.

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without load)

Threshold on

Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-55

Digital Modules

3.19

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed; (6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0)

Order number:
6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed has the following salient features: 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Supports clocked operation

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-56

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

1 L+

24 V

Backplane bus interface

1M

2 L+

24 V

2M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-21 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-57

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Yes 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At signal 1 At signal 1

min. L + (0.8 V)

Output current

Rated value Permitted range

At signal 0 (leakage current)

0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA

Unshielded Shielded

Output delay (for resistive load)

From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

max. 100 ms max. 200 ms

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 2 A Yes Yes 8 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 70 mA max. 110 mA typ. 5 W Green LED per channel None None max. 4 A max. 3 A

Internal module run time between the backplane bus and the output driver input

0 to 1 At 1 to 0

0.1 ms to 20 ms 0.1 ms to 20 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W

Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 1000 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

In groups of
Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

Insulation tested with Current consumption

For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 For lamp load

From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without load)

max. 10 Hz L + (53 V), typ. Yes, electronic 1 A, typ.

Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions

Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Threshold on

3-58

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.20

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC; (6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0

Characteristics Digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x UC24/48 V has the following features: 16 individually isolated static relay outputs Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V Switch characteristics: RDS ON is typically 0.25 ohms and RDS OFF is typically greater than 100 G-ohms Designed for load voltages up to 48 V AC or DC and there is no minimum load voltage Designed for output loads up to 0.5 A and there is no minimum load current Outputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required configuration Substitute values or Hold last values can be programmed for the outputs The module has diagnostics for parameterization errors and external loss of voltage Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and indicator lights

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-59

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC

0 1 2 3

SF 0 1 2 3

24V

L+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5V

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Backplane bus

4 5 6 7

4 5 6 7

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 M 20

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Channel number Status LEDs - green Byte X Byte (X +1)

Figure 3-22

Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC

3-60

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m 24 VDC Yes min. 5 ms Insulation tested with

Between channels and

backplane bus

1500 VAC 1500 VAC

Between channels and

power supply of the electronics the different groups

Between the outputs of

Current consumption

1500 VAC

Unshielded Shielded
Power rated voltage of the electronics L+

From the backplane bus From supply

voltage L+
Power dissipation of the module Status display Diagnostic functions

max. 100 mA max. 200 mA typ. 2.8 W Green LEDs per channel Red LED (SF) Parameters can be assigned Possible

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Reverse polarity
protection Power failure jumpering

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Total current of the outputs (per group)

Group error display

Interrupts max. 0.5 A max. 0.5 A

Horizontal configuration
Up to 60 C positions Up to 40 C

Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostics information

read-out
Output voltage

All other mounting

Total current of the outputs (per module)

Data for Selecting an Actuator

At signal 1
max. 8 A max. 8 A Output current

min. L+ (0.25 V)

Horizontal configuration
Up to 60 C positions Up to 40 C

At signal 1

All other mounting

Isolation

Yes Yes

rated value permissible surge current (per group) For 0 signal (leakage current)

0.5 A max. 1.5 A (max. 50 ms) max. 10 uA

Between channels and

backplane bus

Output delay (for resistive load)

Between channels and

power supply of the electronics
In groups of Permitted potential difference

From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0
External fuse for relay outputs

max. 6 ms max. 3 ms Fuse, I2 t: 1 A2 s, quick-acting* max. 2.5 W Varistor, 85 V Possible Not possible

Between channels Between channels and

backplane bus

Yes 1 170 VDC, 120 VAC 170 VDC, 120 VAC

Lamp load Contact circuit (internal) parallel switching of 2 outputs

For redundant triggering

of a load To increase performance

Between channels and

power supply of the electronics the different groups

Between the outputs of

170 VDC, 120 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-61

Digital Modules

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

Possible max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

For resistive load Inductive loads

according to IEC 947-5-1; DC 12 AC/12

max. 0.5 Hz

Outputs must be protected by a 250 V quick-acting fuse (recommended fuses: Wickman 194-1100 1.1 A and Littelfuse 0217-800 V 800 mA). When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), use only a suitable tool to remove the fuse if the module is not located in a potentially explosive atmosphere.

For lamp load

3-62

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.20.1

Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x UC24/48 V

Parameter assignment
Table 3-14 and Table 3-15 show the data record numbers for static and dynamic parameters.
Table 3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters): Parameters Enable diagnostics Comments Enabling an interrupt when the module fails because of an operation code error, a hardware fault or a voltage error.

Table 3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters): Parameters Behavior on CPU STOP Hold last value Substitute value output Substitute value Substitute value Each bit corresponds to an output. Comments

This module supports failure state/substitute value outputs when the CPU changes from RUN to STOP.

Status display
Each output of this module has a green LED to indicate the status of the relay. There is also a red LED (SF) that indicates the diagnostics status of the module.

Diagnostics, troubleshooting
Diagnostic data is assigned in accordance with the following technical specifications. In the additional interrupt information, the four system diagnostics data bytes can be read as data record 0 or in the first 4 bytes of data record 1.

Structure of the data record

The structure of data record 1 is as specified in Table 3-16.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-63

Digital Modules

Table 3-16 Structure of the data record for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V Data record 1 byte address 0..3 4 5 6 7 8..15 Available information System-specific diagnostics data Channel type Diagnosis length per channel in bytes Number of channels Channel error vector Channel-specific diagnostic data Contents 4 Bytes 72h

0
16 0 byte per channel 0 byte per channel

Table 3-17 shows the system diagnostics for module SM 322; DO 16 x UC24/48 V.
Table 3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V System diagnosis byte 1: D0: D1: D2: D3: D4: D5: D6: D7: Module error Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error External auxiliary supply missing Front connector missing Module not parameterized. Wrong parameters Technical specification Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes

3-64

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Table 3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V System diagnosis byte 2: D0..D3 D4: D5: D6: D7: Module Type Channel information available User information available Diagnostic alarm from substitute Spare 1111 No No No

System diagnosis byte 3: D0: D1: D2: D3: D4: D5: D6: D7: D0: D1: D2: D3: D4: D5: D6: D7: D0: D1: D2: D3: D4: D5: D6: D7: Memory module incorrect/missing Communication error RUN/STOP mode Time monitoring triggered Internal power failure Battery 1 empty Complete backup failure Spare Rack failure Processor failure EPROM error RAM error DAC error Blown fuse Hardware interrupt lost Spare Parameter setup error Grounding error Short-circuit to P Short-circuit to M Wire-break Spare Auxiliary supply missing Overtemperature No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes No No No

System diagnosis byte 4:

Channel-specific diagnosis byte

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-65

Digital Modules

3.21

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0)

Order number 6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0

Characteristics Digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A has the following distinguishing characteristics: 16 outputs, fused and electrically isolated in groups of 8 1 A output current Rated load voltage 120/230 VAC Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and indicator lights

3-66

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322 DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A

SF

5V

SF M

L1

M Backplane bus interface N 5V L1 SF M

Channel number Status LEDs - green Fault indicator red Figure 3-23 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-67

Digital Modules

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 275 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 All load voltages must be of the same phase Total current of the outputs (per group) 120/230 VAC

Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At signal 1

min. L + (0.8 V)

Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range for 0 C to 40 C Permitted range for 0 C to 60 C Permitted surge current (per group) 1A 10 mA to 1 A 10 mA to 0.5 A max. 20 A (with 2 half-waves) max. 2 mA max. 60 V

Unshielded Shielded

At signal 0 (leakage current)

Inhibit voltage Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of the motor starter Lamp load

max. size 4 to NEMA max. 50 W

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 2 A max. 4 A max. 2 A

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering

of a load

Possible (only outputs of the same group) No Possible

Isolation

To increase

performance

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels In groups of

Yes Yes 8 500 VAC 230 VAC 4000 VDC

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

Permitted potential difference Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups

For resistive load Inductive loads, For lamp load

max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

according to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15

max. 1 Hz Fuse 8 A, 250 V; per group min. 40 A max. 300 ms 8 A fuse, quick-acting

Short-circuit protection of output

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Min. current required for

max. 200 mA max. 2 mA typ. 8.6 W

From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (without load)

fuse to blow

Max. response time

Replacement fuses

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LED per channel No Red LED (SF) (fuse or no L1/N)

Wickman Schurter Littlefuse

Fuse carrier

19 194-8 A SP001.1014 217.008

19 653

Diagnostic interrupt Group error display

Diagnostic functions

Wickman

3-68

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.22

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A has the following salient features. 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 4 2 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-69

Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

1 L+

24 V

Backplane bus interface 1M

2 L+

24 V

2M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-24 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

3-70

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 190 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At signal 1

min. L + 0.8 V

Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range At signal 0 (leakage current) 2A 5 mA to 2.4 A max. 0.5 mA

Unshielded Shielded

Output delay (for resistive load) From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 12 W to 4 kW max. 10 W

Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 4 A max. 4 A

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible

Isolation

Triggering a digital input Yes Yes 4 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 40 mA max. 60 mA typ. 6.8 W Switch rate

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels

In groups of
Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits

For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 For lamp load

max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

max. 10 Hz typ. L + (48 V) Yes, electronic typ. 3 A

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (without load)

Threshold on

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-71

Digital Modules

3.23

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; with diagnostic interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1322-8BF00-2AB0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient features: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights 2 terminals per output Output without series diode Output with series diode (for redundant load control) Group error display Channel-specific status and error LEDs Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output

3-72

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

SF F0 0 F1 1 F2 2 F3 3

F4 4 F5 5 F6 6 F7 7

Connection Diagram Channel number, channel fault (F) Status display green Fault indicator red Figure 3-25 Module view of the SM 322; DO 8 24 V DC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-73

Digital Modules

L+ Monitoring Fuse Monitoring Control Diagnostics Status Logic Output drivers (8 x) L+

Output (8x) Output M

Backplane bus

Channel status LED (8x) green

0 to 7

Channel fault LED (8x) red

F 0 to 7

Group error display (1x) red Figure 3-26 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 DC 24 V/0.5 A

SF

Redundant control of a load

The output with series diode can be used for redundant control of a load. Redundant control is possible from two different signal modules without external circuitry. Both modules must have the same reference potential, M.

Note If the output with series diode is used, external short-circuits to L+ cannot be detected.

3-74

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 210 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) without series diode 24 VDC Diagnostic functions Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Red LED (F) per channel Possible Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

Group error display Channel error display (F) Diagnostics information readable

At signal 1

Without series diode With series diode

Output current

min. L + (0.8 V) min. L + (1.6 V)

Unshielded Shielded

At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range At signal 0 (leakage current) At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 max. 180 ms max. 245 ms 48 W to 3 kW max. 5 W 0.5 A 10 mA to 0.6 A1) max. 0.5 mA

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 4 A max. 4 A max. 3 A

Output delay (for resistive load)

Total current of the outputs (per group) with series diode

Load resistor range Lamp load max. 3 A max. 2 A max. 3 A Yes Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C

For redundant actuation of a load

Output with series diode only, must have the same reference potential Not possible Possible 1 binary input according to IEC 61131, Type 2; Type 1 with disabled open-circuit monitoring

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the different circuits

To increase performance

Triggering a digital input

Permitted potential difference 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Switch rate max. 70 mA max. 90 mA typ. 5 W

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (without load)

For resistive load Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load

max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 10 Hz typ. L + (45 V) Yes, electronic typ. 0.75 A to 1.5 A

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned

Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

Diagnostic interrupt

1)

Threshold on

5 mA to 0.6 A with disabled open-circuit monitoring

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-75

Digital Modules

3.23.1

Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A in the table below. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Table 3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A Parameter Enable Value Range Default Settings No EWS Parameter Type Dynamic Scope

Diagnostic interrupt
Behavior on CPU STOP Diagnostics

Yes/no Apply substitute value (EWS) Hold last value (LWH)

Module

Wire-break No load voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+

Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no

No No No No No Dynamic Channel Static Channel

Apply substitute value 1

3-76

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.23.2

Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the output values

The output values of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 3-19 Dependence of the output values on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A. CPU Operating State POWER ON RUN STOP Power Supply L+ to Digital Module L+ exists L+ missing L+ exists L+ missing POWER OFF L+ exists L+ missing Output Value of Digital Module CPU value 0 signal Substitute value/last value (0 signal preset) 0 signal 0 signal 0 signal

Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A is always indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnosis). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 3.23.3).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-77

Digital Modules

Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

The following table provides an overview of the diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A.
Table 3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A Diagnostics Message Wire-break Load voltage missing Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+ External auxiliary supply missing Internal auxiliary power missing Fuse blown Watchdog timeout EPROM error RAM error * LED SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF Scope of the Diagnostics Channel Channel Channel Channel Module Module Module Module Module Module Parameters can be assigned Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No

Open-circuit detection is performed at a current < 1 mA. When suitably parameterized, a wire-break results only in the SF LED and the corresponding channel error LED lighting up.

Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly in STEP 7.

3-78

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Causes of error and remedial action

Table 3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of Error and Remedial Action Diagnostics Message Wire-break Error Detection ... Only with output to 1 Possible Error Cause Open circuit between module and actuator Channel not connected (open) No load voltage Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+ No external auxiliary voltage No internal auxiliary voltage Fuse blown Watchdog tripped Only with output to 1 Only with output to 1 Always Always Always Defective output Overload of output Short-circuit of output to M Short-circuit at output to L+ of module supply Power supply L+ to module missing Power supply L+ to module missing Fuse in module defective Always Always Fuse in module defective Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective EPROM error Always Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective RAM error Always Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective Remedy Close circuit Disable the Diagnose Wire-break parameter for the channel in STEP 7 Replace module Eliminate overload Eliminate short circuit Eliminate short circuit Feed supply L+ Feed supply L+ Replace module Replace module Eliminate interference Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-79

Digital Modules

3.23.3

Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A

Introduction
The SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.23.1).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

3-80

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.24

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A; (6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1322-1CF00-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 4 1.5 A output current Rated load voltage 48 to 125 VDC Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Group error display

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-81

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

+5V SF

1 3

1 L+

SF

5 7 9 10 1M 48 to 125 V

Backplane bus interface +5V

11 13 15 17 19 20

2 L+

48 to 125 V

2M

Channel number Status display green Fault indicator red Figure 3-27 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

3-82

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 250 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 48 VDC to 125 VDC Yes, by means of fuse1) Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At 1 signal At 1 signal Rated value Permitted range Permitted surge current For 0 signal (leakage current)

min. L + (1.,2 V)

Output current 1.5 A 10 mA to 1.5 A max. 3 A for 10 ms max. 0.5 mA

Unshielded Shielded

Output delay (for resistive load) From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 max. 2 ms max. 15 ms max. 15 W at 48 V max. 40 W at 125 V

Reverse polarity protection

Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Total current of the outputs (per group)

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 50 _C Up to 60 _C max. 6 A max. 4 A max. 3 A max. 4 A Yes Yes 4 146 VDC / 132 VAC 1500 VAC max. 100 mA max. 2 mA typ. 7.2 W

For redundant actuation of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 25 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 10 Hz typ. M (1V)

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits

For resistive load For inductive load For lamp load

Limit (internal) of the in ductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes, electronic3) typ. 4.4 A Fuse 6.,3 A/250 V, quick blow, 5 x 20 mm SP0001.1012 194-1630-0 653 0000 040

1)

Threshold on

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Replacement fuses Schurter Wickman Wickman

From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load)

Fuse carrier

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None Red LED (SF)2)

Group error display

The fuses on this module are merely supplementary fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable for branch circuits conforming to the local regulations for electrical engineering) is required in the supply cables of the load circuit. 2) Potential errors are: - No load voltage - Fuse defective - Output overloaded 3) If an overload condition is detected, the output is inhibited for approximately 2.4 s.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-83

Digital Modules

3.25

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1322-1FF01-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 4 2 A output current 120/230 VAC rated load voltage Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. Group error display

3-84

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

5V

SF

SF M

1L 1N

*
M Backplane bus interface

5V 2L 2N M

*
M

Channel number Status display green Fault indicator red Figure 3-28

* Zero cross inhibit voltage triac

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-85

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable Unshielded Shielded Rated load voltage L1 Permitted frequency range Total current of the outputs (per group) 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 275 g Data for Specific Module No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m 120/230 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage At signal 1 At maximum current At minimum current Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range for 0 _C to 40 _C Permitted range for 40 _C to 60 _C Permitted current surge (per group) AC 2 A1) 10 mA to 2 A 10 mA to 1 A max. 20 A (not more than 1 AC scan cycle) max. 2 mA

min. L1 (1.5 V) min. L1 (8.5 V)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

max. 4 A max. 2 A max. 2 A

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C

At signal 0 (leakage current) From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0

Output delay (for resistive load)

Not more than 1 AC scan cycle Not more than 1 AC scan cycle 10 mA max. 60 V max. size 5 to NEMA max. 50 W Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz 1 Hz Fuse, 8 A/250 V; per group min. 40 A max. 300 ms 8 A fuse/quick-acting 194-1800-0 SP001.1013 217.008 653 07

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference

Minimum load current Yes Yes 4 230 VAC 500 VAC 1500 VAC max. 100 mA max. 2 mA typ. 8.6 W Green LED per channel None Yes Red LED (SF) 2) Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of the motor starter Lamp load Connecting two outputs in parallel

Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Triggering a digital input Switch rate For resistive load Inductive loads, according to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15 For lamp load Short-circuit protection of output

Insulation tested with Current consumption From the backplane bus From load voltage L1 (without load) Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Group error display

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Min. current required for fuse to blow Max. response time

Replacement fuses Wickman Schurter Littelfuse Fuse carrier Wickman

1) 2)

The load current must not be half-wave Potential errors are: - No load voltage - Fuse defective

3-86

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.26

Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0

Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL has the following distinguishing characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in one group Group error display Channel-specific status LEDs Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output 2 A output current 120/230 VAC rated load voltage Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-87

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL
Group error display red
1L 1 4 7 2L 10 11 3L 14 17 4L Backplane bus interface 20 21 L5 24 27 L6 30 31 7L M 34 37 8L 40

SF

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

3-88

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Weight Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 275 g Data for Specific Module No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 Total current of the outputs (module) 120/230 VAC Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage

At signal 1

min. L1 (8.5 V)

Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range for 0 C to 40 C Permitted range for 40 C to 60 C Permitted surge current (per group) 2A 10 mA to 2 A 10 mA to 1 A max. 20 A (with 2 half-waves) max. 2 mA max. 60 V max. size 5 to NEMA max. 50 W

Unshielded Shielded

max. 8 A max. 4 A max. 4 A

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 C Up to 60 C Vertical configuration Up to 40 C

For 0 signal (leakage current)

Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of the motor starter Lamp load Connecting two outputs in parallel

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between Minternal and the outputs Between outputs Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups From the backplane bus From load voltage L1 (without load) 230 VAC 500 VAC 1500 VAC 2000 VAC Yes Yes 1

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible Not possible Possible

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

For resistive load Inductive loads, according to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15 For lamp load

max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 1 Hz Yes, 3.15 A / 250 V fuse, fast-acting

Insulation tested with

Short-circuit protection of output

Current consumption max. 100 mA max. 2 mA typ. 8.6 W

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF)

Diagnostic interrupt

Diagnostic functions Group error display

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-89

Digital Modules

Note The outputs must be protected by a high-speed, fast-acting 3.15 A 250 VAC fuse. When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance with the National Electric Code, a tool must be used to remove the fuse and the area must be designated safe before the fuse is removed/replaced.

Parameterization of the SM 322; DO x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

A description of the general procedure for parameterizing digital modules can be found in section 3.3. Detailed information on the digital output module parameters can be found in Appendix A.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-22 shows the settable parameters with the default settings for the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Table 3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL Parameter Enable Value Range Default settings No EWS Parameter type Dynamic Dynamic Scope

Diagnostic interrupts
Behavior on CPU STOP

Yes/no Switch substitute value (EWS) Hold last value (LWH) Yes/no

Module Channel

Switch substitute value 1

No

Dynamic

Channel

3-90

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-23 gives an overview of the diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.
Table 3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL Diagnostics Message Time-out EPROM error RAM error LED SF SF SF Scope of the diagnostics Module Module Module Parameters can be assigned No No No

Error causes and remedies

Table 3-24 shows the diagnostic messages and error causes as well as the remedies of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.
Table 3-24 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL, error causes and remedies Diagnostics message Time-out Error detection Always Possible error cause Transient high electromagnetic interference Module defective EPROM error Always Transient high electromagnetic interference Module defective RAM error Always Transient high electromagnetic interference Module defective Remedy Remove interference and turn the CPU power supply off and on Replace module Remove interference and turn the CPU power supply off and on Replace module Remove interference and turn the CPU power supply off and on Replace module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-91

Digital Modules

Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

The SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL can trigger diagnostic interrupts. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below are described in detail in the online Help for STEP 7.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available in other words, they are withheld without appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling interrupts.

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged at the module.

Load restrictions with a horizontal configuration

With a horizontal configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that two adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an output.

Load restrictions with a vertical configuration

With a vertical configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that four adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an output.

3-92

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.27

Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics: 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights.

Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage

Note When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for about 200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-93

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC

M Backplane bus interface L+

24 V

M M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC

3-94

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable Unshielded Shielded Rated supply voltage of the relay L + Total current of the outputs (per group) Isolation 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 250 g Data for Specific Module No 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m 24 VDC max. 8 A 24 VDC 60 VDC 120 VDC 24 VAC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A Current Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.1 million 0.2 million 1.0 million 0.2 million 0.6 million 1.5 million 1.5 million 1.5 million 1.0 million 1.5 million 2.0 million 1.0 million 1.5 million 2.0 million No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.05 million 0.1 million 0.5 million 0.1 million 0.3 million 1 million 1 million 1 million 0.7 million 1.0 million 1.5 million 0.7 million 1.0 million 1.5 million

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Yes Yes 8 75 VDC / 60 VAC

Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15 Voltage

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups

24 VDC 60 VDC 120 VDC 24 VAC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC

Permitted potential difference

230 VAC

500 VAC

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A

An external protection circuit will enhance the service life of the contacts. Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA 50 W / 230 VAC 5 W / 24 VDC None

1500 VAC Lamp load 2000 VAC Contact protection (internal) Parallel connection of 2 outputs max. 100 mA max. 250 mA typ. 4.5 W

Current consumption From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+ Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Continuous thermal current Minimum load voltage / current Short-circuit proof to IEC 947-5-1

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 10 Hz 1 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Green LED per channel None None max. 2 A 10 V / 10 mA 200 A, with B10/B16 circuit breaker Data for Selecting an Actuator

Triggering a digital input Switch rate Mechanical For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/AC 15 For lamp load

1 Hz

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-95

Digital Modules

3.28

Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 2 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights.

Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage

Note Applicable only for the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC with product status 1 is: When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for about 200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user program.

3-96

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC

M Backplane bus interface

24 V

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-31 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-97

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 190 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the relay L + Total current of the outputs (per group) Isolation 24 VDC max. 4 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current Minimum load voltage / current Short-circuit proof according to IEC 947-5-1 2) max. 3 A 10 V /5 mA With circuit-breaker of characteristic B for: cos f 1.0: 600 A cos f 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A With Diazed 8 A fuse: 1000 A Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Unshielded Shielded

For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.7 million 1.6 million 4 million 1.6 million 1.6 million 1.6 million 1.2 million 0.5 million 2) 0.7 million 2) 1.5 million 2) 0.5 million 2) 0.7 million 2) 1.5 million

24 VDC 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of

Yes Yes 2

Permitted potential difference

Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups

75 VDC / 60 VAC 230 VAC

2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 2.0 A 2.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A

Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.3 million 0.5 million 1.0 million 0.5 million 0.3 million 2) 1 million 1 million 0.2 million 0.7 million 1 million 2.0 million 0.3 million 2) 0.7 million 2) 2 million 2)

400 VAC 24 VDC 500 VDC 1500 VAC 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.7 A 0.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A

Insulation tested with Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+

1500 VAC 230 VAC max. 40 mA max. 160 mA typ. 3.2 W Contact protection (internal)

Current consumption

Power dissipation of the module

Varistor SIOV-CU4032 K275 G

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

An external protection circuit will enhance the service life of the contacts.

3-98

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator, continued Lamp load 1) max. 50 W Power No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 25000 10000

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 10 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load (230 VAC) 2) Energy-saving lamps/fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast2) Fluorescent lamps, conventionally compensated 2) Fluorescent lamps, non-compensated 2)
1) 2)

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

1000 W 1500 W

10 58W 25000

1 58W

25000

Mechanical For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15 AC For lamp load

10 58W 25000

max. 2 Hz

Product status 1 Product status 2 or later

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-99

Digital Modules

3.29

Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0

Characteristics
Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A has the following distinguishing characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in one group Load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 24 VAC to 230 VAC Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. An RC quenching element can be connected via a jumper (SJ) to protect the contacts. Group error display Channel-specific status LEDs Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output

3-100

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Protection of contacts against overvoltages

You protect the contacts against overvoltages by inserting jumpers (SJ) on the module between terminals 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 12 and 13 etc. (refer to Figure 3-32).

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A
Fault indicator red
SF 1 2 3 4 SJ 5 6 7 8 SJ 9 10 1M 1M 1M

1L+ 1L+

2L+ 1L+

21 22 23 24 25 26 SJ

1L+

1L+

27 28 SJ

Backplane bus interface

29 30 1M

24V
11 12 SJ 13 14 15 16 SJ 17 18 19 20 1M

24V
31 32 33 34 SJ

1L+

1L+

1L+

1M

1M

1L+

35 36 37 SJ

1M SF

1M

38 39 40 2M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-101

Digital Modules

Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0 with safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account: If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC requirements for safe electrical isolation.

If one of the two horizontally adjacent terminals is operated with a safe electrical extralow voltage, the adjacent terminal must be operated at not more than UC 120 V.

Figure 3-33

Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 320 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronics L + 24 VDC Yes

Between the channels and the relay supply voltage Between the channels In groups of

Yes Yes 1

Permitted potential difference

Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups

75 VDC / 60 VAC 250 VAC

Unshielded Shielded

500 VAC

Reverse polarity protection

Total current of the outputs (per group) Horizontal configuration Up to 60 C Vertical configuration Up to 40 C max. 5 A max. 5 A

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes

3-102

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Insulation tested with

500 VDC 1500 VAC

Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.1 million 0.25 million 0.5 million 0.1 million 0.25 million 0.5 million

Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+

2000 VAC

Current consumption max. 100 mA max. 160 mA typ. 3.5 W

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC

5.0 A 2.5 A 1.0 A 5.0 A 2.5 A 1.0 A

Power dissipation of the module

With a connected RC quenching element (jumper SJ inserted) or with an external protection circuit, you lengthen the service life of the contacts. Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA Power No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 25000 10000

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LED per channel

Diagnostic interrupt

Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible

Lamp load (230 VAC) Energy-saving lamps/fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast Fluorescent lamps, conventionally compensated Fluorescent lamps, non-compensated Contact protection Connecting two outputs in parallel

1000 W 1500 W

Diagnostic functions

10 58W 25000

Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

1 58W

25000

10 58W 25000 RC quenching element 330 , 0.1 mF

Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current Minimum load voltage / current Leakage current Short-circuit proof according to IEC 947-5-1 max. 5 A 10 V /10 mA1) 11.5 mA 2) With circuit-breaker of characteristic B for: cos f 1.0: 600 A cos f 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A With Diazed 8 A fuse: 1000 A Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs with identical load voltage) Not possible Possible max. 10 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.2 million 0.4 million 0.9 million 0.2 million 0.4 million 0.9 million

1) 2)

Mechanical For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15 AC For lamp load

max. 2 Hz

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC

5.0 A 2.5 A 1.0 A 5.0 A 2.5 A 1.0 A

Without inserted jumper (SJ). For AC load voltage and inserted jumper (SJ). Without jumper (SJ) inserted there is a leakage current

Note Due to the leakage current of the RC quenching element, wrong signal states might occur when an IEC Type 1 input is connected (remove SJ jumper)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-103

Digital Modules

3.29.1

SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization

Parameter assignment
You will find the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.
Table 3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A Parameter Enable Value Range Default settings No EWS Parameter type Dynamic Dynamic Scope

Diagnostic interrupts
Behavior on CPU STOP

Yes/no Switch substitute value (EWS) Hold last value (LWH) Yes/no

Module Channel

Switch substitute value 1

No

Dynamic

Channel

3.29.2

Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A

Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A.
Table 3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A Diagnostics message Time-out EPROM error RAM error LED SF SF SF Scope of the diagnostics Module Module Module Parameters can be assigned No No No

3-104

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Error causes and remedies

Table 3-27 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, error causes and remedies Diagnostics Message Time-out Error Detection Always Possible Error Cause Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective EPROM error Always Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective RAM error Always Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective Remedy Remove interference and turn the CPU power supply off and on Replace module Remove interference and turn the CPU power supply off and on Replace module Remove interference and turn the CPU power supply off and on Replace module

3.29.3

Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

Introduction
The SM 322; DO8 x Rel.230VAC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling interrupts.

Diagnostic Interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then incoming active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-105

Digital Modules

3.30

Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A; (6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1322-1HF10-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights.

Measures with switching currents > 3 A

Note To keep the additional temperature rise of the module near the connectors as low as possible, you must select a cable cross-section of 1.5 mm2 for connecting cables with switching currents > 3 A.

3-106

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

L+ L+

L+ L+
1)

L+ Backplane bus interface

L+

24 V

1)

L+

L+
1)

L+

L+

M
M

Channel number Status display -green Figure 3-34

1) Connection possibility for contact I aggregate current v8 A for Ta v30 _C I aggregate current v5A for Ta v60 _C

supply

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 322-1HF10 with safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account: If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC requirements for safe electrical isolation.

If one of the two horizontally adjacent terminals is operated with a safe electrical extralow voltage, the adjacent terminal must be operated at not more than UC 120 V.

Figure 3-35

Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-107

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 120 Approx. 320 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No Permitted potential difference

Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups

75 VDC / 60 VAC

250 VAC

500 VAC

8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m

Insulation tested with

Unshielded Shielded

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the relay L + Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC

Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+

500 VDC

1500 VAC

2000 VAC

Horizontal configuration Up to 30 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 8 A max. 5 A max. 5 A

Current consumption

max. 40 mA max. 125 mA typ. 4.2 W

Power dissipation of the module

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of

Yes Yes 1

3-108

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupt Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.3 million 0.5 million 1 million 0.5 million 1 million 0.5 mill. 0.5 million 1 million 0.3 million 1 million 0.2 million 0.3 million 0.7 million 2.0 million 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.7 million 2.0 million 30 mill.

Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current Minimum load voltage / current Short-circuit proof to IEC 947-5-1 max. 8 A 10 V / 5 mA With circuit-breaker of characteristic B for: cos f 1.0: 600 A cos f 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A With Diazed 8 A fuse: 1000 A Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC 24 VDC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 3.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A

For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.7 4.0 million 4 million 1.6 mill. 0.1 million 1.6 million 0.1 million 1.2 million 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.5 million 0.7 million 1.5 million 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.5 million 0.7 million 1.5 million Lamp load (230 VAC) Energy-saving lamps/fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast Fluorescent lamps, conventionally compensated Fluorescent lamps, non-compensated Contact protection (internal)

24 VDC

8.0 A 4.0 A 2.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 8.0 A 2.0 A 8.0 A 2.0 A 8.0 A 4.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 8.0 A 4.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A

230 VAC

60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC

Aux. contactors Size 0 (3TH28)

An external protection circuit will enhance the service life of the contacts. Power No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 25000 10000

1000W 1500W

10 58W 25000

230 VAC

1 58W

25000

10 58W 25000 None

Connecting two outputs in parallel

For redundant actuation of a load To increase performance

Possible Not possible Possible max. 10 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 0.5 Hz

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Mechanical For resistive load Inductive loads according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15 AC For lamp load

max. 2 Hz

3-109

Digital Modules

3.31

Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC rated input voltage 24 VDC rated load voltage Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches) Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-110

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

2L+

24V

2M
Backplane bus interface

3L+

24V

1M 24V

3M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-36 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Terminal assignment
The figure below shows the assignment of the channels to the input and output addresses.
Inputs Input byte x Outputs Output byte x

Input byte (x + 1)

Output byte (x + 1)

Figure 3-37

Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-111

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Clocked Number of inputs Number of outputs Length of cable Unshielded Shielded Rated load voltage L+ Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module No 16 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m 24 VDC Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 Input current At signal 1 Input delay At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Permitted bias current Output voltage At signal 1 Output current 24 VDC 13 to 30 V 30 to + 5 V typ. 7 mA 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Data for Selecting an Actuator 16 8 16 min. L + (0.8 V)

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C

max. 4 A max. 3 A max. 2 A Yes Yes 16 8 75 VDC / 60 VAC VDC 500 max. 80 mA max. 80 mA typ. 6.5 W Green LED per channel None None

At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range At signal 0 (leakage current)

Total current of the outputs (per group)

0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C

Output delay (for resistive load)

At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus

Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Between the channels Inputs in groups of Outputs in groups of

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 10 Hz L + (53 V), typ. Yes, electronic 1 A, typ.

Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits Insulation tested with Current consumption From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (without load) Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions

Triggering a digital input Switch rate For resistive load Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Threshold on

3-112

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.32

Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1323-1BH01-2AA0

Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics: 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC rated input voltage 24 VDC rated load voltage Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches) Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-113

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

1M 24V 2L+

24V

Backplane bus interface 2M

Channel number Status display green Figure 3-38 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

3-114

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Number of outputs Length of cable No 8 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 24 VDC Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Input voltage Data for Selecting a Sensor

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

24 VDC 13 to 30 V 30 to 5 V typ. 7 mA 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA

Input current Input delay

Unshielded Shielded

Input characteristic curve

Permitted bias current Data for Selecting an Actuator

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 8 8

Output voltage

At signal 1

min. L + (0.8 V)

Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range At signal 0 (leakage current) 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA

Total current of the outputs (per group)

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 4 A max. 4 A

Output delay (for resistive load)

Isolation

At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Inputs in groups of Outputs in groups of

Yes Yes 8 8 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 40 mA max. 40 mA typ. 3.5 W

Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Permitted potential difference

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 10 Hz L + (53 V), typ. Yes, electronic 1 A, typ.

Between the different circuits

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (without load)

For resistive load Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

Threshold on

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-115

Digital Modules

3.33

Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A; parameterizable (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0

Characteristics
The SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A features the following characteristics: 8 digital inputs and 8 individual parameterizable inputs or outputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches) 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights The parameters of the module can be dynamically changed-channel during the RUN (CiR-capable) Re-readability of the outputs.

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters:

Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a 1 signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-116

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Backplane bus interface

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L+ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 M

M L+ M

Channel number Status display green

Figure 3-39

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-117

Digital Modules

Technical data of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 120 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Number of inputs/outputs Length of cable No 8 digital 8 single, parameterizable max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 24 VDC Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Input voltage Data for Selecting a Sensor

Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

24 VDC 15 to 30 V 30 to 5 V typ. 6 mA 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 61131, type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA

Input current Input delay

Input characteristic curve

Unshielded Shielded

Permitted bias current Data for Selecting an Actuator

Output voltage

Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 16 16

max. 4 A max. 3 A max. 2 A

At signal 1

min. L + ( 1,5 V)

Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range At signal 0 (leakage current) 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA

Total current of the outputs (per group)

Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C

Output delay (for resistive load)

At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0

max. 350 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W

Load resistor range Lamp load Yes No 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 60 mA max. 20 mA typ. 3 W Parallel connection of 2 outputs

Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between the different circuits

Permitted potential difference

For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance

Possible Not possible Possible max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 10 Hz typ. L + (54 V) Yes, electronic 1 A, typ.

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Triggering a digital input Switch rate

From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (without load)

For resistive load Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load

Power dissipation of the module

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None

Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output

Threshold on

3-118

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

3.33.1

Assigning Parameters to the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 3.3.

Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A in the table below. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: In STEP 7 With SFC 55 WR_PARM with SFB 53 WRREC (e. g. for GSD). The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 and the SFB 53 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table 3-28 Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 Parameter Value Range Default Settings VDC 24/0.5 A Scope Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... SFC 55, SFB 53 Yes Program ming device Yes

Parameter Type

Digital output

Yes/no

No

Dynamic

Channel

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-119

Digital Modules

Structure of data record 1

The following figure shows the structure of data record 1 of the dynamic parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A.

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5

Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant

1: Use channel 8 as output 0: Use channel 8 as input ... ... ... ... ... ... +1: Use channel 15 as output 0: Use channel 15 as input

Figure 3-40

Data record 1 of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A

3-120

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Digital Modules

Re-readability of the outputs

The digital outputs can be read back into the user data area: If, e. g. A11.3 is parameterized as an output, it can be read back via E11.3. see Figure3-41
Byte n .7 Inputs Rereadability .7 Outputs 0 Byte n+1 The following applies: Channel 8: n+1.0 Channel 9: n+1.1 Channel 10: n+1.2 Channel 11: n+1.3 Channel 12: n+1.4 Channel 13: n+1.5 Channel 14: n+1.6 Channel 15: n+1.7 .0 .7 .0 .0 .7 Byte n+1 .0

Figure 3-41

Re-readability of the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

3-121

Digital Modules

3-122

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Structure of the chapter

The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects: 1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here 2. Module overview of the most important properties of the modules 3. Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module 4. Information that is generally available in other words, affects all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics) 5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special characteristics of the module): a) for analog input modules b) for analog output modules c) for analog input/output modules

STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use the blocks FC 105 SCALE (Scale Values) and FC 106 UNSCALE (Unscale Values) for reading and outputting analog values in STEP 7. You will find the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called TI-S7-Converting Blocks (for a description, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help for the FCs).

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and 128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-1

Analog Modules

In this chapter
Section 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 4.22 4.23 4.24 4.25 4.26 4.27 4.28 Module Overview Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module Analog Value Representation Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input Channels Behavior of Analog Modules Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules Analog Module Parameter Assignment Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs Connecting Voltage Sensors Connecting Current Sensors Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors Connecting Thermocouples Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs Diagnostics of the Analog Modules Interrupts of the Analog Modules Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits; (6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; (6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits; (6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits; (6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0) Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits (6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0) Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, synchronous; (6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0) Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0) Contents Page 4-3 4-8 4-9 4-28 4-31 4-35 4-39 4-45 4-50 4-51 4-53 4-58 4-66 4-67 4-70 4-71 4-75 4-77 4-86 4-97 4-108 4-115 4-125 4-138 4-153 4-163 4-169 4-176

4-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Section 4.29 4.30 4.31

Contents Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0) Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0) Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x12 bits; (6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0)

Page 4-182 4-188 4-194

4.1

Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-3

Analog Modules

Table 4-1

Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (-7NF00-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Adjustable for each channel group: SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (-7NF10-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Adjustable for each channel group: SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed (-7HF0x-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Adjustable for each channel group: SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits (-1KF01-) 8 inputs in 8 channel groups Adjustable for each channel group:

Module Characteristics Number of inputs Resolution

15 bits + sign
Measuring Method Adjustable for each channel group:

15 bits + sign
Adjustable for each channel group:

13 bits + sign
Adjustable for each channel group:

12 bits+sign
Adjustable for each channel:

Voltage Current

Voltage Current

Voltage Current

Voltage Current Resistors Temperature

Selection of measuring range Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Limit value monitoring Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Potential relationships

Arbitrary, per channel group No

Arbitrary, per channel group No

Arbitrary, per channel group Yes

Arbitrary, per channel No

Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 2 channels Adjustable

Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 8 channels Adjustable

Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 2 channels Adjustable

No No No No

No

Yes

No

No

Galvanic isolation to:

Galvanic isolation to:

Galvanic isolation to:

Galvanic isolation to:

CPU

CPU

CPU CPU Load voltage (not

for 2-DMU) 11 VDC 2.0 VDC

Permitted potential difference between the inputs (ECM) Special Features Sign 2-DMU

50 VDC

60 VDC

Sign 2-wire transmitter

4-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-2

Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits (-7KF02-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Adjustable for each channel group: SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (-7PF00-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Adjustable for each channel group: SM 331; AI 8 x TC (-7PF10-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Adjustable for each channel group: SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits (-7KB02-) 2 inputs in 1 channel group Adjustable for each channel group:

Module Characteristics Number of inputs Resolution

9 bits+sign 12 bits+sign 14 bits+sign

Measuring Method Adjustable for each channel group:

15 bits + sign

15 bits + sign

9 bits+sign 12 bits+sign 14 bits+sign

Adjustable for each channel group:

Adjustable for each channel group:

Adjustable for each channel group:

Selection of measuring range Programmable diagnostics Supports clocked operation Diagnostic interrupt Limit value monitoring Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Potential relationships

Voltage Current Resistors Temperature

Resistors Temperature

Temperature

Voltage Current Resistors Temperature

Arbitrary, per channel group No Yes

Arbitrary, per channel group Yes No

Arbitrary, per channel group Yes No

Arbitrary, per channel group Yes No

Adjustable Adjustable for 2 channels Adjustable

Adjustable Adjustable for 8 channels Adjustable

Adjustable Adjustable for 8 channels Adjustable

Adjustable Adjustable for 1 channel Adjustable

No

Adjustable

Adjustable

No

Galvanic isolation to:

Galvanic isolation to:

Galvanic isolation to:

Galvanic isolation to:

CPU CPU Load voltage (not

for 2-DMU) Permitted potential difference between the inputs (ECM) Special Features Sign 2-DMU 2.5 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC

CPU
75 VDC / 60 VAC

CPU Load voltage (not

for 2-DMU) 2.5 VDC

Sign 2-wire transmitter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-5

Analog Modules

Table 4-3

Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module

SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits (-5HF00-) SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits (-7ND01-) SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits (-5HD01-) SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits (-5HB01-)

Characteristics Number of outputs Resolution Output type

8 Output channels 12 bits Channel by channel:

4 outputs in 4 channel groups 16 bits Channel by channel:

4 Output channels 12 bits Channel by channel:

2 Output channels 12 bits Channel by channel:

Voltage Current
Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Substitute value output Potential relationships No Yes Adjustable No Galvanic isolation between:

Voltage Current
Yes Yes Adjustable Adjustable Galvanic isolation between:

Voltage Current
No Yes Adjustable Adjustable Galvanic isolation to:

Voltage Current
No Yes Adjustable Adjustable Galvanic isolation to:

CPU Of the load

voltage

CPU and
channel

The channels Output and L+,

M

CPU Of the load

voltage

CPU Of the load

voltage

CPU and L+, M

Special Features

4-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-4

Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits (-0CE01-) SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits (-0KE00-)

Characteristics Number of inputs Number of outputs Resolution Measuring Method

4 inputs in 1 channel group 2 outputs in 1 channel group 8 bits Adjustable for each channel group:

4 inputs in 2 channel groups 2 outputs in 1 channel group 12 bits + sign Adjustable for each channel group:

Voltage Current
Output type Channel by channel:

Voltage Resistors Temperature

Channel by channel:

Voltage Current
Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Limit value monitoring Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Substitute value output Potential relationships No No No No No No No

Voltage
No No No No No No No Galvanic isolation to:

Non-isolated to CPU Galvanic isolation to load

voltage Not parameterizable, setting of measurement and output type by means of wiring

CPU Of the load voltage

Special Features

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-7

Analog Modules

4.2

Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission analog modules successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps
Table 4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module

Step 1. 2.

Procedure Select the module With some analog input modules: set the measuring method and measuring range by means of the measuring range module Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 network

Refer To... Section 4.1 and specific module section from Section 4.22 Section 4.4

3.

Mounting section in the Installation Manual for the programmable logic controller being used:

S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware

and Installation or S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation or

4. 5. 6.

Assign parameters to module Connect measuring sensor or loads to module Commission configuration

Section 4.7 Sections 4.8 to 4.15 Commissioning section in the Installation Manual for the programmable controller being used:

S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware

and Installation or S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation or ET 200M Distributed I/O Device 7. If commissioning was not successful, diagnose configuration Section 4.16

4-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.3

Analog Value Representation

Introduction
This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output ranges which you can use with the analog modules.

Converting Analog Values

The CPU processes the analog values in binary form only. Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form. Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.

Analog value representation with 16-bit resolution

The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed-point number in twos complement. The resulting assignment is as follows:
Bits Value of bits 15 215 14 214 13 213 12 212 11 211 10 210 9 29 8 28 7 27 6 26 5 25 4 24 3 23 2 22 1 21 0 20

Sign
The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15: 0 ) 1 *

Resolution less than 16 bits

If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits, the analog value is stored left-justified on the module. The lower-order bit positions not used are padded with zeros (0).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-9

Analog Modules

Example
In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with 0 are written for low resolution.
Table 4-6 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value Analog value 15 0 0 14 1 1 13 0 0 12 0 0 11 0 0 10 1 1 9 1 1 8 0 0 7 0 0 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

Resolution Bits 16-bit analog value 13-bit analog value

4.3.1

Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-8 to 4-9 contain the binary representation of the measured values. Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same, starting at 4-10 these tables only contain the measured values and the units.

4-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Measured-value resolution
The resolution of the analog values may differ, depending on the analog module and its parameterization. With resolutions < 15 bits, the bits indicated by x are set to 0. Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module (see Tables 4-16 to 4-31).
Table 4-7 Possible analog value resolutions Units decimal 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 hexadecimal 80H 40H 20H 10H 8H 4H 2H 1H Analog value High-Order Byte Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low-Order Byte 1xxxxxxx 01xxxxxx 001xxxxx 0001xxxx 00001xxx 000001xx 0000001x 00000001

Resolution in bits (+ sign) 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-11

Analog Modules

Binary representation of the input ranges

The input ranges shown in Tables 4-8 to 4-9 are defined in twos complement representation:

Table 4-8 Units

Bipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % u118.515 117.589 4 u100.00 Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Range

32767 32511 27649 27648 1 0 1 27648 27649 32512 32768

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

Overflow Over range

100.000 0.003617 0.000 0.003617 100.000 v100.004 117.593 v117.596

Rated range

Under range Underflow

Table 4-9 Units

Unipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % w118.515 117.589 w100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000 0.003617 17.593 v17.596 Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Range

32767 32511 27649 27648 1 0 1 4864 32768

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

Overflow Overrange range

Rated range Underrange range Underflow

4-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges

Table 4-10 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 10 V to 1 V System Dec. 32767 32512 32511 27649 27648 20736 1 0 1 20736 27648 27649 32512 32513 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V 7.5 V 10 V 3.75 V 5 V 1.875 V 2.5 V 0.75 V 1 V Underrange Underflow 10 V 7.5 V 361.7 mV 0V 5V 3.75 V 180.8 m V 0V 2.5 V 1.875 V 90.4 mV 0V 1V 0.75 V 36.17 mV 0V Rated range 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overrange 10 V 11.851 V Voltage Measuring Range 5 V 5.926 V 2.5 V 2.963 V 1 V 1.185 V Overflow

Table 4-11

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 500 mV to 80 mV Voltage Measuring Range 500 mV 592.6 mV 587.9 mV 500 mV 375 mV 18.08 mV 0 mV 250 mV 296.3 mV 294.0 mV 250 mV 187.5 mV 9.04 mV 0 mV 80 mV 94.8 mV 94.1 mV 80 mV 60 mV 2.89 mV 0 mV Rated range Overflow Overrange

System Dec. 32767 32512 32511 27649 27648 20736 1 0 1 20736 27648 27649 32512 32513 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 375 mV 500 mV 187.5 mV 250 mV

60 mV 80 mV Underrange 94.1 mV Underflow 94.8 mV

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-13

Analog Modules

Table 4-12 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V System Dec. 32767 32512 32511 27649 27648 20736 1 0 1 4864 4865 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF ED00 ECFF 8000 0.296 V Negative values not possible 5V 4V 1 V + 144.7 mV 1V 10 V 7.5 V 0 V + 361.7 mV 0V Underrange Underflow Rated range 5.704 V 11.759 V 5.741 V 1 to 5 V 11.852 V Voltage Measuring Range 0 to 10 V Overflow Overrange

Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges

Table 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 20 mA to 3.2 mA System Dec. 32767 32512 32511 27649 27648 20736 1 0 1 20736 27648 27649 32512 32513 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 3.79 mA 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 3.76 mA Underflow 15 mA 20 mA 7.5 mA 10 mA 2.4 mA 3.2 mA Underrange 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 10 mA 7.5 mA 361.7 nA 0 mA 3.2 mA 2.4 mA 115.7 nA 0 mA Rated range 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 3.76 mA Overrange 20 mA 23.70 mA 10 mA 11.85 mA Current Measuring Range 3.2 mA 3.79 mA Overflow

4-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA System Dec. 32767 32512 32511 27649 27648 20736 1 0 1 4864 4865 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF ED00 ECFF 8000 3.52 mA 1.185 mA 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 20 mA 16 mA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 4 mA Underrange Underflow Rated range 23.52 mA 22.81 mA 0 to 20 mA 23.70 mA Current Measuring Range 4 to 20 mA 22.96 mA Overflow Overrange

Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Transmitters

Table 4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 10 kW and from 150 W to 600 W System Dec. 32767 32512 32511 27649 27648 20736 1 0 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 11.759 kW 10 kW 7.5 kW 361.7mW 0W 10 kW 11.852 kW 150 W 177.77W 150.01 W 176.38 W 150 W 112.5 W 5.43 mW 0W Resistance-Type Transmitter Range 300 W 600 W 355.54 W 711.09 W Overflow 300.01 W 600.02 W 352.77 W 705.53 W Overrange 300 W 225 W 10.85 mW 0W 600 W 450 W 21.70 mW 0W Underrange Rated range

(negative values physically not possible)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-15

Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00 standard
Table 4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500, 1000
Pt x00 standard in 5C C (1 digit =0.15C) > 1000.0 1000.0 : 850.1 850.0 : 200.0 200.1 : 243.0 < 243.0 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 2710H : 2135H 2134H : F830H F82FH : F682H 8000H Pt x00 standard in 5F F (1 digit =0.1 5F) > 1832.0 1832.0 : 1562.1 1562.0 : 328.0 328.1 : 405.4 < 405.4 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 4790H : 3D05H 3D04H : F330H F32FH : F02AH 8000H Pt x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) > 1273.2 1273.2 : 1123.3 1123.2 : 73.2 73.1 : 30.2 < 30.2 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 31BCH : 2BE1H 2BE0H : 2DCH 2DBH : 12EH 8000H Rated range Overrange Range

32767 10000 : 8501 8500 : 2000 2001 : 2430 32768

32767 18320 : 15621 15620 : 3280 3281 : 4054 32768

32767 12732 : 11233 11232 : 732 731 : 302 32768

Overflow

Underrang e Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00 climate
Table 4-17 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000
Pt x00 climate in 5C C (1 digit = 0.015C) >155.00 155.00 : 130.01 130.00 : 120.00 120.01 : 145.00 < 145.00 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : D120H D11FH : C75CH 8000H Pt x00 climate in 5F F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) >311.00 311.00 : 266.01 266.00 : 184.00 184.01 : 229.00 < 229.00 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 797CH : 67E9H 67E8H : B820H B81FH : A68CH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range

32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : 12000 12001 : 14500 32768

32767 31100 : 26601 26600 : 18400 18401 : 22900 32768

4-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00 standard
Table 4-18 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000
Ni x00 standard in 5C C (1 digit = 0.15C) >295.0 295.0 : 250.1 250.0 : 60.0 60.1 : 105.0 < 105.0 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH B86H : 9C5H 9C4H : FDA8H FDA7H : FBE6H 8000H Ni x00 standard in 5F F (1 digit = 0.1 5F) >563.0 563.0 : 482.1 482.0 : 76.0 76.1 : 157.0 < 157.0 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 15FEH : 12D5H 12D4H : FD08H FD07H : F9DEH 8000H Ni x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) >568.2 568.2 : 523.3 523.2 : 213.2 213.1 : 168.2 <168.2 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 1632H : 1471H 1470H : 854H 853H : 692H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range

32767 2950 : 2501 2500 : 600 601 : 1050 32768

32767 5630 : 4821 4820 : 760 761 : 1570 32768

32767 5682 : 5233 5232 : 2132 2131 : 1682 32768

Overflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00 climate
Table 4-19 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000
Ni x00 climate in 5C C (1 digit = 0.015C) > 295.00 295.00 : 250.01 250.00 : 60.00 60.01 : 105.00 < 105.00 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 733CH : 61A9H 61A8H : E890H E88FH : D6FCH 8000H Ni x00 climate in 5F F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) >325.11 327.66 : 280.01 280.00 : 76.00 76.01 : 157.00 < 157.00 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6D61H 6D60H : E250H E24FH : C2ACH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range

32767 29500 : 25001 25000 : 6000 6001 : 10500 32768

32767 32766 : 28001 28000 : 7600 7601 : 15700 32768

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-17

Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 standard

Table 4-20 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10
Cu 10 standard in 5C C (1 digit = 0.015C) > 312.0 312.0 : 260.1 260.0 : 200.0 200.1 : 240.0 < 240.0 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH C30H : A29H A28H : F830H F82FH : F6A0H 8000H Cu 10 standard in 5F F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) >593.6 593.6 : 500.1 500.0 : 328.0 328.1 : 400.0 < 400.0 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 1730H : 12D5H 1389H : F330H F32FH : F060H 8000H Cu 10 standard in K (1 digit = 0.01 K) >585.2 585.2 : 533.3 533.2 : 73.2 73.1 : 33.2 <33.2 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 16DCH : 14D5H 14D4H : 2DCH 2DBH : 14CH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range

32767 3120 : 2601 2600 : 2000 2001 : 2400 32768

32767 5936 : 5001 5000 : 3280 3281 : 4000 32768

32767 5852 : 5333 5332 : 732 731 : 332 32768

Overflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 climate

Table 4-21 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10
Cu 10 climate in 5C C (1 digit = 0.015C) > 180.00 180.00 : 150.01 150.00 : 50.00 50.01 : 60.00 < 60.00 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 4650H : 3A99H 3A98H : EC78H EC77H : E890H 8000H Cu 10 climate in 5F F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) >325.11 327.66 : 280.01 280.00 : 58.00 58.01 : 76.00 < 76.00 Units decimal hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6D61AH 6D60H : E958H E957H : E250H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range

32767 18000 : 15001 15000 : 5000 5001 : 6000 32768

32767 32766 : 28001 28000 : 5800 5801 : 7600 32768

4-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Table 4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B
Units Type B in 5C >2070.0 2070.0 : 1821.0 1820.0 : 0.0 : 120.0 < 120.0 decimal 32767 20700 : 18210 18200 : 0 : 1200 32768 hexadecimal 7FFFH 50DCH : 4722H 4718H : 0000H : FB50H 8000H Type B in 5F >3276.6 3276.6 : 2786.6 2786.5 : 32.0 : 184.0 < 184.0 Units decimal 32767 32766 : 27866 27865 : 320 : 1840 32768 hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6CDAH 6CD9H : 0140H : F8D0H 8000H Type B in K >2343.2 2343.2 : 2094.2 2093.2 : 273.2 : 153.2 <153.2 Units decimal 32767 23432 : 20942 20932 : 2732 : 1532 32768 hexadecimal 7FFFH 5B88H : 51CEH 51C4H : 0AACH : 05FCH 8000H Underflow Rated range Overrange Range Overflow

Underrange

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type C

Table 4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C
Units Type C in 5C >2500.0 2500.0 : 2315.1 2315.0 : 0.0 0.1 : 120.0 < 120.0 decimal 32767 25000 : 23151 23150 : 0 1 : 1200 32768 hexadecimal 7FFFH 61A8H : 5A6FH 5A6EH : 0000H FFFFH : FB50H 8000H Type C in 5F >3276.6 3276.6 : 2786.6 2786.5 : 32.0 31.9 : 184.0 < 184.0 Units decimal 32767 32766 : 27866 27865 : 320 319 : 1840 32768 hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6CDAH 6CD9H : 0140H 013FH : F8D0H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-19

Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type E

Table 4-24 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E
Units Type E in 5C > 1200.0 1200.0 : 1000.1 1000.0 : 270.0 < 270.0 decimal 32767 12000 : 10001 10000 : 2700 < 2700 hexadecimal 7FFFH 2EE0H : 2711H 2710H : F574H H Type E in 5F > 2192,0 2192.0 : 1833.8 1832.0 : 454.0 < 454.0 Units decimal 32767 21920 : 18338 18320 : 4540 < 4540 hexadecimal 7FFFH 55A0H : 47A2H 4790H : EE44H <EE44H Type E in K > 1473.2 1473.2 : 1274.2 1273.2 : 0 <0 Units decimal 32767 14732 : 12742 12732 : 0 <0 hexadecimal 7FFFH 398CH : 31C6H 31BCH : 0000H <0000H Rated range Underflow Overrange Range Overflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ... ... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type J

Table 4-25 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J
Units Type J in 5C > 1450.0 1450.0 : 1201.0 1200.0 : 210.0 < 210.0 decimal 32767 14500 : 12010 12000 : 2100 < 2100 hexadecimal 7FFFH 38A4H : 2EEAH 2EE0H : F7CCH Type J in 5F > 2642,0 2642.0 : 2193.8 2192.0 : 346.0 < 346.0 Units decimal 32767 26420 : 21938 21920 : 3460 < 3460 hexadecimal 7FFFH 6734H : 55B2H 55A0H : F27CH Type J in K > 1723.2 1723.2 : 1474.2 1473.2 : 63.2 <63.2 Units decimal 32767 17232 : 14742 14732 : 632 < 632 hexadecimal 7FFFH 4350H : 3996H 398CH : 0278H < 0278H Underflow Rated range Overrange Range Overflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ... ... of F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... of EA0CH and outputs 8000H. ... of FDC8H and outputs 8000H.

4-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Table 4-26 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K
Units Type K in 5C > 1622.0 1622.0 : 1373.0 1372.0 : 270.0 < 270.0 decimal 32767 16220 : 13730 13720 : 2700 < 2700 hexadecimal 7FFFH 3F5CH : 35A2H 3598H : F574H < F574H Type K in 5F >2951.6 2951.6 : 2503.4 2501.6 : 454.0 < 454.0 Units decimal 32767 29516 : 25034 25061 : 4540 < 4540 hexadecimal 7FFFH 734CH : 61CAH 61B8H : EE44H <EE44H Type K in K > 1895.2 1895.2 : 1646.2 1645.2 : 0 0% Units decimal 32767 18952 : 16462 16452 : 0 0% hexadecimal 7FFFH 4A08H : 404EH 4044H : 0000H < 0000H Rated range Underflow Overrange Range Overflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ... ... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Table 4-27 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L
Units Type L in 5C >1150.0 1150.0 : 901.0 900.0 : 200.0 < 200.0 decimal 32767 11500 : 9010 9000 : 2000 < 2000 hexadecimal 7FFFH 2CECH : 2332H 2328H : F830H < F830H Type L in 5F >2102.0 2102.0 : 1653.8 1652.0 : 328.0 < 328.0 Units decimal 32767 21020 : 16538 16520 : 3280 < 3280 hexadecimal 7FFFH 521CH : 409AH 4088H : F330H H Type L in K >1423.2 1423.2 : 1174.2 1173.2 : 73.2 <73.2 Units decimal 32767 14232 : 11742 11732 : 732 < 732 hexadecimal 7FFFH 3798H : 2DDEH 2DD4H : 02DCH <02DCH Rated range Underflow Overrange Range Overflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ... ... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-21

Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type N

Table 4-28 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N
Units Type N in 5C > 1550.0 1550.0 : 1300.1 1300.0 : 270.0 < 270.0 decimal 32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : 2700 < 2700 hexadecimal 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : F574H < F574H Type N in 5F >2822.0 2822.0 : 2373.8 2372.0 : 454.0 < 454.0 Units decimal 32767 28220 : 23738 23720 : 4540 < 4540 hexadecimal 7FFFH 6E3CH : 5CBAH 5CA8H : EE44H <EE44H Type N in K > 1823.2 1823.2 : 1574.2 1573.2 : 0 0% Units decimal 32767 18232 : 15742 15732 : 0 0% hexadecimal 7FFFH 4738H : 3D7EH 3D74H : 0000H < 0000H Rated range Underflow Overrange Range Overflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ... ... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type R, S

Table 4-29 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S
Units Types R, S decimal in 5C >2019.0 2019.0 : 1770.0 1769.0 : 50.0 51.0 : 170.0 < 170.0 32767 20190 : 17770 17690 : 500 510 : 1700 32768 hexadecimal 7FFFH 4EDEH : 4524H 451AH : FE0CH FE02H : F95CH 8000H Types R, S in 5F >3276.6 3276.6 : 3218.0 3216.2 : 58.0 59.8 : 274.0 < 274.0 Units decimal 32767 32766 : 32180 32162 : 580 598 : 2740 32768 hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 7DB4H 7DA2H : FDBCH FDAAH : F54CH 8000H Types R, S in K >2292.2 2292.2 : 2043.2 2042.2 : 223.2 222.2 : 103.2 < 103-2 Units decimal 32767 22922 : 20432 20422 : 2232 2222 : 1032 < 1032 hexadecimal 7FFFH 598AH : 4FD0H 4FC6H : 08B8H 08AEH : 0408H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range Overflow

4-22

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type T

Table 4-30 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T
Units Type T in 5C >540.0 540.0 : 401.0 400.0 : 270.0 < 270.0 decimal 32767 5400 : 4010 4000 : 2700 < 2700 hexadecimal 7FFFH 1518H : 0FAAH 0FA0H : F574H H 752.0 : 454.0 < 454.0 7520 : 4540 < 4540 1D60H : EE44H <EE44H 673.2 : 3.2 <3.2 6732 : 32 < 32 1AACH : 0020H < 0020H Rated range Underflow Type T in 5F >1004.0 1004.0 Units decimal 32767 10040 hexadecimal 7FFFH 2738H Type T in K >813.2 813.2 Units decimal 32767 8132 hexadecimal 7FFFH 1FC4H Overrange Range Overflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ... ... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type U

Table 4-31 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U
Units Type U in 5C >850.0 850.0 : 601.0 600.0 : 200.0 < 200.0 decimal 32767 8500 : 6010 6000 : 2000 < 2000 hexadecimal 7FFFH 2134H : 177AH 1770H : F830H H Type U in 5F >1562.0 1562.0 : 1113.8 1112.0 : 328.0 < 328.0 Units decimal 32767 15620 : 11138 11120 : 3280 < 3280 hexadecimal 7FFFH 2738.0H : 2B82H 2B70H : F330H H Type U in K >1123.2 1123.2 : 874.2 873.2 : 73.2 <73.2 Units decimal 32767 11232 : 8742 8732 : 732 < 732 hexadecimal 7FFFH 2BE0H : 2226H 221CH : 02DCH <02DCH Rated range Underflow Overrange Range Overflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ... ... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-23

Analog Modules

4.3.2

Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output channels of the analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding output ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-32 to 4-33 contain the binary representation of the output values. Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at 4-34 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units.

Output ranges for the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2

8/8 bits

The analog input/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has output ranges from 0 to 10 V and from 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution, however. Please not that the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits with product status 1 does not have overranges.

Binary representation of the output ranges

The output ranges shown in Tables 4-32 to 4-33 are defined in twos complement representation:

4-24

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges Units Output Value in % Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Range x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 x Under range Underflow Rated range Overflow Over range

w32512 0 % 32511 27649 27648 1 0 1 27648 27649 32512 117.589 w100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000 0.003617 100.000 v100.004 117.593

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x

v32513 0 %

Table 4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges Units Output Value in % Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Range x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 1 0 1 0 1 Limited to rated range lower limit 0 V and 0 mA Underflow Rated range Overflow Overrange

w32512 0 % 32511 27649 27648 1 0 1 0.000 117.589 w100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000

0 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 0 1

x 1 0 0 0 0 1

32512

v32513 0 %

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-25

Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Output Ranges

Table 4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 10 V System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100 % 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 75 % 20736 100 % 27648 27649 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 V 11.76 V Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 10 V 7.5 V 361.7 V 0V 361.7 V 7.5 V 10 V Underrange Rated range 11.76 V Overrange 10 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-energized Voltage Output Range

Table 4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100 % 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 25 % 6912 6913 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF E500 E4FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V 0V Not possible. The output value is limited to 0 V. Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 10 V 7.5 V 361.7V 0V 5V 3.75 V 1V+144.7V Rated range 1V Underrange 11.76 V 5.70 V 0 to 10 V 0.00 V Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and deenergized Overrange

4-26

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Current Output Ranges

Table 4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 20 mA System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100 % 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 75 % 20736 100 % 27648 27649 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 mA 23.52 mA Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 723.4 nA 15 mA 20 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA Overrange 20 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized Current Output Range

Table 4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100 % 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 25 % 6912 6913 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF E500 E4FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA 0 mA Not possible. The output value is limited to 0 mA. Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 20 mA 15 mA 4mA+578.7 nA 4 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA 22.81 mA 0 to 20 mA 0.00 mA Current Output Range 4 to 20 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized Overrange

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-27

Analog Modules

4.4

Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input Channels

Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules: With measuring range module and STEP 7 By means of wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7 Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections. The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in STEP 7 is described in Section 4.7. The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the measuring range by means of measuring range modules.

Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges with Measuring Range Modules
If the analog modules haves measuring range modules, they are supplied with the measuring range modules plugged in. If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range.

Note Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module. Before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another measuring range.

Possible settings for the measuring range modules

The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: A, B, C and D. Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific module section. The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also printed on the analog module.

4-28

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Replugging measuring range modules

If you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps: 1. Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input module.

Figure 4-1

Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-29

Analog Modules

2. Insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1)) into the analog input module. The measuring range selected is the one that points to marker point on module (2).

Figure 4-2

Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module

Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules. The next step is to install the module. Caution If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be destroyed. Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before connecting a sensor to the module.

4-30

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.5

Behavior of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this section, you will find information on: How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie within the value range The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output value, as illustrated by an example

4.5.1

Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode

Effect of supply voltage and operating mode on the modules

The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating state of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ CPU Operating State Supply Voltage L+ at Analog Module L+ present Input Value of the Analog Input Module Output Value of the Analog Output Module

POWER RUN ON

Measured value 7FFFH until first conversion following power-up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed

CPU values Until the first conversion...

after power-up has been after parameter

completed, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output. assignment has been completed, the previous value is output.

L+ missing POWER STOP ON L+ present

Overflow value Measured value 7FFFH until first conversion following power-up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed

0 mA/0 V Substitute value/last value (default values: 0 mA/0 V)

L+ missing POWER OFF L+ present L+ missing

Overflow value

0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-31

Analog Modules

Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnostic buffer). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 4.7).

4.5.2

Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values

Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter assignment. You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 4.16.

Effect of range of values on the analog input module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within the range of values.
Table 4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value within the Range of Values Measured Value In Rated range Overrange/und errange Overflow Underflow Beyond the programmed limit
1)

Input Value Measured value Measured value 7FFFH 8000H Measured value

SF LED Flashes1) Flashes1)

Diagnostics Entered1) Entered1)

Interrupt Diagnostic interrupt1) Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1)

Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment

4-32

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Effect of range of values on the analog output module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within the value range.
Table 4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value within the Range of Values Process Value Lies Within Rated range Overrange/und errange Overflow Underflow Output Value CPU value CPU value 0 signal 0 signal SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-33

Analog Modules

4.5.3

Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit

Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated range of the module.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 C, referred to the rated range of the module.

Note The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the rated range of the module.

Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits is being used for voltage output. The output range from 0 to 10 V is being used. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30 C. Thus the operational limit applies. The technical specifications of the module state: Operational limit for voltage output: "0.5 % An output error, therefore, of "0.05 V ("0.5% of 10 V) over the whole rated range of the module must be expected. This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95 V to 1.05 V is output by the module. The relative error is "5 % in this case. The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated range of 10 V.
"0.05 V ( "5 %) "0.05 V ( "0.625 %) "0.05 V ( "0.5 %*) Output Value 10 V * Operational limit

1 V Figure 4-3

0V 1V

8V

Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module

4-34

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.6

Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules

Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing times of the module for: Resistance test Wire-break monitoring The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input channel (integrating method, instantaneous value conversion). In the case of integrating conversion methods, the integration time has a direct influence on the conversion time. The integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7.1). For the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section 4.18.

Scan time of analog input channels

Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially in other words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The scan time in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the analog input module. The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel analog module.

Conversion time, channel 1 Conversion time, channel 2

Scan time

Conversion time, channel n

Figure 4-4

Scan time of an analog input or output module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-35

Analog Modules

Conversion and scan times for analog input channels in channel groups
When the analog input channels are grouped in channel groups, you must take into account the conversion time channel group by channel group.

Example
Two analog input channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 12 bits are combined to form a channel group. You must therefore grade the scan time in steps of 2.

Setting smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input modules.

Using smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing. It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values for example, with temperature measurements.

Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted (digitized) analog values. The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low, average, high). The level determines the number of analog signals used for averaging. The higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a step response (refer to the following example).

4-36

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Example
The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100% applied, as a function of the smoothing that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at the analog input.
Signal variation in percent 100 Step response for any analog input signal

63 50

Smoothing:

Figure 4-5

200 150 50 100 low: Module cycles average: high: Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response 0

Additional information on smoothing

Refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from Section 4.22) to determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any special features that have to be taken into account.

Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog conversion.

Scan time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially in other words, the analog output channels are converted one after the other. The scan time in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output channels (refer to 4-4).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-37

Analog Modules

Tip
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in STEP 7.

Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules
tA tE t2

tZ t1 tA = Response time

t3

tZ = Scan time corresponds to n tE = Settling time

conversion time (n = activated channels)

t1 = New digitized output value is present t2 = Output value transferred and converted t3 = Specified output value reached

Figure 4-6

Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels

Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) in other words, the time elapsing from application the converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output is load-dependent. A distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive loads. For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section 4.28.

Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) in other words, the time elapsing from application of the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached at the analog output in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the settling time. You have a worst case situation, if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all other channels are converted (scan time).

4-38

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.7

Analog module parameter assignment

Introduction
Analog modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics of the modules by means of parameter assignment.

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7. You must perform parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU. When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules. In addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the module in the necessary position (refer to Section 4.4).

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above. You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN STOP, STOP RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A. Parameter Static Dynamic Settable with PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) SFC 55 in the user program CPU Operating State STOP STOP RUN

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-39

Analog Modules

4.7.1

Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the module concerned, starting from Section 4.22, for the subset mastered by the specific analog modules. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Enable Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Constraint possible due to measuring range 32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no

No No No

Dynamic

Module

Upper limit value Lower limit value

Diagnostics Group diagnostics

Dynamic

Channel or Channel group Channel or Channel group

No Static No

With wire-break
check

4-40

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Measurement Measuring method

Deactivated U 4DMU 2DMU R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-I1) TC-E1) TC-IL2) TC-EL2) TC-L00C2) TC-L50C2)

U Voltage Current (4-wire transmitter) Current (2-wire transmitter) Resistance (four-conductor connection) Resistance (three-conductor connection) Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) Bulb resistor (linear, three-conductor connection) Thermocouple (internal comparison) Thermocouple (external comparison) Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) Thermocouple (linear, reference temp. 0 C) Thermocouple (linear, reference temp. 50C) "10 V

Dynamic

Channel or Channel group

Measuring range Reaction with open

thermocouple

For the settable measuring ranges of the input channels, please refer to the individual module description. Overflow; underflow Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; degrees Kelvin 8 channels software filter 4 channels hardware filter

Overflow Degrees Celsius 8 channels, hardware filter Dynamic Module

Temperature unit3)

Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter

Dynamic

Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-41

Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings 0.00385 Parameter Type Dynamic Scope

Temperature

coefficient for temperature measurement with bulb resistor (RTD)

Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 W/W/ C 0.003916 W/W/ C 0.003902 W/W/ C 0.003920 W/W/ C 0.003851 W/W/ C Nickel (Ni) 0.00618 W/W/ C 0.00672 W/W/ C Copper (Cu) 0.00427 W/W/ C 400/60/50 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz None Low Average High

Channel or Channel group

Interference Smoothing

50 Hz

Dynamic

frequency suppression

Channel or Channel group Channel or Channel group

None

Dynamic

The module supplies a decimal value of the measured thermal voltage to the CPU for example, 27648 at 80 mV (refer to Table 4-11) 2) The module supplies a temperature value to the CPU for example, 120C (refer to Table 4-17) 3) 1 digit =0.1 C; 1 digit =0.1 F
1)

4-42

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.7.2

Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the module concerned, starting from Section 4.28, for the subset mastered by the specific analog modules. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.

Table 4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostics Group diagnostics Output Output type Value Range Default Settings No Parameter Type Dynamic Scope

Yes/no

Module

Yes/no Deactivated Voltage Current For the settable measuring ranges of the output channels, please refer to the individual module description. ASS LWH EWS Outputs de-energized Hold last value Apply substitute value

No U

Static

Channel

Dynamic "10 V

Channel

Output range
Response with CPU-STOP

ASS Dynamic Channel

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-43

Analog Modules

4.7.3

Parameters of the analog input/output modules

The analog input/output modules make available the parameters in the following table. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.

Table 4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Input Measurement Measuring method

Deactivated U Voltage R-4L Resistance (four-conductor connection) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) 0 to 10 V 10000 W Pt 100 climate 20 ms; 16.6 ms Deactivated Voltage 0 to 10 V

RTD-4L

Dynamic Pt 100 climate 20 ms U Dynamic 0 to 10 V

Channel

Measuring Range Integration time

Output Output type

Channel

Output range

4-44

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.8

Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs

Introduction
You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors. This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at both cable ends. If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated analog input modules

In the case of isolated analog input modules, there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. You must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. An equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU ensures that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.

Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules, you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU or IM 153. To do so, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU or IM 153. A potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU or IM 153 can result in corruption of the analog signal.

Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur between the measuring lines M of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the sensors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-45

Analog Modules

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M: MANA: M: L +: UCM: UISO: I +: U +: Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the MANA measuring circuit Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU Measuring lead for current input Measuring lead for voltage input

Connecting isolated measuring sensors

Isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground). They can be operated free of potential. With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the sensors. To prevent the permissible value for UCM being exceeded when used in environments with a high level of EMC interference, we advise you to connect M with MANA.

4-46

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

You can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded mode.
L+ M M+ M M+ M MANA CPU UISO Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI ADC Logic Logic Backplane bus CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI Isolated sensors Recommended connection Backplane bus

L+ M M+ M M+ M MANA ADC

Isolated sensors

Recommended connection

Note Do not connect M to MANA when connecting 2-wire transmitters for current measurement and resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are not used.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-47

Analog Modules

Non-isolated sensors
The non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local ground). When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to the local ground.

Connecting non-isolated sensors

Caused by local conditions or interferences, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. If the potential difference UCM exceeds the permissible value, you must provide equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points. When connecting non-isolated sensors to optically isolated modules, you can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded mode.

L+ M M+ M M+ M UCM MANA ADC Logic CPU

Minterna L+ l M

Non-isolat ed sensors

Backplane bus

Equipotential bonding conductor

UISO

Ground bus Figure 4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

4-48

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

When connecting non-isolated sensors to non-isolated modules, you can operate the CPU only in Grounded mode.

L+ M M+ M M+ M UCM MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI

Non-isolated sensors

Equipotential bonding conductor

Note You must not use non-isolated two-wire transmitters and non-isolated resistance-type sensors with a non-isolated AI!

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-49

Analog Modules

4.9

Connecting Voltage Sensors

Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following meanings: M +: M: MANA: M: L +: U +: Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Measuring lead for voltage input

Connection of voltage sensors

L+ M +
U U

ADC

Logic

M+ M M+ M MANA

Backplane bus

Figure 4-11

Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI

4-50

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.10

Connecting Current Sensors

Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M: MANA: M: L +: I +: Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Measuring lead for current input

Supply voltage of the sensors

The 2-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the terminals of the analog input module. This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. Two-wire transmitters must be isolated sensors. Four-wire transmitters have separate power supplies.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-51

Analog Modules

Connecting 2-wire transmitters

L+ M Two-wire transmitter + Two-wire + transmitter M+ M M+ M MANA

Sensor, for example, pressure gauge P

ADC

Logic Logic Logic

Backplane bus

Figure 4-12

Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI

When the supply voltage L+ is fed from the module, you must assign parameters to the two-wire transmitter as a four-wire transmitter in STEP 7.
Sensor, for example, pressure gauge 2-wire trans mitter

L+ M + M+ ADC M MANA Backplane bus

Figure 4-13

Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an isolated AI

Connecting four-wire transmitters

L+ M + + M+ M M+ M MANA ADC

Sensor, for example, pressure gauge P P

Four-wire transmitter

Backplane bus

L+ M Figure 4-14

Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI

4-52

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.11

Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: IC+: IC: M+: M: MANA: M: L+: S: Constant-current lead (positive) Constant-current lead (negative) Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Detector lead (negative)

Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

The resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-conductor, three-conductor or two-conductor connection. With four-conductor and three-conductor connections, the module supplies a constant current via terminals IC+ and IC so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is compensated. It is important that the connected constant current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor. Measurements with four-conductor or three-conductor connections supply a more precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a two-conductor connection.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-53

Analog Modules

Four-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and M terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect IC+ and M+ as well as IC and M to the resistance thermometer). When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ and the cables IC and M are connected directly to the resistance thermometer.
L+ M M+ ADC Logic Logic M IC+ IC IC MANA Figure 4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI Backplane bus

Three-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a three-conductor connection on modules with four terminals, you must normally insert a jumper between M and IC (refer to Figure 4-16). Take note of the exception for the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (refer to Figure 4-18). When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ are connected directly to the resistance thermometer.
L+ M M+ M IC+ IC IC MANA Figure 4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI ADC Backplane bus

4-54

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Two-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between M+ and IC+ and between M and IC .
L+ M M+ ADC Logic M IC+ IC MANA Backplane bus

Figure 4-17

Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

Three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8

RTD
RTD you must insert a

With a three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 jumper between M+ and IC+ (refer to figure4-18).

When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC and M are connected directly to the resistance thermometer.
L+ M M+ ADC Logic M IC+ IC IC MANA Figure 4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD Backplane bus

Caution Due to incorrect wiring of the three-conductor connection, unforeseen operation of the module and dangerous conditions can result in the system.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-55

Analog Modules

4.11.1

Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between M and S.

S M+ M ADC Logic

Backplane bus

Figure 4-19

Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8x 13 bits

Three-conductor connection

S M+ M ADC Logic

Backplane bus

Figure 4-20

Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

4-56

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Four-conductor connection
With a four-conductor connection, you must not connect the fourth conductor (the conductor is not used at all, see Figure 4-21).

M+ M

ADC

Figure 4-21

Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Logic

4th conductor not connected

Backplane bus

4-57

Analog Modules

4.12

Connecting Thermocouples

Design of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends. There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material used for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.
Measuring junction Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs Connecting point Compensating leads Reference junction Leads

Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured C Figure 4-22 Design of Thermocouples

Principle of Operation of Thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple. Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the measuring junction. The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire. Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise there will be considerable measuring errors.

4-58

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Compensation of the reference junction temperature

You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference junction by means of compensating leads. There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point. You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference junction to be.
Table 4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature Option No compensation Internal compensation (refer to Figure 4-23 for connection) External compensation with compensating box in the leads of an individual thermocouple (refer to Figures 4-24 and 4-25 for its connection) Only for SM 331; AI 8 x TC: External compensation with resistance thermometer for acquisition of the reference junction temperature (refer to Figure 4-26 and 4-27for connection) Explanation If you want to acquire only the difference in temperature between the measuring point and the reference junction. If you employ internal compensation, the internal temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the module is used for comparison purposes. You have already acquired and compensated the reference junction temperature (thermocouple external comparison) using a compensating box, which you have looped into an individual thermocouple. No further processing is necessary owing to the module. You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a resistance thermometer (platinum or nickel) and have it calculated by the module for any thermocouple.

Theory of operation of internal compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage. Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

Theory of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example. The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connections for the ends of the thermocouples compensating leads. If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. This results in a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-59

Analog Modules

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M: IC+: IC-: COMP+: COMP : MANA: M: L +: P5V: KV +/KV : Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Positive connection of constant current output Negative connection of constant current output Compensating terminal (positive) Compensating terminal (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Module logic power supply Connections to the shunt comparison

Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

4-60

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation

Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups.
L+ M M+ M ADC M+ M Logic Backplane bus

Thermocouple

K0 . . . K7

Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)

COMP+ COMP/MANA

Figure 4-23

Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an Isolated AI

Connecting the compensating box

Connect the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module, locating the compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples. The compensating box must have an isolated supply. The power supply must have adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding. The terminals for connecting the thermocouple to the compensating box are not required and must therefore be shorted (refer to Figure 4-25 for an example). The following constraints apply: The parameters of a channel group are general valid for all channels of that group (for example, input voltage, integrating time etc.) External compensation with connection of the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module can be performed only for one thermocouple type. In other words, all channels operating with external compensation must use the same type.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-61

Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with compensating box

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same comparison point, you compensate as follows:

Copper wire

L+ M M+ M M+ M ADC Logic Backplane bus

Thermocouples Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) L+ M Comp. Box Ref. junction Figure 4-24

COMP+ COMP/MANA

Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI

Note Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0_C for analog input modules.

Recommended compensating box

We recommend you to use a comparison point (with integrated power supply unit) from Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in the table below.

4-62

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point Recommended Compensating Box Reference junction with integrated power supply unit, for rail mounting Auxiliary power 220 VAC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC Connection to thermocouple Order number M72166-VVVVV

B1 B2 B3 B4

Fe-CuNi Fe/Cu Ni Ni Cr/Ni Pt 10% Rh/Pt Pt 13% Rh/Pt Cu/Cu Ni Cu/Cu Ni

Type L Type J Type K Type S Type R Type U Type T 0 _C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 00

Reference temperature

Connecting to the comparison point (Order No. M72166-xxx00)

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same comparison point, you compensate as follows:
Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) Copper wire L+ M M+ M M+ M +
3 1

ADC

Logic

Thermoco uples

Backplane bus

Auxiliary power

COMP+ COMP/MANA

The terminals for the compensating wire must be shortcircuited!

SIEMENS M72166-

12 11

Output (Cu wires)

Figure 4-25

Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-63

Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with temperature compensation to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

All 8 inputs are available as measurement channels when the thermocouples are connected via reference junctions that are controlled at 0 C or 50 C.
L+ Copper wire M+ K0 MReference junction controlled at 0_C or 50_C ADUs M+ MLogic . . . K6 Backplane bus M

M+ K7 M-

Figure 4-26

Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

4-64

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

With this type of compensation, the reference junction terminal temperature is determined by a bulb resistor sensor with a temperature range of -25 C to 85 C.

Copper wire KV+ KV ADC KV+ KV KV+ KV Pt 100 IC+ IC Ref. junction

L+ M

Thermocouples

K0

P5V

K7

Logic

Backplane bus

Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)

M internal

Figure 4-27

Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-65

Analog Modules

4.13

Connecting Loads/Actuators to analogo output

Introduction
You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current and voltage. This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

For the analog signals, you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. The cables QV and S+ and M and S, respectively, are to be twisted together. This reduces the interference. Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables. If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.

Non-Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the non-isolated analog output modules, you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. Therefore, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU. A potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU can lead to a corruption of the analog signal.

4-66

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.14

Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-conductor and a two-conductor connection. However, not all analog output modules allow both types of connection.

Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: QV: S +: S: MANA: RL: L +: M: UISO: Analog output voltage Detector lead (positive) Detector lead (negative) Reference potential of analog circuit Load impedance Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ground terminal Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-67

Analog Modules

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated Module over a Four-Conductor Connection

A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-conductor connection. You must therefore connect the sensor leads (S and S+) directly to the load. The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load. Interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential difference must not exceed the permissible value. If the permissible potential difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired.
L+ M QV Logic Backplane bus DAC S+ S MANA CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus UISO RL

Figure 4-28

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection

4-68

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated module via a two-conductor connection

With a two-conductor connection, the S+ and S terminals can be left open. However, you will not achieve the accuracy of a four-conductor connection. Connect the load to terminals QV and the reference point of the measuring circuit, MANA.
L+ M

QV Logic Backplane bus DAC RL MANA CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus

Figure 4-29

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Conductor Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-69

Analog Modules

4.15

Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs

Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: QI: MANA: RL: L +: M: UISO: Analog output current Reference potential of analog circuit Load impedance Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ground terminal Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

Connecting Loads to a Current Output

You must connect loads to QI and the reference point of the analog circuit MANA of a current output.
L+ M QI Logic Backplane bus CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO DAC RL MANA UISO

4-70

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

L+ M

QI Logic Backplane bus CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO DAC RL MANA

4.16

Diagnostics of the Analog Modules

Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the Diagnostics parameter field in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7). Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module and forwarded to the CPU. The error LED on the analog module lights. If you have programmed Enable Diagnostic Interrupt with STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.17).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-71

Analog Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFH irrespective of the parameter assignment when an error is detected. This measured value means either Overflow, Malfunction or a channel is disabled.

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

Every analog module indicates errors for you by means of your SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the analog module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified.

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules.
Table 4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules Diagnostics Message External auxiliary supply missing Configuring/parameter assignment error Common-mode error Wire-break Underflow Overflow LED SF SF SF SF SF SF Diagnostics Effective for Module Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Parameters can be assigned No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

4-72

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Diagnostic messages of the analog output modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog output modules.
Table 4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules Diagnostics Message External auxiliary supply missing Configuring/parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M Wire-break LED SF SF SF SF Diagnostics Effective for Module Channel Channel Channel Parameters can be assigned No Yes Yes Yes

Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7.

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog input modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Message External load voltage missing Configuring/parameter assignment error Common-mode error Possible Error Cause Load voltage L+ of module missing Illegal parameters transferred to module Feed supply L+ Check measuring range module Reassign module parameter Remedy

Potential difference UCM between Connect M with MANA the inputs (M) and reference potential of measuring circuit (MANA) too high Resistance too high in the sensor connection Open circuit between module and sensor Channel not connected (open) Use different type of sensor or connection, e.g. use conductors with a larger cross-sectional core area Close circuit Disable channel group (measuring procedure parameter Connect channel

Wire-break

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-73

Analog Modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Message Underflow Possible Error Cause Input value underflows underrange, error may be caused: Wrong measuring range selected Configure other measuring range With the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by polarity reversal of sensor connection Overflow Input value overflows overrange Check terminals Remedy

Configure other measuring range

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog output modules

Table 4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Message External load voltage missing Configuring/parameter assignment error Short-circuit after M Possible Error Cause Load voltage L+ of module missing Illegal parameters transferred to module Overload of output Short-circuit of output QV after MANA Wire-break Actuator resistance too high Feed supply L+ Reassign module parameter Remedy

Eliminate overload Eliminate short circuit Use different type of actuator or connection, e.g. use conductors with a larger cross-sectional core area Close circuit Disable channel group (output type parameter)

Open circuit between module and actuator Channel not used (open)

4-74

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.17

Interrupts of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. The following interrupts exist: Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of the modules, starting at Section 4.18, to determine which analog modules have interrupt capability. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt with trigger Upper or lower limit exceeded

Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. If the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt block (OB 40). In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable logic controller is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached. When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-75

Analog Modules

Note Note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange.

Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8.

LB 8 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 1 1

LB 9 .1 .0 17 16 1 1

LB 11 1 0 Bit no. LD 8

Value falls below lower limit in channel 0 Value falls below lower limit in channel 1 Value exceeds upper limit in channel 0 Value exceeds upper limit in channel 1 Figure 4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value

Hardware interrupt upon trigger Reached end of scan cycle

By parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle, you have the option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module. A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled channels of the analog input module. The module processes the channels one after the other. After all the measured values have been converted, the module of the CPU reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on all channels. You can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values.

4-76

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.18

Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits; (6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits has the following characteristic features: 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time) Measurement mode selectable per channel group: Voltage Current Arbitrary measuring range and filter/update rate selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Two channels with limit monitoring Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Isolated against the backplane bus interface Permissible common mode voltage between channels of 50 VDC maximum

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-77

Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

1 2 A 250 OHM 3 4 250 OHM 5

SF

21 22 23 24 25 ADC 26 27 Isolation 28 29 30 31 SF 32 33 34 35 ADC 36 37 38 39 40 V V V V V V V

CHO

Fault indicator red

CH1

6 250 OHM 7 8 250 OHM 9 10 11 12 250 OHM 13 14 250 OHM 15 16 250 OHM 17 18 250 OHM 19 20

CH2

Backplane bus interface module

CH3

+ + + +

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

Figure 4-33

Module view and block diagram of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Please note that in Figure 4-33, channel 0 is configured for current measurement and channel 7 for voltage measurement.

4-78

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Wiring of the module for measuring current

Current measurements are made by paralleling a channels voltage input terminals with its respective current sense resistor. This is accomplished by jumpering the channels input terminals to the adjacent terminals on the field connector. Example: To configure channel 0 for current mode, you must jumper terminal 22 to 2 and terminal 23 to 3. The channel being configured for current measurements must be paired with the sense resistor connected to the channels adjacent terminals in order to achieve the specified accuracy.

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 272 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 8 max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Isolation Analog value generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Integrating

Parameters can be
assigned

Yes 10 35 16.7 55 20 65 100 305

Integration time in
milliseconds

Shielded

Basic conversion time

per channel group when more than one channel group is active

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes

Channel conversion

10

16.7

20

100

Permitted potential difference

Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

50 VDC, 35 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 130 mA typically 0.6 W

time per channel group if only channel group 0 or 1 is enabled

10 16.7 20 100

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Channel integration time (1/f1) in ms

Resolution including
sign

15 bits + sign 100 60 50 10

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

Suppression of interference voltage for interference frequency f1 in Hertz

Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all channels enabled)

140

220

260

1220

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-79

Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for f = n (f1 1%), (f1 = interference frequency); n= 1, 2, ... Interrupts

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Common-mode noise
(Ucm < 50 V)

> 100 dB > 90 dB

Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Diagnostic interrupt Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

Programmable channels 0 and 2 Programmable Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible

Series-mode

Diagnostic functions

interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)

> 100 dB UCM = 0 / UCM = 50 V

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance

Crosstalk between the inputs Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred to input range)

Voltage

5V 1 to 5 V 10 V

/ 2M / 2M / 2M / 250 / 250 / 250

Voltage input Current input

0.1% / 0.7% 0.3% / 0.9%

Current

0 to 20 mA; 20 mA 4 to 20 mA:

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input range)

Voltage input Current input

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25C, referred to the input range)

0.05% 0.05% 0.005%/K 0.03% 0.025%

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor

max. 50 V continuous

max. 32 mA

For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter

Possible

Possible with separate supply for the transmitter Possible max. 820

Load of the two-wire transmitter

4-80

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.18.1

Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Dynamic Scope

Enable Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no

No No

Module

Constraint possible due to measuring range. 32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no No Static No Dynamic Channel

Upper limit value Lower limit value

Diagnostics Group diagnostics

With wire-break
check Measurement Measuring Method

Channel group

Deactivated U Voltage 4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter) Refer to Section 4.18.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz

U Channel group

Measuring Range Interference

"10 V

Dynamic

50 Hz

Suppression

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-81

Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC.
Table 4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits to Channel Groups Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 ... form one Channel Group each Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3

High Speed Update Mode

In the high speed update mode, updates for the two channels in the group occur three times faster than with multiple channel groups enabled. Example: If channels 0 and 1 are enabled with 2.5 ms filtering, data updates for both channels will be available to the PLC every 10 msec. (For other filter settings, the filter setting equals the update rate.) The high speed update mode is only available when both channels are enabled on channel group 0 or 1, in other words, the measuring method parameter is set. However, only channel group 0 or only channel 1 (in other words, not both together) must be enabled.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

4-82

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.18.2

Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement You perform the setting with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is connected for each active and unused channel. Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.

Measuring ranges
The measuring ranges are set with the measuring range parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range 5 V 1 to 5 V 10 V from 0 to 20 mA 20 mA from 4 to 20 mA Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring range

4DMU: Current (4-wire transmitter)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-83

Analog Modules

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are voltage for the measuring method and " 10 V for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits in STEP 7.

Measuring errors with common-mode voltages

The SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits can make measurements in the presence of AC or DC common mode voltage. For AC common mode voltages at multiples of the filter frequency setting, the suppression of interference is accomplished by the integration period of the A/D converter and by the common mode suppression of the input amplifiers. For AC common mode voltages < 35 VRMS, the suppression ratio of > 100 dB results in negligible measurement error. For DC common mode voltages, only the interference suppression of the input amplifier stage is available to minimize the effect of the common mode voltage. Therefore, some accuracy degradation occurs in proportion to the common mode voltage. The worst case error occurs with 50 VDC between one channel and the other seven channels. The calculated worst case error is 0.7 % at 0 to 60 C, and measured error is typically 0.1% at 25 C.

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits from the range of values contained in Table 4-50. The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and can vary between the lower limits shown in the table below and the value 32511 (7EFF H).

4-84

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit values shown in the table below.
Table 4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Measuring Range 10 V Minimum Possible Upper Limit Value 11.368 V 31430 7AC6H 5.684 V 31430 7AC6H 5.684 V 32376 7E78H 22.737 mA 31432 7AC8H 22.737 mA 32378 7E7AH 22.737 mA 31432 7AC8H Minimum Possible Lower Limit Value 11.369 V 31433 8537H 5.684 V 31430 853AH 0.296 V 4864 ED00H 3.519 mA 4864 ED00H 1.185 mA 4864 ED00H 22.737 mA 31432 8538H

5 V

1 to 5 V

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

20 mA

Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is available for the 1 to 5 V voltage range and the 4 to 20 mA current range. The following applies to both measuring ranges: Enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters a wire-break in the diagnosis if a current falls below 3.6 mA (0.9 V). If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. With a disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-85

Analog Modules

4.19

Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0

Characteristics
The isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits has the following characteristic features: 8 isolated inputs in 4 channel groups Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels Measuring method selectable per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt 8 channels with limit monitoring Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Electrical isolation to the backplane bus interface

Special feature
When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you must have one of the following IM 153-x: IM 153-1 IM 153-2 IM 153-2 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

4-86

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Fault indicator red

1 2 L M 21 22 23 M4+ Channel 4 V A

L+

SF

Channel 0

M0+

3 4 5 6 7 8 250 W

DC to DC

24 250 W 25 26 27 28

Channel 1

M0 M1+

M4 M5+ Channel 5 V A

9 10 11 12 13

250 W

ADC ADC

ADC ADC

250 W

29 30 31 32

Channel 2

M1 M2+

M5 M6+ Channel 6 V A

Channel 3

M2 M3+

14 15 16 17

250 W Interface module logic and backplane bus SF

250 W

33 34 35 36 M6 M7+ Channel 7 V A

250 W

250 W

37 38 39 40 M7

M3

18 19 20

Figure 4-34

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-87

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 272 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 8 max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ 24 VDC Yes Smoothing of the measured values Basic execution time of the module, in ms (8-channel-mode) Basic execution time of the module, in ms (4-channel-mode) None / low/ average/ high 190/166/144//46

101)

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Interference suppression for F = n x (f1 1%) (f1 = interference frequency, n = 1, 2, ...)

Shielded

Common-mode interference (Ucm < AC 60 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)

> 100 dB

Reverse polarity protection

>90 dB 3)

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Yes Yes

Crosstalk between the inputs

> 100 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

Yes 2

Input voltage Input current

$0.1% $0.1%

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input range) 75 VDC / 60 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VAC

Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

Voltage input Current input

$0.05% $0.05% $0.005%/K $0.01% $0.01%

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C, referred to the input range)

From the backplane bus From the power supply L+

max. 100 mA max. 200 mA typ. 3.0 W

Power dissipation of the module

Analog value generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Integrating Interrupts

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Yes 95/83/72/23 101) 16 bits All2)/50/60/400

Hardware interrupt if the limit value is exceeded Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Diagnostic interrupt

Programmable channels 0 7 Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible

Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time in ms (8-channel mode) Basic conversion time in ms (4-channel mode) Resolution including sign Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz

Diagnostic functions

Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

4-88

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated values) / input resistance

For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter

Possible

Voltage

$ 5 V / 2 M 1 to 5 V / 2 M $ 10 V / 2 M 0 to 20 mA / 250 4 to 20 mA / 250 $20 mA / 250 35 VDC continuous; 75 VDC for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) 40 mA

Possible with separate supply for the transmitter Possible

Current

As four-wire transmitter
1) 2) 3)

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor

Interference frequency for 4-channel mode is All Interference frequencies 50/60/400 Hz are designated as All Series-mode rejection for 8-channel mode is reduced as follows: 50 Hz > 70 dB 60 Hz > 70 dB 400 Hz > 80 dB 50/60/400 Hz > 90 dB

4.19.1

Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

The mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits is set with STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, in section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0. When you use the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 16 bits in an ET200M PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master, certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable, hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other parameters are permitted.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-89

Analog Modules

An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 4-54 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Parameter Enable Value Range Default settings No Parameter Type Dynamic Module Scope

Hardware interrupt if
the limit value is exceeded end of cycle

Yes/no

Hardware interrupt at Diagnostic interrupt

Hardware interrupt trigger

Yes/no Yes/no

No No

Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Static

Upper limit Lower limit

Diagnostics

32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no

Channel Channel Channel Channel

Group diagnostics Wire-Break Check

Measurement

No No Yes No

Module mode Interference

Suppression

8 channels 4 channels
50 Hz 60 Hz 400 Hz 50/60/400 Hz

Dynamic

Module Channel group

50/60/400 Hz None Dynamic Channel group

Smoothing

None Low Average High

Measuring Method
Deactivated Voltage

Measuring
Range:

Dynamic

Channel group

$5V 1 to 5 V $ 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA $ 20 mA

$ 10 V

Current (4-wire transmitter)

4 to 20 mA

4-90

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits are arranged in groups of two inputs each. You must assign the same parameters to both the inputs in a group. The interrupt limits are the exception here. Table 4-55 shows which channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits are configured as a channel group. To set the parameters by means of SFC in the user program, you need the numbers of the channel groups. Detailed information on this can be found in Appendix A.
Table 4-55 Assignment of the channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits to channel groups Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 ... form one channel group each Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3

Operating states
The following modes are available for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits: 8 channels 4 channels

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-91

Analog Modules

4.19.2

8-channel mode

Description of the module cycle

In 8-channel mode, the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits switches between the two channels in each group. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs simultaneously convert for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been converted, all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-35).

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K0

K2

K4

K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K1

K3

K5

K7

Figure 4-35

8-channel mode cycle

4-92

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In the 8-channel mode of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, the channel conversion time depends on the selected interference frequency. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including communication time is 76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 50, 60 and 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is 88 ms. The module must then be switched over to the other channel of the group by means of opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Table 4-56 shows the scan times of the module at certain interference frequencies.
Table 4-56 Scan times in 8-channel mode

Interference frequency (Hz) 50 60 400 400/60/50

Channel scan time (ms) 83 72 23 95

Module scan time (All channels) 166 144 46 190

4.19.3

4-channel mode

Description of the module cycle

In 4-channel mode, the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits does not switch over between the channels of the individual groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion (simultaneous) Scan time K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-36

4-channel mode cycle

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-93

Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel mode, the channel conversion time including communication time of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits is 10 ms. As the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.

4.19.4

Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement (4-wire transmitter) You perform the setting with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement, 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is connected for each active and unused channel. Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.

4-94

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Wirebreak check The wire-break check is a module software function that is available for all the voltage ranges and the current range of 4 to 20 mA. With the 5 V, 1 to 5 V or 10 V measuring ranges and an enabled wire-break check, the isolated analog input module enters a wire-break in the diagnosis when the process value achieves a positive full-scale deflection (32768). If you enabled the diagnostic interrupt during configuration, the analog input module also triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then analyze the diagnosis bytes in the user program. With a measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and an enabled wire-break check, the isolated analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when the process value falls below 3.6 mA. If you enabled the diagnostic interrupt during configuration, the analog input module also triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then assess the diagnosis bytes in the user program. If the wire-break check is not enabled, the isolated analog input module triggers a diagnostic interrupt if the limit value for underflow is not reached.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the measuring range parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Method Selected Voltage Output Range "5V From 1 to 5 V " 10 V From 0 to 20 mA From 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA Description You will find the digital analog values from Section 4.3.1 in the voltage and current output ranges

Current (4-wire transmitter)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-95

Analog Modules

Short circuit to M or L
If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage. The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Overflow, underflow and hardware interrupt limits The diagnosis operating limits for overflow and underflow for some of the measuring ranges differ from those given in section 4.3.1 of the manual. In some cases, numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 being signaled. Hardware interrupt limits must not be set to values greater than the smallest possible limit value of the overflow or underflow operating limits for the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt in section 4.3.1.

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all the enabled channels is complete.
Table 4-58 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with additional information

Special analog markers

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

Byte

2 bits per channel to identify the range Upper limit exceeded in channel Lower limit exceeded in channel End-of-scan-cycle event Unassigned bit

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2 X

1 1

0 0

0 1 2 3

4-96

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.20

Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; synchronous; (6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7HF00-0AB0 resp. 6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0

Characteristics
The SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed has the following features: 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Measured-value resolution: 13 bits + sign Measuring method selectable per channel group: Voltage Current Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group Programmable hardware interrupt Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Two channels with limit monitoring Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Supports clocked operation Isolated against the backplane bus interface Isolated against the load voltage (not for 2-wire transducers)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-97

Analog Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bit High Speed
Voltage measurement Current measurement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 L+

Group error display red

SF

Multiplexer

Meas. range module

24V

Internal supply

M0+ M0* CH0 M1+ M1* CH1 M2+ M2* CH2 M3+ M3 CH3 Mana Mana M4+ M4* CH4 M5+ M5* CH5 M6+ M6* CH6 M7+ M7* CH7

ADC Isolation

Backplane bus interface

SF

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

2 0

Figure 4-37

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

4-98

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bit High Speed

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 230 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable Yes 8 Analog value generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Instantaneous value conversion

Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time per channel Resolution (incl. overrange) Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz Basic execution time of the module (independent of the number of released channels)

Yes 52 ms 14 bits None 400 0.42 ms 60 50

Shielded

max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the electronics L +

24 VDC Yes

Reverse polarity protection

Power supply of the transmitters

Supply current Short-circuit-proof

max. 30 mA (per channel) Yes

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) n=1.2...

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between channels and power supply of the electronics Yes No Yes

Common-mode interference (UCM < 11 VSS) Series-mode interference(peak value of interference < rated value of input range)

> 80 dB

> 40 dB

Permitted potential difference

VDC 11/VAC 8 V

Between inputs and MANA (UCM) At signal = 0 V Not for 2-wire transmitter VDC 11/VAC 8 V 75 VDC / 60 VAC

Crosstalk between the inputs

> 65 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

Voltage input

"1V " 5V " 10 V 1 to 5 V;

" 0.3 % " 0.4 % " 0.3 % " 0.4 % " 0.3 % " 0.3 % " 0.3 %

Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) Channels against back plane bus and load voltage L + From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without 2wire transducer)

Current input

" 20 mA 0 to 20 mA;

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

4 to 20 mA:

Current consumption

max. 100 mA max. 50 mA

Power dissipation of the module

typ. 1.5 W

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-99

Analog Modules

Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C, referred to input range)

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance

Voltage input

"1V "5V " 10 V 1 to 5 V;

" 0.2 % " 0.25 % " 0.2 % " 0.25 % " 0.2 % " 0.2 % " 0.2 %

Voltage

"1 V "5V " 10 V 1 to 5 V;

/10 M /100 k /100 k /100 k /50 /50 /50

Current input

" 20 mA 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA:

Current

" 20 mA 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA:

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 _C, referred to the input range)

" 0.004 %/K " 0.03% " 0.1 %

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor

max. 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) 40 mA

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts

Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt

Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned

For measuring voltage For measuring current

Possible Possible

As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter Possible max. 820

Diagnostic functions

Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

Red LED (SF) Possible

Load of the 2wire measurement transducer (at L+ = DC 24 V)

Characteristic linearization

None

4.20.1

Synchronicity

Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved with the SIMATIC with an equidistant DP bus cycle and the synchronization of the following free running single cycles: Free running of the user program. The length of the cycle time can vary due to acyclic program branching. Free running, variable DP cycle at the PROFIBUS subnetwork Free running cycle at the DP slave backplane bus. Free running cycle during the signal processing and conversion in the electronic modules of the DP slave. In the case of equidistance the DP cycle runs in phase and with the same length. In this cycle the processing levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the synchronous peripheral are synchronized. The I/O data are therefore transferred at defined and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).

4-100

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Requirements
The DP-Master and DP-Slave must support the synchronicity. They require STEP 7 from Version 5.2.

Module filtering mode: Synchronicity

In synchronous operation the following conditions apply:

Standard Mode Filter and processing time TWE between reading the current value and loading it into the transfer buffer (the specified value for TWE applies, independent of the activation of the diagnosis) including an input delay time of TDPmin Diagnostic interrupt Fast Mode (only possible with 6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0) Filter and processing time TWE between reading in the current value and allocation in the transfer buffer (diagnosis not selectable) including an input delay time of TDPmin max. 625 ms max. 625 ms

10 ms 3.5 ms max. 4 x TDP

10 ms 1 ms

Note By using Fast Mode the cycle of the DP system can be accelerated. However, this is at the expense of the diagnosis: The diagnosis is switched off in this operating mode.

Together with the calculation and transfer times required on the IM 153, the specified value for TWE results in the minimum settable value of HW Config of 875 ms for Ti. The specified value for TDPmin is dependent on the extent of extension of the DP slave/IM 153: If there are a number of different plugged in modules, the slowest module determines the time TDPmin.

Note In Synchronous mode, independent of the parameterization made in STEP 7, the module always sets itself to Integration time: no /parasitic frequency. The hardware interrupt functionality is not possible in Synchronous mode.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-101

Analog Modules

Calculation of the filter and processing time

Independent of the number parameterized channels, the same time conditions are always valid. The time related to the clock signal for the reading of a specific channel is calculated according to the formula: TWE_CH = (Channel number +1) x 52 ms + tv; tv = 119 to 209 ms
TWE A/D conversion internal processing (tv)

CH7

CH6

CH5

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

CH0

52ms 52ms

52ms

52ms

52ms

52ms

52ms

52ms

209ms

Figure 4-38

Calculation of the filter and processing time

Explanation of the mode of operation in synchronous operation

The module begins with the A/D conversion of channel 7 and saves this result internally. Then channels 6...0 are converted sequentially at intervals of 52 ms in the same way. After a further internal processing time the result becomes available to all converted channels at the backplane bus for collection by the CPU.

Further information
Further information on synchronicity can be found in the Online help of STEP 7, in the manualLocal peripheral system ET 200M and in the manual Synchronicity.

4-102

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.20.2

Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed by means of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Meas. range module

If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. You must then switch the 24 V supply off and on at the front connector. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the reference manual, Section 4.4. The corresponding table in the reference manual, Section 4.20.3, tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range modules are preset to B (voltage; " 10 V) when the module is supplied. To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting. Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.
Table 4-59 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed using Measuring Range Modules Measuring Range Module Setting A B C D Measuring Method Voltage Voltage Current, Four-wire transmitter Current, Two-wire transmitter Measuring Range " 1 V* " 10 V 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in the reference manual, section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-103

Analog Modules

Table 4-60 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Enable

Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt

upon limit violation Fast Mode (only settable if the 331-7HF01 was registered in synchronous operation in the properties of the DP slave) Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no

No No No

Dynamic

Module

Static

Module

Constraint possible due to measuring range. 32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Deactivated U Voltage U 4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter) No

Upper limit value Lower limit value

Diagnostics

Dynamic

Channel

Group diagnostics
Measurement

Static

Channel group

Measuring Method

Dynamic "10 V

Channel or Channel group

Measuring Range Interference

Refer to the reference manual, section 4.20.3, for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. none; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz

50 Hz

Suppression

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. Die SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed has a measuring range module for each channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC.

4-104

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-61 Assignment of the channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed to channel groups Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 ... form one Channel Group each Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-47 in the reference manual.

4.20.3

Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-105

Analog Modules

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement, 2-wire transmitter: There are two ways to use the channels: a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module comes on. b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 kW. You may then enable diagnostics for this channel group. Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transmitter: Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) "1V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V 4DMU: Current (4-wire transmitter) 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA 2DMU: Current (2-wire transmitter) 4 to 20 mA D C Measuring Range Module Setting A B Description You will find the digitized analog values in the reference manual, section 4.3.1, in the voltage measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in the reference manual, section 4.3.1, in the current measuring range

Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the voltage measuring method and the "10 V measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed with STEP 7.

4-106

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring range

With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current falls below 3.6 mA. If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-107

Analog Modules

4.21

Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits; (6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits has the following characteristic features: 8 inputs Measured-value resolution 12 bits + sign Measuring method selectable: Voltage Current Resistors Bulb resistor Isolated against the backplane bus interface

4-108

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

The following figure shows some examples of connections for the different types of measurements on channels 4 to 7. Basically, these connection examples apply to all channels (channel 0 to 7).
Connection example U+ I+ S Ch 0 M+ M U+ I+ S M+ M
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Multiplexer

21 22 23 24 25 26 27

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

U+ I+ S M+ M U+ I+ S M+ M U+ I+ S M+ M U+ I+ S M+ M

Ch 4

Ch 1

U+ I+ Ch 2 S M+ M U+ I+ Ch 3 S M+ M

Logic and backplane bus activation

Electrical isolation ADC

28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Ch 5
A

Ch 6
mV

Current source

35 36 37 38

+ 5 V from backplane bus Internal supply

39 40

Ch 7

Channel number

Figure 4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Note When connecting the voltage and current sensors, make sure that you do not exceed the maximum permitted common-mode voltage UCM of 2 V between the inputs. So to prevent measuring errors, interconnect the individual M terminals. It is not necessary to interconnect the M terminals when measuring resistors and resistance temperature detectors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-109

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 250 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs No 8 8 Analog value generation Measuring principle Integration time/resolution (per channel) Integrating

Programmable Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms

Yes 50 60 66 60 50 55

For resistance-type sensor Shielded

Length of cable max. 200 m max. 50 m at 50 mV Voltages, Currents, Potentials Constant current for resistance-type sensor

66

55

0.83 mA

Resistance thermometer and resistance measurement 0 ... 600 Resistance measurement 0 ... 6 k

Resolution in bits (incl. Overrange

13 bits

13 bits

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2

0.25 mA

Isolation

Common-mode interference (UCM < 2 V) Series-mode noise (peak value of noise < nominal value of input range)

> 86 dB

Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels

Yes No

> 40 dB

Permitted potential difference

Between the inputs (ECM) Between the inputs and Minternal (UISO)

2.0 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 90 mA typ. 0.4 W

Crosstalk between the inputs

> 50 dB

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus

Power dissipation of the module

4-110

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

Voltage input

" 5 V " 10 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 50 mV " 500 mV "1 V

" 0.6 %

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 _C, referred to the input range)

" 0.006 %/K / 0.006 K/K

" 0.1 % / 0.1 K

" 0.5 %

" 0.1 % / " 0.1 K

Current input

" 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 6 k 0 to 600 Pt 100 Ni 100 Standard Pt 100 Ni 100 Climate

" 0.5 % Interrupts " 0.5 % " 0.5 % " 1.2 K

Status, interrupts, diagnostics None None

Resistors Resistance thermometer

Diagnostic functions

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance

"1K

Voltage

" 50 mV " 500 mV "1 V "5V " 10 V 1 to 5 V; 0 to 10 V

100 k

Ni 1000, LG-Ni " 1 K 1000 Standard Ni 1000 LG-Ni 1000 Climate "1K

" 0.3 %

Current

" 20 mA 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA:

50

Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C, referred to input range)

Voltage input

" 5 V " 10 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 50 mV " 500 mV "1 V

" 0.4 %

Resistors Resistance thermometer

0 to 6 k 0 to 600 Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 1000 LG-Ni 1000 Standard / Climate

100 M 100 M

Current input

" 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 6 k 0 to 600 Pt 100 Ni 100 Standard Pt 100 Ni 100 Climate Ni 1000 LG-Ni 1000 Standard Ni 1000 LG-Ni 1000 Climate

" 0.3 % Maximum input voltage for voltage input U+ (destruction limit) Maximum input voltage for voltage inputs M+, M-, S (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input I+ (destruction limit)

max. 30 V continuous

Resistors Resistance thermometer

" 0.3 % " 0.3 % "1K

max. 12 V continuous; 30 V for max. 1 s 40 mA

" 0.8 K

" 0.8 K

" 0.8 K

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-111

Analog Modules

Connection of the sensor

Characteristic linearization Possible

Programmable Pt 100 Standard / Climate Ni 100 Standard / Climate Ni 1000 Standard / Climate LG-Ni 1000 Standard / Climate Degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin

For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter

For RTD

Possible, with external supply Possible

Technical unit for temperature measurement

For measuring resistance with two-conductor connection with three-conductor connection with four-conductor connection Possible Possible Possible

4-112

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.21.1

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in the reference manual, section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 4-63 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Measurement Measuring Method

Deactivated U Voltage I Current R Resistors RTD Bulb resistor Voltage "50 mV; "500 mV; "1 V; 1 to 5 V; "5 V; 0 to 10 V; "10 V Current 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; "20 mA Resistors 0 to 600 ; 0 to 6 k Bulb resistor (linear) Pt 100 Climate / Standard Ni 100 Climate / Standard Ni 1000 Climate / Standard LG-Ni 1000 Climate / Standard

Measuring Range

"10 V

"20 mA 600 Pt 100 standard Dynamic Channel

Temperature
coefficient

Pt 100 0.003850 // C (IST-90) Ni 100 / Ni 1000 0.006180 // C LG-Ni 1000 0.005000 // C 50 Hz; 60 Hz

0.003850

Interference

50 Hz Module

Frequency Suppression Degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin* Degrees Celsius

Temperature unit
*

only Pt 100 Standard, Ni 100 Standard, Ni 1000 Standard, LG-Ni 1000 Standard

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-113

Analog Modules

4.21.2

Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test You perform the setting with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module.

4-114

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.22

Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits; (6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits has the following characteristic features: 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Measured-value resolution; settable per group (depending on the integration time set) 9 bits + sign 12 bits + sign 14 bits + sign Measuring method selectable per channel group: Voltage Current Resistors Temperature Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Two channels with limit monitoring Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Isolated against the backplane bus interface Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one coding key is inserted in position D)

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel, the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-10).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-115

Analog Modules

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Thermocouples, Voltage measurement Current measurement
L+
Internal supply Current Multi- Meas. range source plexer module

Resistance test

Fault indicator red

SF

24V

T Comp.

Int.

+
None

Ext. compensation
Comp

M0 + CH0 M0 + CH0 M0* M0* M1 + CH1 IC0 + IC0* M1* M2 + CH2 M1 + CH2 M1* M2 * M3 + CH3 IC1 + M3* IC1* Comp + Comp/ Mana M4 + CH4 M2 + CH4 M4* M2* M5 + CH5 IC2 + M5* IC2* M6 + CH6 M3 + CH6 M3* M6 * M7 + CH7 IC3 + IC3* M7*

AD C
Isolation

Backplane bus interface

SF
M

Figure 4-40

Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (see Technical Specifications).

4-116

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 250 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs For resistance-type sensor Length of cable Shielded No 8 4 max. 200 m max. 50 m at 80 mV and thermocouples Analog value generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Integrating

Programmable Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms or Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms or Additional conversion time for measuring resistance and open-circuit monitoring, in ms

Yes 2.5 3 162/3 17 20 22 100 102

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronics L + 24 VDC Yes

10

10

10

10

Reverse polarity protection

Power supply of the transmitters

16

16

16

16

Supply current Short-circuit-proof

max. 60 mA (per channel) Yes typ. 1.67 mA

Constant current for resistance-type sensor Isolation

Resolution in bits (incl. overrange) Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all channels enabled)

9 bits 400 24

12 bits 60 136

12 bits 50 176

14 bits 10 816

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Not for 2-wire transmitter

Yes Yes

Smoothing of the measured values

None

Permitted potential difference Between inputs and MANA (UCM) At signal = 0 V

2.5 VDC

Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

2.5 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 50 mA max. 30 mA (without two-wire transmitter) typ. 1 W

Insulation tested with Current consumption From the backplane bus

From the backplane bus L+

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-117

Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for F = n (f1 = interference frequency) (f1 " 1 %), > 70 dB

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Programmable channels 0 and 2 Programmable Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible

Common-mode interference (UCM < 2.5 V) Series-mode noise (peak value of noise < nominal value of input range)

> 40 dB

Diagnostic interrupt

Crosstalk between the inputs

> 50 dB

Diagnostic functions Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

Voltage input

80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V

"1% " 0.6 % " 0.8 % " 0.7 % " 0. 7 % " 1. 1 % " 0. 7 % " 0. 8 %

Voltage

Current input Resistors Thermocouple Resistance thermometer

3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate

" 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1000 mV " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V; " 10 V " 3.2 mA " 10 mA " 20 mA 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA: 150 300 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100, Ni 100

/10 M /10 M /10 M /10 M /100k /100k /100k /100k /25 /25 /25 /25 /25 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10

Current

Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C referred to input range)

Resistors

Voltage input

80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V

" 0.7 % " 0.4 % " 0.6 % " 0.5 % " 0.5 % " 0.7 % " 0.5 % " 0.6 %

Thermocouples Resistance thermometer

Current input Resistors Thermocouple Resistance thermometer

3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)

max. 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) 40 mA

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C referred to input range) Temperature error of internal compensation

" 0.005 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 %

"1%

4-118

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Connection of the sensor

For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter For measuring resistance With two-conductor connection With three-conductor connection With four-conductor connection Load of the two-wire transmitter

Possible Possible Possible

Characteristic linearization for thermocouples

Programmable Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100 (standard, climate range) Ni 100 (standard, climate range) Programmable Possible Possible

For RTD

Temperature compensation Possible Possible Possible max. 820

Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with compensating box Compensation for 0 _C comparison point temperature Technical unit for temperature measurement

Possible

Degrees Celsius

4.22.1

Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits by means of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Meas. range module

If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 4.4. The corresponding table in Section 4.22.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-119

Analog Modules

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range modules are preset to B (voltage; " 10 V) when the module is supplied. To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting. Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.
Table 4-64 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Modules Measuring Range Module Setting A B C D Measuring Method Voltage Voltage Current, Four-wire transmitter Current, Two-wire transmitter Measuring Range " 1000 mV " 10 V 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Dynamic Scope

Enable Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no

No No

Module

Upper limit value Lower limit value

Diagnostics Group diagnostics

Constraint possible due to measuring range. From 32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no

Dynamic

Channel

No Static No

With wire-break
check

Channel group

4-120

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Measurement Measuring Method

Deactivated U Voltage 4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-conductor connection) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) TC-I Thermocouple (internal comparison) TC-E Thermocouple (external comparison) TC-IL Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) TC-EL Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) Refer to Section 4.22.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz

Dynamic

Channel or Channel group

Measuring Range Interference

"10 V

50 Hz

Suppression

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits has a measuring range module for each channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC.
Table 4-66 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits to Channel Groups Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 ... form one Channel Group each Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-121

Analog Modules

Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, there is only one channel per channel group. The 2nd channel of each group is used for current injection (IC). The measured value is obtained by accessing the 1st channel of the group. The 2nd channel of the group has the default carry value 7FFFH.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

4.22.2

Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test Temperature measurement You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

4-122

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement, 2-wire transmitter: There are two ways to use the channels: a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module comes on. b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 kW. You may then enable diagnostics for this channel group. Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transmitter: Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group.

Special characteristic when all channels are disabled

If you disable all input channels of the module and enable diagnostics when parameterizing the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 12 bits, the module does not indicate that the external auxiliary voltage is missing.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV " 1000 mV " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V TC-I:thermocouple (internal compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) TC-E: Thermocouple (external compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] Type E [NiCr-CuNi] Type J [Fe-CuNi] Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in " 80 mV the voltage measuring range B Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring range

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-123

Analog Modules

Table 4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, continued Method Selected 2DMU: Current (2-wire transmitter) 4DMU: Current (4-wire transmitter) Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) 4 to 20 mA " 3.2 mA " 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA R-4L: Resistors (four-conductor connection) TC-IL: Thermocouple (linear, internal compensation) (temperature measurement) TC-EL: Thermocouple (linear, external compensation) (temperature measurement) RTD-4L: Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) (temperature measurement) Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard Ni 100 standard A 150 W 300 W 600 W Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] Type E [NiCr-CuNi] Type J [Fe-CuNi] Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] Fe-CuNi A A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the resistance measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range The characteristics are linearized: Measuring Range Module Setting D C Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring range

Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751 Ni 100 according to IEC

DIN 43760

Thermocouple to DIN
584, type L to DIN 43710.

Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the voltage measuring method and the " 10 V measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits with STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (thermocouples and bulb resistors.

4-124

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring range

With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current falls below 3.6 mA. If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.

4.23

Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD has the following characteristic features: 8 differential inputs for RTD resistance temperature detector in 4 channel groups Optional setting of the resistance thermometer type per channel group Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt 8 channels with limit monitoring Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-125

Analog Modules

Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you must have one of the following IM 153 x: IM 153-1; ab 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01 IM 153-2; ab 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05 IM 153-2; ab 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Fault indicator red

L+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 M 20 DAC ADC ADC DAC DAC ADC DC to DC ADC L+ M21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 DAC 38 39 40 M M4+ M4Ic4+ Ic4M5+ M5Ic5+ Ic5M6+ M6Ic6+ Ic6M7+ M7Ic7+ Ic7K7 K6 K5 K4 L+

SF
K0

M0+ M0Ic0+ Ic0M1+ M1K1 Ic1+ Ic1M2+ M2K2 Ic2+ Ic2M3+ M3K3 Ic3+ Ic3-

Backplane bus activation

Figure 4-41

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

4-126

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 272 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 8 Analog value generation Measuring principle Module filtering mode Integration/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Integrating 8 channels, hardware

Programmable Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz

Yes 80 185*

Shielded

max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials

100

Power rated voltage of the electronics L+

24 VDC Yes max. 5 mA

Reverse polarity protection

16 bits 400 / 60 / 50

Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels In groups of

Yes Yes

Smoothing of the measured values Conversion time (per channel) Basic response time of module (all channels enabled)

None / low/ average/ high 100 ms 200 ms 8 channels, software

Yes 2

Module filtering mode Integration/conversion time/ resolution (per channel)

Permitted potential difference

Between the inputs (UCM ) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

75 VDC / 60 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 100 mA max. 240 mA typ. 4.6 W

Programmable Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppres sion for interference frequency f1 in Hz

Yes 8 / 25 / 30 45 / 79 / 89*

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From the power supply L+

20 / 37 / 42

Power dissipation of the module

16 bits 400 / 60 / 50

Smoothing of the measured values Conversion time (per channel) Basic response time of module (all channels enabled)

None / low/ average/ high 20 / 37 / 42 ms 40 / 79 / 84 ms

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-127

Analog Modules

Module filtering mode Integration/conversion time/ resolution (per channel)

4 channels, hardware

Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the input range)

"0.02 % "0.01 %

Programmable Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppres sion for interference frequency f1 in Hz

Yes 3.3 185*

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts

Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt

Programmable (channels 0 7) Programmable Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible

85**

Diagnostic functions 16 bits 400 / 60 / 50 Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed

Data for Selecting a Sensor None / low/ average/ high 10 ms Input range (rated values) input resistance

Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled)

Resistance thermometer

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for f = n (f1 1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.

Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000, Cu 10 150, 300, 600 W 35 VDC continuous; 75 VDC for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20)

Resistors

Common-mode interference (UCM < 60 VAC) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)

> 100 dB

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor

> 90 dB

For measuring resistance With two-conductor connection Possible (without resistance correction) Possible Possible

Crosstalk between the inputs

> 100 dB

Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred to 0 to 60 _C input range)

With three-conductor connection With four-conductor connection Characteristic linearization

Resistance thermometer Resistors

"1.0 C "0.1 %

Basic error (operational limit at 25C, referred to input range)

Resistance thermometer

Resistance thermometer Resistors

"0.5 C "0.05 % "0.005 %/K

Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000, Cu 10 (standard and climatic range) Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit

Temperature error (with reference to the input range)

Technical unit for temperature measurement

* The resistance measurement for a three-conductor connection is performed every 5 minutes. ** Open-circuit monitoring in module filtering mode 4 Channels, Hardware is performed every 3 seconds.

4-128

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.23.1

Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in an ET 200M PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master, certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable, hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other parameters are permitted. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Enable Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no

No No No

Dynamic

Module

Upper limit value Lower limit value

Diagnostics Group diagnostics

32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no

32767 -32768 No

Dynamic

Channel

With wire-break
check

Static No

Channel group

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-129

Analog Modules

Table 4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Measurement Measuring Method

Deactivated R-4L Resistance (four-conductor connection) R-3L Resistance, three-conductor connection RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) RTD-3L Bulb resistor (linear, three-conductor connection) Refer to Section 4.23.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit

RTD-4L

Dynamic

Channel group

Measuring Range

Pt 100 climate 0.003850 (IPTS-68) Degrees Celsius 8 channels, hardware filter 0.003850 Dynamic Dynamic Module Module

Temperature unit

Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter

8 channels software filter 4 channels hardware filter

Temperature

coefficient for temperature measurement with bulb resistor (RTD)

Platinum (Pt) 0,003850 W/W/ C 0.003916 W/W/ C 0.003902 W/W/ C 0.003920 W/W/ C 0,003850 W/W/ C (ITS-90) Nickel (Ni) 0.006180 W/W/ C 0.006720 W/W/ C Copper (Cu) 0.00427 W/W/ C 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz

Dynamic

Channel group

Interference Smoothing

suppression* None Low Average High

50/60/400 Hz None

Dynamic Dynamic

Channel group Channel group

50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes; 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

4-130

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC.
Table 4-69 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 ... form one Channel Group each Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in STEP 7.

Module filtering mode The SM 331; AI 8 RTD operates in one of the following modes:

Hardware filter, 8 channels Software filter, 8 channels Hardware filter, 4 channels The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-131

Analog Modules

Hardware filter 8 channels mode

In Hardware filter 8 channels mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x RTD switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-42).

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K0

K2

K4

K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K1

K3

K5

K7

Figure 4-42

Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 85 ms. The module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 12 ms to switch and settle. Each channel needs a time of 97 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 194 ms. Scan time = (tK + tU) x 2 Scan time = (85 ms + 12 ms) x 2 Scan time = 194 ms
tK: tU: channel conversion time for one channel time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

4-132

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Software filter 8 channels mode

In Software filter 8 channels mode, the analog/digital conversion occurs in exactly the same way as in hardware filter 8 channels mode. That is to say, as the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels are converted, all the ADCs convert simultaneously for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-43).

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K0

K2

K4

K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K1

K3

K5

K7

Figure 4-43

Software filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference frequency suppression. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including communication time is 30 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 25 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 8 ms. As with 8-channel hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over by means of opto MOS relays with a time of 12 ms for switching to the other channel of the group. This relationship is shown in the table that follows.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-133

Analog Modules

Table 4-70 Scan Times in Software Filter, 8 Channels Mode Programmed Interference Frequency Suppression 50 Hz 60 Hz 400 Hz * Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All Channels) 84 ms 74 ms 40 ms

42 ms 37 ms 20 ms

Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 12 ms switching time to the other channel in the channel group

Scan time in Hardware Filter, 4 Channels mode

In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion (simultaneous) Scan time K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-44

Hardware filter 4 channels scan time

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 10 ms. As the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms. Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

4-134

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all operating modes. In the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes, the scan time of the module is doubled, irrespective of the number of channels for which wire-break has been enabled. In the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode, the module interrupts processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 170 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 4.6.

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage. The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

4.23.2

Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: RTD 4-conductor measurement RTD 3-conductor measurement Resistor 4-conductor measurement Resistor 3-conductor measurement You perform the setting with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-135

Analog Modules

Unused Channels
Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. You must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer to the block diagram, Figure 4-41, for the connection). In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, termination is not necessary provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the measuring range parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-71 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD Method Selected Resistors: (Three-conductor/four-cond uctor terminal) Resistance RTD (Three-conductor/four-cond uctor terminal) Measuring Range 150 W 300 W 600 W Pt 100 climate Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 100 climate Ni 120 climate Ni 200 climate Ni 500 climate Ni 1000 climate Cu 10 climate Pt 100 standard Pt 200 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 120 standard Ni 200 standard Ni 500 standard Ni 1000 standard Cu 10 standard Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.1

4-136

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The programmable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the AI 8 RTD from the range of values shown in Table 4-68. The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and can vary between the lower limits shown in the table below and 32511 (7EFFH). Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit values shown in the table below.

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all the enabled channels is complete.
Table 4-72 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with additional information

Special analog markers

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

Byte

2 bits per channel to identify the range Upper limit exceeded in channel Lower limit exceeded in channel End-of-scan-cycle event Unassigned bit

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2 X

1 1

0 0

0 1 2 3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-137

Analog Modules

4.24

Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC has the following features: 8 differential inputs for thermocouples (TC) in 4 channel groups Optional setting of the thermocouple type per channel group Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt 8 channels with limit monitoring Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Programmable reaction to open thermocouple Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x TC in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you must have one of the following IM 153-x: IM 153-1; as of 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01 IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05 IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

4-138

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Fault indicator red
SF
1 2 3 4 5 6 Channel 0 Channel 1 TC+0 TC-0 TC+1 TC-1 TC+2 Channel 2 Channel 3 TC-2 TC+3 TC-3 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Ext KV ADC ADC ADC ADC DC to DC LM+ 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 M TC+4 TC-4 TC+5 TC-5 TC+6 TC-6 TC+7 TC-7 KV+ KVlc+ lcExt KV K7 K6 K5 K4 L+

Backplane bus interface

Channel number Figure 4-45 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-139

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 272 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Length of cable No Analog value generation Measuring principle Module filtering mode Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Integrating 8 channels, hardware

Programmable Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz

Yes 95 4

Shielded

max. 100 m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 24 VDC Yes typ. 0.7 mA

Power rated voltage of the electronics L+

Reverse polarity protection

16 bits 400/60/50

Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels In groups of

Yes Yes

Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) Module filtering mode Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel)

None / low/ average/ high 190 ms

Yes 2

8 channels, software

Permitted potential difference

Between the inputs (UCM ) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

75 VDC / 60 VAC 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC

Programmable Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz

Yes 23/72/83 4

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+

max. 100 mA max. 240 mA typ. 3.0 W

16 bits 400/60/50

Power dissipation of the module

Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled)

None / low/ average/ high 46/144/166 ms

4-140

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Analog Value Generation (Contd) Measuring principle Module filtering mode Integrating 4 channels, hardware Type S Type R

-230 C to +100 C to -50 C to +100 C to -50 C to Type B 4) +200 C to +45 C Type C +100 C to 0 C

-200 C +1769 C +100 C +1769 C +100 C +1820 C +200 C +2315 C +100 C

3.0 C 1.5 C 1.8 C 1.7 C 2.0 C 2.3 C 2.5 C 2.3 C 2.5 C

Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel)

Programmable Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz

Yes 1.0 93 1)

16 bits 400/60/50 None / low/ average/ high 10 ms

Basic error (operational limit at 25C, referred to input range)

Thermocouple -200 C to -230 C to +400 C -200 C +400 C -150 C +1000 C -200 C +1200 C -150 C +900 C -150 C +1372 C -200 C +1300 C -200 C +1769 C +100 C +1769 C +100 C +1820 C +200 C +2315 C +100 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 1.0 C 0.2 C 1.0 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.3 C 0.5 C 0.3 C 0.5 C

Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled)

Type T

Type U

-150 C to -200 C to

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for f = n (f1 1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.

Type E

-200 C to -230 C to

Common-mode interference (Ucm < 60 VAC) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)

> 100 dB

Type J

-150 C to -210 C to

Type L > 90 dB 2) Type K > 100 dB

-150 C to -200 C to -200 C to -230 C to

Crosstalk between the inputs

Type N

-200 C to -230 C to

Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred to 0 to 60 C input range) Note: This limit does not cover the error cold connection point3)

Type R

+100 C to -50 C to

Thermocouple -200 C to -230 C to +400 C -200 C +400 C -150 C +1000 C -200 C +1200 C -150 C +900 C -150 C +1372 C -200 C +1300 C 0.7 C 1.0 C 0.9 C 1.2 C 1.2 C 1.5 C 1.4 C 1.7 C 1.5 C 1.8 C 2.1 C 2.9 C 2.2 C Type C Type B 4) Type S

Type T

+100 C to -50 C to +200 C to +45 C to +100 C to 0 C

Type U

-150 C to -200 C to

Type E

-200 C to -230 C to

Type J

-150 C to -210 C to

Type L

-150 C to -200 C to

Type K

-200 C to -230 C to

Type N

-200 C to

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-141

Analog Modules

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the output range
3)

0.005%/K 0.02% 0.01%

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input ranges (rated values)/ input resistance

Thermocouples

Type B, C, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U 20 VDC continuous; 75 VDC for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) Programmable Programmable Possible Possible

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Characteristic linearization Temperature compensation Programmable (channels 0 to 7) Programmable Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts

Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt

Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Compensation for 0C comparison point temperature Compensation for 50C comparison point temperature Technical unit for temperature measurement

Diagnostic functions Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

Possible

Possible

Degrees Celsius/ degrees Fahrenheit

1) 2)

Open-circuit monitoring in 4 channels, Hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds. Series-mode rejection in 8 channels, software mode is reduced as follows: 50 Hz > 70 dB 60 Hz > 70 dB 400 Hz > 80 dB

3)

The operational limit comprises only the basic error of the analog input at Ta = 25 C and the total temperature error. The total error must cover the error for the compensation of the cold connection point. Internal compensation of the cold connection point = max. 1.5 C External compensation of the cold connection point = accuracy of the used external RTD is +0.1 C External compensation of the cold connection point, where the connection point is held at 0 C or 50 C = accuracy of the connection point temperature control. Because of the slight rise over the range of approx. 0 C to 85 C, the lack of compensation of the comparison point temperature only has a negligible effect on a type B thermocouple. If there is no compensation and the measuring method Compensation to 0 C is set, the deviation in the type B thermocouple duringtemperature measurement is: 200 C to 1802 C <0.5 C

4)

4-142

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.24.1

Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC bits in STEP 7.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7.

Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC in an ET 200M PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master, certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable, hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other parameters are permitted. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Enable Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no

No No No

Dynamic

Module

Upper limit value Lower limit value

Diagnostics Group diagnostics

32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no

32767 -32768 No

Dynamic

Channel

With wire-break
check

Static No

Channel group

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-143

Analog Modules

Table 4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Measurement Measuring Method

Deactivated TC-IL Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) TC-EL Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) TC-L00C Thermocouple (linear, ref. temperature 0C) TC-L50C Thermocouple (linear, ref. temperature 50C) For the settable measuring ranges of the input channels, please refer to the individual module description. Overflow; underflow Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels software filter 4 channels hardware filter 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; None Low Average High

TC-IL

Dynamic

Channel group

Measuring Range Reaction to open

thermocouple

Type K

Overflow Degrees Celsius 8 channels, hardware filter 50/60/400 Hz None Dynamic Dynamic Module Module

Temperature unit Module filtering

mode

Interference Smoothing

Dynamic Dynamic

suppression*

Channel group Channel group

50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes; 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

4-144

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC.
Table 4-74 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 ... form one Channel Group each Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in STEP 7.

Module filtering mode The SM 331; AI 8 x TC operates in one of the following modes: Hardware filter, 8 channels Software filter, 8 channels Hardware filter, 4 channels The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-145

Analog Modules

Hardware filter 8 channels mode

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-35).

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K0

K2

K4

K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K1

K3

K5

K7

Figure 4-46

Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

Scan time in the mode In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 91 ms. The module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Each channel needs a time of 98 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 196 ms. Scan time = (tK + tU) x 2 Scan time = (91 ms + 7 ms) x 2 Scan time = 196 ms
tK: tU: channel conversion time for one channel time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

4-146

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Software filter 8 channels mode

In 8-channel software filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-47).

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K0

K2

K4

K6

Scan time

Start analog conversion (simultaneous)

K1

K3

K5

K7

Figure 4-47

Software filter 8 channels scan time

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-147

Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In the 8-channel software filter mode of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC, the channel conversion time is guided by the interference frequency set. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including communication time is 76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. As with 8-channel hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over by means of opto MOS relays with a switchover time of 7 ms to the other channel of the group. Table 4-75 shows the scan time of the module at a certain interference frequency.
Table 4-75 Scan Times in Software Filter, 8 Channels Mode Programmed Interference Frequency Suppression 50 Hz 60 Hz 400 Hz * Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All Channels) 166 ms 144 ms 46 ms

83 ms 72 ms 23 ms

Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 7 ms switching time to the other channel in the channel group

Hardware filter 4 channels mode

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC does not switch over between the channels of the individual groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

Start analog conversion (simultaneous) Scan time K0 K2 K4 K6

Figure 4-48

Hardware filter 4 channels scan time

4-148

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Scan time of the module

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 10 ms. As the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms. Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check

The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all operating modes. In the 8-Channel Hardware and Software Filter operating mode prolongs the scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which wire-break has been enabled. In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, the module interrupts processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 93 ms.

Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 4.6.

Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage. The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-149

Analog Modules

4.24.2

Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 0 C Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 50 C Thermocouples, linearization with internal comparison Thermocouple, linearization with external comparison You perform the setting with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. You must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel. To do this, short the Plus input and Minus input of the channel. In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, termination is not necessary provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored in this mode.

Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the measuring range parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-76 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC Method Selected TC-L00C: (thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 0 C) TC-L50C: (thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 50 C) TC-IL: (thermocouple, linear, internal compensation) TC-EL: (thermocouple, linear, external compensation) Measuring Range Type B Type C Type E Type J Type K Type L Type N Type R Type S Type T Type U Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range

4-150

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The programmable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the AI 8 x TC from the range of values shown in Table 4-73. The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH). Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit values shown in the tables below.
Table 4-77 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in C Thermocouple in C Type B Type C Type E Type J Type K Type L Type N Type R, S Type T Type U 1820.1 ----1200.1 1372.1 900.1 --1769.1 400.1 600.1 Minimum Possible Upper Limit Value Dec. 18201 ----12001 13721 9001 --1769.1 4001 6001 Hex. 471AH ----2EE1H 3599H 2329H --451BH 0FA1H 1771H in C 0 ----<-210.0 <-270.0 <-200.0 ---50.1 <-270.0 <-200.0 Minimum Possible Lower Limit Value Dec. 0 ----<-2100 <-2700 <-2000 ---501 <-2700 <-2000 < F830H < F830H --FE0BH Hex. 0 -----

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-151

Analog Modules

Table 4-78 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in F Thermocouple in F Type B Type C Type E Type J Type K Type L Type N Type R, S Type T Type U 2786.6 ----2192.2 2501.8 1652.2 --3216.4 752.2 1112.2 Minimum Possible Upper Limit Value Dec. 27866 ----21922 25018 16522 --3216.4 7522 11122 Hex. 6CDAH ---55A2H 61BAH 408AH --7DA4H 1062H 2B72H in F 0 ----<-346.0 <454.0 <-328.0 ---58.2 <454.0 <-328.0 Minimum Possible Lower Limit Value Dec. 0 ----<-3460 <-4540 <-3280 ---582 <-4540 <-3280 <EE44H F330H --FDBAH <EE44H Hex. 0 ----

End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all the enabled channels is complete.
Table 4-79 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

Content of the 4 bytes with additional information

Analog special marker s

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

Byte

2 bits per channel to identify the range Upper limit exceeded in channel Lower limit exceeded in channel End-of-scan-cycle event Unassigned byte

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2 X

1 1

0 0

0 1 2 3

4-152

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.25

Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1 331-7KB02-2AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits has the following characteristic features: Two inputs in one channel group Measured-value resolution (depending on the integration time set) 9 bits + sign 12 bits + sign 14 bits + sign Measuring method selectable per channel group: Voltage Current Resistors Temperature Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt One channel with limit monitoring Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Isolated against the backplane bus interface Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one coding key is inserted in position D)

Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel, the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-10).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-153

Analog Modules

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Thermocouples, Voltage measurement Current measurement
Internal supply Current Multi- Meas. range source plexer module

Resistance test

Fault indicator red

SF

L+

24V

M0 + CH0 M0* M1 + CH1 M1*

M0 + CH0 M0* IC0 + IC0*

T compensation

Internal

+
None

External compensation
Comp

Comp +
Comp/ Mana

ADC Isolation

Backplane bus interface

SF

Figure 4-49

Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (refer to the technical specifications for the module).

4-154

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 250 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs No 2 1 max. 200 m max. 50 m at 80 mV and thermocouples Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronics L + 24 VDC Yes Analog value generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Integrating

Parameters can be assigned Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms or Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms or Additional conversion time for measuring resistance and open-circuit monitoring, in ms

Yes 2.5 6 162/3 34 20 44 100 204

For resistance-type sensor Shielded

Length of cable

Reverse polarity protection

10

10

10

10

Power supply of the transmitters

16

16

16

16

Supply current Short-circuit-proof

max. 60 mA (per channel) Yes typ. 1.67 mA

Constant current for resistance-type sensor Isolation

Resolution in bits (incl. overrange) Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz Basic response time of module, in ms (all channels enabled)

9 bits 400 6

12 bits 60 34

12 bits 50 44

14 bits 10 204

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Not for 2-wire transmitter

Yes Yes

Smoothing of the measured values

None

Permitted potential difference

2.5 VDC

Between inputs and MANA (UCM) At signal = 0 V 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 50 mA max. 30 mA (without two-wire transmitter) typ. 1.3 W Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From the backplane bus L+

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-155

Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) n=1.2... Interrupts

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Common-mode interference (UCM < 2.5 V) Series-mode noise (peak value of noise < nominal value of input range)

> 70 dB

Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Diagnostic interrupt Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

Programmable channel 0 Programmable Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible

> 40 dB

Diagnostic functions

> 50 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

Voltage input

80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V

"1% " 0.6 % " 0.8 % " 0.7 % " 0, 7 % " 1, 1 % " 0, 7 % " 0, 8 %

Voltage

" 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1000 mV " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V; " 10 V

/10 M /10 M /10 M /10 M /100k /100k /100k /100k /25 /25 /25 /25 /25 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10

Current input Resistors Thermocouple Resistance thermometer

3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate

Current

" 3.2 mA " 10 mA " 20 mA 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA:

Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C referred to input range)

Resistors

150 300 600

Voltage input

80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V

" 0.6 % " 0.4 % " 0.6 % " 0.5 % " 0.5 % " 0.7 % " 0.5 % " 0.6 % Thermocouples Resistance thermometer

Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100, Ni 100

Current input Resistors Thermocouple Resistance thermometer

3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)

max. 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) 40 mA

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C referred to input range) Temperature error of internal compensation

" 0.005 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 %

"1%

4-156

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Connection of the sensor

Characteristic linearization Possible Possible

For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter

for thermocouples For RTD

Parameters can be assigned Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100 (standard, climate range) Ni 100 (standard, climate range) Parameters can be assigned Possible Possible

Possible Temperature compensation

For measuring resistance With two-conductor connection With three-conductor connection With four-conductor connection

Possible Possible Possible

Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with compensating box Compensation for 0 _C comparison point temperature Technical unit for temperature measurement

Possible

Load of the two-wire transmitter

max. 820

Degrees Celsius

4.25.1

Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits by means of a measuring range module on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range module

If necessary, the measuring range module must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 4.4. The corresponding table in Section 4.25.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module.

Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range module is preset to B (voltage; " 10 V) when the module is supplied.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-157

Analog Modules

To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting. Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.
Table 4-80 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Module Measuring Range Module Setting A B C D Measuring Method Voltage Voltage Current, Four-wire transmitter Current, Two-wire transmitter Measuring Range "1000 mV "10 V 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Dynamic Scope

Enable Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Trigger for hardware interrupt

Yes/no Yes/no

No No

Module

Upper limit value Lower limit value

Diagnostics Group diagnostics

32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no

Dynamic

Channel

No Static No

With wire-break
check

Channel group

4-158

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope

Measurement Measuring Method

Deactivated U Voltage 4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-conductor connection) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) TC-I Thermocouple (internal comparison) TC-E Thermocouple (external comparison) TC-IL Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) TC-EL Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) Refer to Section 4.25.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz

Dynamic

Channel or Channel group

Measuring Range Interference

"10 V

50 Hz

Suppression

Channel groups
The two channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits are combined to a channel group. You can only ever assign parameters to the channel group. The SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits has a measuring range module for the channel group 0.

Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, the analog input module has only one channel. The 2nd channel is used for current injection (IC). The measured value is obtained by accessing the 1st channel. The 2nd channel has the default carry value 7FFFH.

Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set a hardware interrupt in STEP 7 for the channel group. Note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case in other words, for channel 0.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-159

Analog Modules

4.25.2

Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits

Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test Temperature measurement You perform the setting by means of the measuring range module on the module and with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the measuring method parameter for unused channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement, 2-wire transmitter: There are two ways to use the channels: a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module comes on. b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 kW You may then enable diagnostics for this channel group. Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transmitter: Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group.

Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range module on the module and with the measuring method parameter in STEP 7.

4-160

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Table 4-82 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV " 1000 mV " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V TC-I: Thermocouple (internal compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) TC-E: Thermocouples (external compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) 2DMU: Current (2-wire transmitter) 4DMU: Current (4-wire transmitter) Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] Type E [NiCr-CuNi] Type J [Fe-CuNi] Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in " 80 mV the voltage measuring range B Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring range

4 to 20 mA " 3.2 mA " 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA

D C

You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring range

R-4L: Resistors (four-conductor connection)

150 W 300 W 600 W

You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the resistance measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range The characteristics are linearized:

TC-IL: thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] (linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] compensation) Type J [Fe-CuNi] (temperature measurement) Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] TC-EL: Thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi]

Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751 Ni 100 according to IEC DIN

43760

(linear, external Type E [NiCr-CuNi] compensation) Type J [Fe-CuNi] (temperature measurement) Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate A (linear, four-conductor Ni 100 climate connection) Pt 100 standard (temperature measurement) Ni 100 standard

Thermocouple to DIN 584,

type L to DIN 43710.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-161

Analog Modules

Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the voltage measuring method and the " 10 V measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 12 bits with STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (thermocouples and bulb resistors.

Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring range

With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current falls below 3.6 mA. If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.

4-162

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.26

Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0

Characteristics The analog input module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits has the following characteristic features 8 Output channels The individual output channels can be programmed as Voltage outputs Current outputs Resolution 12 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-163

Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits
Voltage outputs Fault indicator red Current outputs

Voltage outputs Current outputs

DAC Internal supply

DAC

Isolation Backplane bus interface

Figure 4-50

Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8

12 bits

4-164

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 272 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Length of cable No 8 max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Yes Analog value generation

Resolution including sign 10 V; 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA; Conversion time (per channel) For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load 11 bits + sign 12 bits max. 0.8 ms 0.2 ms 3.3 ms 0.5 ms (1 mH) 3.3 ms (10 mH) Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

Settling time

Shielded

Reverse polarity protection

Crosstalk between the outputs

> 40 dB

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes Yes

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range)

Voltage outputs Current outputs

0.5 % 0.6 %

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to the output range) No Yes Output voltage Output current Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25C, referred to the output range) Output ripple; band width 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range) 0.4 % 0.5 % 0.002 % /K

Permitted potential difference

Between S and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)

3 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 100 mA max. 340 mA typically 6.0 W

+ 0.05 %

Insulation tested with Current consumption

0.05 %

From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+ (no load)

0.05 %

Power dissipation of the module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-165

Analog Modules

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts

Voltage outputs

Diagnostic Interrupt Group error display Diagnostics information read-out

Programmable Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible

Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current No-load voltage

Yes max. 25 mA max. 18 V

Diagnostic functions

Current outputs Destruction limit for voltages/currents connected from outside

Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (rated values)

Voltage at outputs to MANA

Voltage

10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

max. 18 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (mark-to-space ratio 1:20) max. 50 mA DC

Current

Current For voltage output Four-conductor connection For current output Two-conductor connection

Connection of actuators Possible Possible

Impedance (in the nominal output range)

For voltage outputs capacitive load At UCM < 1 V For inductive load

min. 1 k max. 1 mF max. 500 max. 600 max. 10 mH

For current outputs

4.26.1

Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Note If the load voltage (L+) is switched off and on, this may result in incorrect output values at the output for approx. 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

4-166

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits individually. You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel. When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits is assigned to a channel group in this instance in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-73.

4.26.2

Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You perform connection of the outputs with the output type parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits remain de-energized, you must set the output type parameter to disabled and leave the terminal open.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-167

Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 4-83 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V From 0 to 20 mA From 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage and current output ranges

Current

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are Voltage for the output type and " 10 V for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits carries out a wire-break check only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit test only for voltage outputs.

4-168

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.27

Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit; synchronous; (6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0

Characteristics The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 6 bits has the following characteristic features: 4 outputs in 4 channel groups The individual output channels can be programmed as Voltage outputs Current outputs Resolution of 16 bits Supports clocked operation Supports the parameter changing during the RUN function Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output Galvanic isolation between: Backplane bus interface and analog output channel The different analog output channels Analog output and L+, M Backplane bus interface and L+, M

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-169

Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 4 x 16 bit
Fault indicator red 1 Isolation 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MANA 1 MANA 0 QI1 QI0 QV 0 S 0+ CH0 S 0 CH0 M ANA 0 QV 1 S 1+ CH1 S 1 CH1 M ANA 1 L+ 24 V

Current Outputs

Voltage Outputs

SF

11 12 Backplane bus interface 13 14 15 16 17 18

QI2

QV 2 S 2+ CH2 S 2 CH2

MANA 2 QI3

M ANA 2 QV 3 S 3+

CH3 S 3 MANA 3

CH3

M ANA 3

20

Figure 4-51

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits

Note Switching the rated load voltage (L+) off and on for approx. 10 ms can lead to incorrect intermediate values at the output.

4-170

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 220 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Changing parameters during the RUN possible Yes Yes

0 to 20 mAV 4 to 20 mA in standard operation in clocked operation

14 bits 14 bits max. 0.8 ms 1.6 ms

Conversion time (per channel)

Basic response time of module (independent of number of released channels)

in standard operation in clocked operation For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load

3.2 ms 2.4 ms 0.2 ms 3.3 ms 0.5 ms (1 mH) 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Behavior of the non parameterized outputs

outputs the last valid output value before the parameterization 4

Settling time

Number of outputs Length of cable

Shielded

max. 200 m

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Crosstalk between outputs > 100 dB

Voltages, Currents, and Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Yes

Reverse polarity protection

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Yes Yes

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range)

Voltage outputs Current outputs

"0.12% "0.18%

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to output range)

Yes

Voltage outputs " 10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V "0.02% "0.02% "0.04% "0.02% "0.02% "0.04%

Permitted potential difference Between the outputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 200 VDC / 120 VAC 200 VDC / 120 VAC 500 VDC

Current outputs " 20 mA 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 100 mA max. 240 mA typ. 3 W

Temperature error (with reference to the output range)

Voltage outputs Current outputs

"0.0025% / K "0.004% / K "0.004% "0.002 %

Power dissipation of the module

Analog value generation Resolution (incl. sign)

Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the output range)

"10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V " 20 mA

16 bits 15 bits 14 bits 15 bits

Output ripple; band width 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range)

"0.05%

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-171

Analog Modules

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts

Voltage outputs

Diagnostic interrupt

Programmable Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible Yes, programmable

Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current No-load voltage

Yes max. 40 mA max. 18 V

Diagnostic functions Group error display Diagnostic information readable

Current outputs Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside

Substitute value can be applied

Voltage at outputs to MANA

max. 15 V continuous 75 VDC for no more than 0.1 s (pulse duty factor 1 : 20)

Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (rated values)

Voltage

10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

Current

max. 50 mA DC

Connection of actuators For voltage output Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Two-conductor connection Possible

Current

Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output)

min. 1 k max. 1 F max. 500 max. 1 mH

For current output Possible

For voltage outputs capacitive load Inductive load For current outputs

4.27.1

Synchronicity

Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved with the SIMATIC with an equidistant DP bus cycle and the synchronization of the following free running single cycles: Free running of the user program. The length of the cycle time can vary due to acyclic program branching. Free running, variable DP cycle at the PROFIBUS subnetwork Free running cycle at the DP-Slave back plane bus. Free running cycle during the signal conditioning and conversion in the electronic modules of the DP-Slave. In the case of equidistance the DP cycle runs in phase and with the same length. In this cycle the processing levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the synchronous peripheral are synchronized. The I/O data are therefore transferred at defined and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).

Requirements
The DP-Master and DP-Slave must support the synchronicity. They require STEP 7 from Version 5.2.
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-172

Analog Modules

Module filtering mode: Synchronicity

In synchronous operation the following conditions apply:
Processing and activation time TWA between reading the output value into the output buffer and loading it into the D/A converter for the output TDPmin Diagnostic interrupt 1.6 ms

2.4 ms max. 4 x TDP

Calculation of the filter and processing time

Independent of the number parameterized channels the same time conditions are always valid.
TWA D/A conversion and internal processing CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Updating of the output

1400ms

200ms TO

Figure 4-52

Calculation of the processing time and the time for updating the output

Explanation of the mode of operation in synchronous operation

During the time TO - TWA, the module reads the output data and saves the data internally. After the internal processing time of each channel the results are written in the individual D/A converters.

Further information
Further information on clock synchronicity can be found in the Online help of STEP 7, in the manualLocal Peripheral System ET 200M and in the manual Clock Synchronicity.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-173

Analog Modules

4.27.2

Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit

Note When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in the reference manual, section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-42 in the reference manual.

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits individually. You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel. When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits is assigned to a channel group in this instance in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-47 in the reference manual.

4-174

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

4.27.3

Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You perform connection of the outputs with the output type parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits remain de-energized, you must set the output type parameter to disabled and leave the terminal open.

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 4-84 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V From 0 to 20 mA From 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA Description You will find the digital analog values in section 4.3.2 in the reference manual in the voltage and current output ranges

Current

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are Voltage for the output type and " 10 V for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits in STEP 7.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-175

Analog Modules

4.28

Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits has the following characteristic features: 4 Output channels The individual output channels can be programmed as Voltage outputs Current outputs Resolution 12 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

4-176

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Fault indicator red

L+ DAC

Current output
24V

Voltage outputs

SF

Internal supply

QI0 CH0 MANA QI1 CH1 MANA QI2 CH2 MANA QI3 CH3 MANA M M

Isolation

QV0 S0 + S0* CH0 MANA QV1 S1 + S1* CH1 MANA QV2 S2 + S2* CH2 MANA QV3 S3 + S3* CH3 MANA

Backplane bus interface

SF

Figure 4-53

Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-177

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 220 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 4 max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Yes Analog value generation Resolution including sign

" 10 V; " 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA

11 bits + sign 12 bits max. 0.8 ms 0.2 ms 3.3 ms 0.5 ms (1 mH) 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Conversion time (per channel) Settling time

Shielded

For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB

Reverse polarity protection

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes Yes

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range)

Voltage outputs Current outputs

" 0.5 % " 0.6 %

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to output range) No Yes Voltage outputs Current outputs " 0.4 % " 0.5 % " 0.002 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % " 0.05 %

Permitted potential difference Between S and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 3 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC

Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C, referred to output range) Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (referred to output range)

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 60 mA max. 240 mA typ. 3 W Interrupts

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic interrupt

Power dissipation of the module

Parameters can be assigned Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible Yes, programmable

Diagnostic functions Group error display Diagnostic information readable

Substitute value can be applied

4-178

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (rated values)

Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside

Voltage

10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

Voltage at outputs to MANA

max. 18 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) max. 50 mA DC

Current

Current

Connection of actuators For voltage output Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Two-conductor connection Possible

Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output)

For voltage outputs capacitive load At UCM< 1V Inductive load For current outputs

min. 1 k max. 1 F max. 500 max. 600 W max. 10 mH Yes max. 25 mA max. 18 V

For current output Possible

Voltage outputs

Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current No-load voltage

Current outputs

4.28.1

Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Note When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-179

Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits individually. You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel. When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits is assigned to a channel group in this instance in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-73.

4.28.2

Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You perform connection of the outputs with the output type parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits remain de-energized, you must set the output type parameter to disabled and leave the terminal open.

4-180

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 4-85 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V From 0 to 20 mA From 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage and current output ranges

Current

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are Voltage for the output type and " 10 V for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits carries out a wire-break check only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit test only for voltage outputs.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA

The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA: You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to become de-energized (refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-181

Analog Modules

4.29

Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits has the following characteristic features: 2 Output channels The individual output channels can be programmed as Voltage outputs Current outputs Resolution 12 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

4-182

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Fault indicator red Current output
L+ DAC 24V

Voltage outputs

SF

Internal supply

QI0 CH0 MANA QI1 CH1 MANA

Isolation

QV0 S0 + S0* CH0 MANA QV1 S1 + S1* CH1 MANA

Backplane bus interface

SF

Figure 4-54

Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-183

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 220 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of outputs Length of cable No 2 max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Yes Analog value generation Resolution including sign

" 10 V; " 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA

11 bits + sign 12 bits max. 0.8 ms 0.2 ms 3.3 ms 0.5 ms (1 mH) 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Conversion time (per channel) Settling time

Shielded

For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB

Reverse polarity protection

Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes Yes

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range)

Voltage outputs Current outputs

" 0.5 % " 0.6 %

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to output range) No Yes Voltage outputs Current outputs " 0.4 % " 0.5 % " 0.002 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % " 0.05 %

Permitted potential difference Between S and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 3 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC

Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C, referred to output range) Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (referred to output range)

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 60 mA max. 135 mA typ. 3 W Interrupts

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Diagnostic interrupt

Power dissipation of the module

Parameters can be assigned Programmable Red LED (SF) Possible Yes, programmable

Diagnostic functions Group error display Diagnostic information readable

Substitute value can be applied

4-184

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (rated values)

Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside

Voltage

10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

Voltage at outputs to MANA

max. 18 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) max. 50 mA DC

Current

Current

Connection of actuators For voltage output Two-conductor connection Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Two-conductor connection Possible Possible Possible

Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output)

For voltage outputs capacitive load At UCM< 1V Inductive load For current outputs

min. 1 k max. 1 F max. 500 max. 600 W max. 10 mH Yes max. 25 mA max. 18 V

For current output

Voltage outputs

Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current No-load voltage

Current outputs

4.29.1

Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Note When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-185

Analog Modules

Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits individually. You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel. When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits is assigned to a channel group in this instance in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0.

Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 12 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values can arise across the output.

Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the group diagnosis parameter in Table 4-47, on page 4-73.

4.29.2

Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits

Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You perform connection of the outputs with the output type parameter in STEP 7.

Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits remain de-energized, you must set the output type parameter to disabled and leave the terminal open.

4-186

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 4-86 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V From 0 to 20 mA From 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage and current output ranges

Current

Default Settings
The default settings of the module are Voltage for the output type and " 10 V for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Wire-Break Check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits carries out a wire-break check only for current outputs.

Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit check only for voltage outputs.

Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA

The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA: You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to remain de-energized (refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-187

Analog Modules

4.30

Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0

Characteristics
The analog input/output module SM 334: AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the following characteristic features: Four inputs, two outputs Resolution 8 bits Not parameterizable, setting of measurement and output type by means of wiring Measuring range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA Output range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA Both voltage and current output options Non-isolated against the backplane bus interface Isolated from load voltage

4-188

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
Select the measuring method of the input channels and the output type of the output channels via the wiring.

L+ Internal supply ADC

24V

A V A V A

Backplane bus interface

V A DAC V

MV3 + M3* MI3 + CH3 QV0 MANA CH0 QI0 QV1 MANA CH1 QI1
Voltage Current outputs

MANA

A V

MANA

Figure 4-55

Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits

Note Note when connecting the SM 334 that:

the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the

chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this.

If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed. The supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high potential (+24 V).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Voltage Current measurement

MV0 + M0* CH0 MI0 + MV1 + M1* CH1 MI1 + MV2 + M2* CH2 MI2 +

4-189

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 285 g Data for Specific Module Supports clocked operation Number of inputs Number of outputs Length of cable No 4 2 max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Time constant of the input filter Basic execution time of the module (all channels enabled) max. 0.8 ms max. 5 ms

Analog Value Generation for the Outputs Resolution including sign Conversion time (per channel) Settling time 8 bits max. 500 ms 0.3 ms 3.0 ms 0.3 ms

Shielded

For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error for the Inputs Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %) (f1 = interference frequency)

Power rated voltage of the rated 24 VDC electronics voltage and rated load voltage L+ Isolation

Common-mode interference (Upp < 1 V)

> 60 dB

Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels

No Yes

Crosstalk between the outputs

> 50 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

No

Voltage input Current input

" 0.9 % " 0.8 %

Permitted potential difference

Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input range) Voltage input Current input " 0.7 % " 0.6 % " 0.005 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % " 0.05 %

Between inputs and MANA (UCM) Between the inputs (ECM)

1 VDC 1 VDC 500 VDC

Insulation tested with Current consumption

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C referred to input range) Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (referred to output range)

From the backplane bus From power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 55 mA max. 110 mA typ. 3 W

Power dissipation of the module

Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Measuring principle Integration/conversion time (per channel) Instantaneous value conversion

Parameters can be assigned Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds Resolution including sign

No 500 100

8 bits

4-190

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB

Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (rated values)

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range)

Voltage Current

0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA

Voltage outputs Current outputs

"0.6 % "1.0 %

Impedance (in the nominal output range) For voltage outputs capacitive load Inductive load For current outputs min. 5 kW max. 1 mF max. 300 W max. 1 mH Yes max. 11 mA max. 15 V

Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C referred to the output range) Voltage outputs Current outputs "0.5 % "0.5 %

Temperature error (with refe- "0.02 %/K rence to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 _C referred to the output range) Output ripple (bandwidth referred to the output range) " 0.05 % " 0.05 %

Voltage outputs Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current No-load voltage

Current outputs Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside

" 0.05 %

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions None None

Voltage at outputs to MANA Current

max. 15 V continuous; max. 50 mA DC

Connection of actuators For voltage output Two-conductor connection Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Possible Not possible

Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance

Voltage Current

0 to 10 V/100 k W 0 to 20 mA/50 W max. 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) 40 mA

Connection of the sensor

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor

For measuring current Two-conductor connection Possible

For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter

Possible Not possible Possible

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-191

Analog Modules

4.30.1

Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits

The analog/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits is a non-isolated module. You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits.

Important information on connecting the module

Note Note when connecting the SM 334 that:

the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the

chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this.

If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed. the supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high potential (+24 V).

Addressing
The inputs and outputs of the module are addressed as of the initial module address. The address of a channel is obtained from the module start address and an address offset.

Input Addresses
The following addresses apply to the inputs:
Channel 0 1 2 3 Initial module address Module start address + 2 bytes address offset Module start address + 4 bytes address offset Module start address + 6 bytes address offset Address

4-192

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Output Addresses
The following channel addresses apply to the module outputs:
Channel 0 1 Initial module address Module start address + 2 bytes address offset Address

4.30.2

Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits.

Selecting the Measurement Method and the Type of Output

Select the measuring method of an input channel (voltage, current) by wiring the input channel appropriately. Select the type of output of an output channel (voltage, current) by wiring the output channel appropriately.

Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum noise immunity for the analog module. Unused output channels must be left open.

Measuring ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the measuring ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution and no negative measuring ranges. Take this into account when you read measured value tables 4-10 and 4-14 on pages 4-13 and 4-15.

Output ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the output ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution the analog outputs do not have underranges. Take this into account when you read tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-193

Analog Modules

4.31

Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0

Characteristics
The SM 334 has the following characteristic features: Four inputs in two groups 2 outputs (voltage outputs) Resolution of 12 bits + sign Measuring method selectable Voltage Resistors Temperature Isolated against the backplane bus interface Isolated from load voltage

4-194

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Voltage input Resistance test

L+ 24V Current source

Internal supply

Multiplexer MANA

Backplane bus interface

M2+

IC01+ CH0 M0 + M0* M1 + CH1 M1* IC01* IC23+ CH2 M2 + M2* M3 + CH3 M3* IC23* CH0 CH1

M2* M3 + M3*
V V

MANA
DAC

MANA MANA
M

QV0 MANA QV1 MANA

Voltage outputs Figure 4-56 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-195

Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Supports clocked operation Number of inputs 40 x 125 x 117 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module No 4 4 2 max. 100 m 24 VDC Yes 24 VDC Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Measuring principle Integration/conversion time (per channel) Integrating

Parameters can be assigned Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Resolution in bits (incl.) overrange) Suppression of interference voltage for interference frequency f1 in Hertz

Yes 162/3 72 20 85

For resistance-type sensor

Number of outputs Shielded line length Rated load voltage L +

72

85

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

12 bits 60

12 bits 50

Reverse polarity protection

Supply voltage of the rated electronics voltage and rated load voltage L+ Power supply of the transmitters

Smoothing of the measured values Yes Time constant of the input filter Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) Resolution (incl. Overrange Conversion time (per channel) Settling time Yes

Programmable, in 2 stages 0.9 ms 350 ms

Short-circuit-proof

Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor For PT 100 At 10 kW Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Permitted potential difference typ. 490 mA at 105 mA Yes

Analog Value Generation for the Outputs 12 bits 500 ms max. 0.8 ms max. 0.8 ms

Isolation

For resistive load For capacitive load

No 1V 1V 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 60 mA max. 80 mA typ. 2 W

Between inputs and MANA (UCM) Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal-(UISO)

Insulation tested with Current consumption

From the backplane bus From power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)

Power dissipation of the module

4-196

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error for the Inputs Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %) (f1 = interference frequency)

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions Input range (rated values)/Input resistance None None

Common-mode interference (Upp < 1 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)

> 38 dB

Data for Selecting a Sensor

> 36 dB

Voltage Resistors Temperature

0 to 10 V 10 kW PT 100

100 k W 10 mW 10 mW

Crosstalk between the inputs

> 88 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor

max. 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) Possible Possible Possible Possible

Voltage input Resistor input Temperature input

0 to 10 V 10 k W Pt 100

"0.7 % "3.5 % "1%

For measuring voltage For measuring resistance With two-conductor connection With three-conductor connection With four-conductor connection

Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C, referred to input range) Voltage input Resistor input Temperature input 0 to 10 V 10 k W Pt 100 "0.01 %/K "0.05 % " 0.05 % "0.5 % "2.8 % "0.8 %

Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 _C, referred to the input range) Crosstalk between the outputs

Characteristic linearization

Parameters can be assigned PT 100 (climate range) Degrees Celsius

For RTD

User data in engineering format Output range (rated value)

Data for Selecting an Actuator

Suppression of interference, Limits of Error > 88 dB Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range)

Voltage For voltage outputs

0 to 10 V min. 2.5 kW max. 1.0 mF Yes max. 10 mA

Impedance (in the nominal output range)

Voltage outputs

"1.0 %

capacitive load

Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C, referred to output range) Voltage outputs "0.85 % "0.01 %/K " 0.01 % " 0.01 % Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25_C, referred to the output range) Output ripple; band width 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range)

Voltage outputs

Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current

Destruction limit for voltages/ currents connected from outside

Voltage at outputs to MANA For voltage output Two-conductor connection Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit)

max. 15 V continuous;

Connection of actuators Possible Not possible

" 0.1 %

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-197

Analog Modules

4.31.1

Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Note Below the rated load voltage range, incorrect intermediate values occur at the output when the rated load voltage supply (L+) is switched on/off.

STEP 7 V 4.0 tool for parameter assignment

The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits is contained in the module catalog in STEP 7 V 4.0 or higher.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-43, on page 4-44.

4.31.2

Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

Connecting the inputs and outputs

You can connect the inputs as voltage, resistance or temperature measurement inputs, or deactivate them. You can connect the outputs as voltage, or disable them. Perform connection of the inputs and outputs with the parameters measuring method and output method in STEP 7.

Connection options for the input channels

You can connect the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits in the following combinations:
Channel Channels 0 and 1 Channels 2 and 3 Wiring Versions

2 x temperature or 2 x resistance 2 x voltage, 2 x resistance, 2 x temperature, 1 x temperature and 1 x voltage, or 1 x resistance and 1 x voltage

4-198

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Analog Modules

Note Simultaneous connection of a temperature sensor and a resistor to channels 0 and 1 and 2 and 3 is not allowed. The reason common current source for both channels.

Unused Channels
Set the measuring method parameter for unused input channels to disabled. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. So that unused output channels of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits remain de-energized, you must set the output type parameter to disabled and leave the terminal open.

Measuring ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the measuring ranges.
Table 4-87 Measuring ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits Method Selected U: Voltage R-4L: Resistance (four-conductor connection) RTD-4L: Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) (temperature measurement) Measuring Range 0 to 10 V 10 kW Pt 100 climate Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.1

Default settings of inputs

The default settings of the module are the Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) measuring method and the Pt 100 climate measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

4-199

Analog Modules

Output ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the output ranges.
Table 4-88 Output ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 0 to 10 V Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage output range

Default settings of outputs

The default settings of the module are Voltage for the output type and 0 to 10 V for the output range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 334; AI4/AO 2 x 2 bits in STEP 7.

4-200

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5
Contents Page 5-2 5-3 5-5 5-7

In this Appendix
Section 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Module Overview Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; (6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0) Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0) Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; (6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-1

Special Signal modules

5.1

Module Overview

Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important features of the signal modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task.
Table 5-1 Special signal modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module Characteristics Number of inputs/outputs Simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 Dummy module DM 370 Position decoder module SM 338; POS-INPUT

max. 16 inputs or
outputs

1 slot reserved for 1 non-parameterized module

3 inputs for connection

of absolute value encoders (SSI)

2 digital inputs for

Suitable for... Simulation of: Placeholder for:

freezing the encoder values

16 inputs or 16 outputs or 8 in and outputs

Interface Modules Non-parameterized

signal modules

Position decoding with up to 3 absolute value encoders (SSI)

Encoder types: Absolute value encoder (SSI) Modules which occupy with 13-bit, 21-bit or 25-bit 2 slots message lengths Data format: Gray code or binary code

Supports clocked operation Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Special Features

No No No Function adjustable with screwdriver

No No No When replacing the DM 370 with another module, the mechanical assembly and address assignment/address location of the entire assembly remain unchanged

Yes No Adjustable Absolute value encoders with a monoflop time greater than 64 ms cannot be used on the SM 338

5-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5.2

Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; (6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0

Characteristics
The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is distinguished by the following features: Simulation of: 16 inputs or 16 outputs or 8 inputs and 8 outputs (each with the same start addresses!) Status displays for simulation of inputs and outputs Function adjustable with screwdriver

Note Do not activate the switch for setting the function in RUN!

Configuration with STEP 7

The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is not included in the module catalog of STEP 7 i.e., the order number of the SM 374 is not recognized by STEP 7. You must therefore simulate the function of the simulator module required for the configuration as follows: If you want to use SM 374 with 16 inputs, enter the order number of a digital input module with 16 inputs in STEP 7; e.g.: 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0 If you want to use SM 374 with 16 outputs, enter the order number of a digital output module with 16 outputs in STEP 7; e.g.: 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0 If you want to use SM 374 with 8 inputs and 8 outputs, enter the order number of a digital input/output module with 8 inputs and 8 outputs in STEP 7; e.g.: 6ES7323-1BH02-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-3

Special Signal modules

Module view (without front door)

Switch for input status

Switch for setting the function

Channel number Status display green

Figure 5-1

Module view of the simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16

Technical specifications of the SM 374; IN/OUT 16

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Data for Specific Module Optional simulation of 16 inputs 16 outputs 8 in and outputs 40 125 110 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Current consumption from the backplane bus Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions yes, green LED per channel No No max. 80 mA type. 0.35 W

Approx. 190 g

5-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5.3

Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The dummy module DM 370 reserves a slot for a non-parameterized module. They can be used as placeholders for: Interface modules (without reservation of address space) Non-parameterized signal modules (with reservation of address space) Modules which occupy 2 slots (with reservation of address space) When replacing the dummy module with another module from S7-300, the mechanical assembly and the address assignment/address allocation of the entire assembly remain unchanged.

Configuration with STEP 7

You must only configure the dummy module DM 370 with STEP 7 if the module of the slot is to be reserved for a parameterized signal module. If the module is reserving the slot for an interface module, the configuration cannot be carried out with STEP 7.

Modules which occupy 2 slots

For modules which occupy 2 slots, you must plug in 2 dummy modules. Only the dummy module in slot x reserves the address space (not the dummy module in slot x + 1; for details of the procedure, see table 5-2). A maximum of 8 modules may be plugged into a module carrier (SM/FM/CP). If you, for example, reserve a slot for an 80 mm wide module with 2 dummy modules, you may still plug in 7 other modules (SM/FM/CP) because the dummy module only occupies the address space for 1 module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-5

Special Signal modules

Module view

NA A Switch for address assignment

Front View Figure 5-2

Rear view

Module view of the dummy module DM 370

Switch settings for address assignment

The following table shows how to set the switch on the rear side of the module according to the module type.
Table 5-2 Meaning of the switch settings of the dummy module DM 370 Meaning The dummy module reserves one slot. NA A The module is not configured and does not occupy any address space. The dummy module reserves one slot. NA A The module must be configured and occupies 1 byte input address space (with system default outside the process image). Use

Switch setting

Without active backplane bus:

In configurations for which a purely physical single slot should be reserved, with electrical connection to the S7 300 bus.

With active backplane bus: No

In configurations for which a slot with an address should be reserved.

5-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

Technical specifications of the DM 370

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 40 x 125 x 120 Approx. 180 g Voltages, Currents, Potentials Current consumption from the backplane bus Power loss ca. 5 mA typ. 0.03 W

5.4

Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; (6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0

Characteristics
The position decoder module SM 338; POS-INPUT is distinguished by the following features: 3 inputs for the connection of maximum three absolute value encoders (SSI) and 2 digital inputs to freeze the encoder values Direct reaction possible to encoder values in moving systems Processing of acquired encoder values of the SM 338 in user program Supports clocked operation Type of encoder value acquisition (see chapter 5.4.4) can be selected: Free running Clocked 24 VDC rated input voltage Non-isolated against the CPU

Supported encoder types

The following encoder types are supported by the SM 338; POS-INPUT: Absolute value encoder (SSI) with 13-bit message length Absolute value encoder (SSI) with 21-bit message length Absolute value encoder (SSI) with 25-bit message length

Supported data formats

The SM 338; POS-INPUT supports the gray code and binary code data formats.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-7

Special Signal modules

5.4.1

Synchronous Operation

Note The basics of synchronous operation are described in a separate manual.

Hardware requirements
For the synchronous operation of the SM 338, you require: CPU which supports clocked operation DP master which supports the equidistant bus cycle Slave interface (IM 153-x) which supports synchronous operation

Characteristics
Depending on the system parameterization, the SM 338 works in either non-synchronous or synchronous mode. In synchronous operation, the data exchange between DP master and SM 338 is synchronous to the PROFIBUS DP cycle. In synchronous operation all 16 bytes of the checkback interface are consistent. If synchronicity is lost due to faults or failure or delay of Global Control (GC), the SM 338 goes back into synchronous operation in the next cycle without error response. If synchronicity is lost, the checkback interface is not updated.

5-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5.4.2

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram

Connection to the ground of the CPU
Short-circuit protection

Fault indicator red

SF
S7300 Backplane bus Voltage monitoring

1 2 3 4
RS 422

L+ M

24V OD (Data) OD (Data) OC (Clock) OC (Clock) 1D (Data) 1D (Data) 1C (Clock) 1C (Clock) 2D (Data) 2D (Data) 2C (Clock) 2C (Clock) DI 0 (DigitalDI 1 input) DC24V (encoder) DC24V (encoder) M (encoder) M (encoder)

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SSI

Logic

SSI

SSI

DI 0 DI 1

16 17 18 19 20

Twisted pair cables Figure 5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Wiring rules
Please observe the following important rules of the wiring of the module: The ground of the encoder supply is connected non-isolated to the ground of the CPU. Thus, connect pin 2 of the SM 338 (M) with low impedance with the ground of the CPU. The encoder lines (pins 3 to 14) must be twisted pairs and shielded. Apply the shield to both sides. For the shield connection to the SM 338, use the shield connection element (order number 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0). If the output current (900 mA) of the encoder supply is exceeded, then you must connect an external power supply.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-9

Special Signal modules

5.4.3

Functions of the SM 338; POS INPUT

5.4.4

Encoder value acquisition

The absolute value encoder transfers its encoder values in messages to the SM 338. The transfer of the message is initiated by the SM 338. In non-synchronous operation, the encoder values are acquired while it is free running. In synchronous operation the encoder values are acquired synchronized to the PROFIBUS DP cycle at each Ti.

Free running encoder value acquisition

The SM 338 always initiates the transfer of a message after the end of the parameterized monoflop time. Asynchronous to these free running messages, the SM 338 processes the acquired encoder values during the cycle of its updating rate (see Technical Data). Thus, in the case of free running encoder value acquisition, encoder values of different ages result. The difference between the maximum and minimum age is the jitter (see Technical Data).

Synchronous encoder values acquisition

Synchronous encoder values acquisition is automatically set if, in the DP master system, the equidistant bus cycle is activated and the DP Slave is synchronized to the DP cycle. The SM 338 initiates the transfer of a message in each PROFIBUS DP cycle at the time Ti. Synchronous to the PROFIBUS DP cycle, the SM 338 processes the transferred encoder values.

5-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5.4.5

Gray/Dual Converter
In the Gray setting, the encoder values provided by the absolute value encoder in gray code is converted into Dual code. In the Dual setting, encoder values provided by the absolute value encoder remain unchanged.

Note If you have selected the Gray setting, the SM 338 always converts the entire encoder value (13, 21, 25 bits). As a result, preceding special bits affect the encoder values and following bits could be falsified under certain circumstances.

5.4.6

Transferred Encoder Value and Normalization

The transferred encoder value contains the encoder position of the absolute value encoder. Depending on the encoder used, additional bits which are located before and after the encoder position are also transferred in addition to the encoder position. So that the SM 338 can detect the encoder position, make the following settings: Normalization, places (0..12), or Normalization, units / revolution

Normalization, places
The normalization determines the position of the encoder values in the checkback interface. If Places = 1, 2....12, this indicates that the following non relevant bits in the encoder values are removed and the encoder value is right justified in the address range (see following example). If Places = 0, this indicates that the following bits are retained and available for evaluation. This can be useful if you use an absolute value encoder which transfers information in the following bits (see manufacturer information) and you want to evaluate these (see also chapter 5.4.5).

Parameter units / revolution

A maximum of 13 bits are available for the units/revolution. According to the Places data, the resulting number of units/revolution is automatically displayed.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-11

Special Signal modules

Example of normalization of an encoder value

You are using a single-turn encoder with 29 units= 512 units/ revolution (resolution/360). In STEP 7 you have set the following parameters: Absolute encoder: 13 bits Normalization: 4 places Units / revolution: 512

Before the normalization: cyclically acquired encoder values 100

Double data word 31 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X 0

Relevant bits Transferred bits

After the normalization: encoder values 100

0 31 Double data word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 Relevant bits

Result: Bits 0 to 3 (4 places, marked with x) are omitted.

5.4.7

Freeze Function
The freeze function freezes the current encoder values of the SM 338. The freeze function is coupled to the digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 of the SM 338. The freeze is triggered by an edge change (rising edge) on DI 0 or DI 1. A frozen encoder value is identified by the bit 31 (output address) being set. With a digital input you can freeze one, two or three encoder values. You must switch on the freeze function, i.e. set the corresponding parameters in STEP 7 . The encoder values are retained until the freeze function is ended and can thus be evaluated dependent on the event.

5-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

Ending the freeze function

The freeze function must be ended at every encoder input. You acknowledge the function in the user program by setting the bit 0, 1 or 2 depending on the channel with the STEP 7-Operation T PAB xyz (for a program example, see chapter 5.4.9). After exiting, bit 31 of the corresponding encoder value is again deleted and the encoder values are again updated. A renewed freezing of the encoder values is again possible as soon as you have deleted the acknowledgment bit in the output address of the module. In synchronous operation the acknowledgment is processed at time To. From this point in time a renewed freezing of the encoder values can take place via the digital inputs.

Note The freeze function is automatically acknowledged if you newly parameterize the corresponding channel with different parameters (see 5.4.8 chapter). If the parameters remain identical, the freeze function remains unaffected.

5.4.8

SM 338; POS-INPUT Parameterization

You parameterize the SM 338; POS-INPUT with STEP 7. You must perform parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU. As soon as you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the SM 338. The parameters cannot be changed by the user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-13

Special Signal modules

Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 338 in the table below. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7 (default setting bold).
Table 5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT values Range Yes/no none; 13 bits; 21 bits; 25 bits Gray; Binary 125 kHz; 250 kHz; 500 kHz; 1 MHz Note Release parameter. Affects all 3 channels. none: The encoder input is switched off. Code provided by encoder. Data transfer rate of the SSI position decoder. Observe the relationship between the cable length and baud rate (see Technical Data) The monoflop time is the minimum time interval between 2 SSI message frames. The parameterized monoflop time must always be greater than the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder. Normalization

Parameter Enable

Diagnosis interrupt
Absolute value encoder (SSI) 1) Code type 1) Baud rate 1) ,3)

Monoflop time 1),2),3)

16 ms; 32 ms; 48 ms; 64 ms

Places Units / revolution 4)

Switching on freeze

0 to 12 2 to 8192 off; 0; 1

Normalizing right justifies the encoder values of the encoder absolute; non-relevant places are discarded. Designation of the digital input whose rising edge causes a freezing of the encoder value.

1) 2)

See technical data of the absolute value encoder The monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames. The parameterized monoflop time must be greater than the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder (see technical data of the manufacturer). The time 2 (1 / baud rate) is added to the value parameterized in HW config. At a baud rate of 125 kHz with a parameterized monoflop time of 16 ms, an effective monoflop time of 32 ms is actually achieved. 3) The following restriction applies to the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder: (1 / baud rate) < Monoflop time of the absolute value encoder < 64 ms + 2 (1 / baud rate) 4) to the power of two

Note Please note that in non synchronous operation the baud rate and the monoflop time affect the accuracy and actuality of the encoder values. In synchronous operation the baud rate and the monoflop time affect the accuracy of the freeze function.

5-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5.4.9

SM 338; POS-INPUT Addressing

Data range for the encoder values

The inputs and outputs of the SM 338 are addressed as of the initial module address. The input and output address is determined at the configuration of the SM 338 in STEP 7.

Input Addresses
Table 5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses Input address (from the configuration) + address offset Initial module address Module start address + 4 bytes address offset Module start address + 8 bytes address offset

Encoder input 0 1 2

Structure of the double data word

For each encoder input the double data word is made up as follows:
31 0

Freeze

Encoder value in gray or binary code

0 = encoder value is not frozen. The value is constantly updated. 1 = encoder value is frozen. The value remains constant until acknowledgment.

Output Address
7 0

Initial module address Acknowledging the freeze function: Bit 0 = encoder input 0 Bit 1 = encoder input 1 Bit 2 = encoder input 2

Reading out data areas

You can read out the data areas in your user program with the STEP 7-Operation L PED xyz.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-15

Special Signal modules

Example of access to encoder values and use of the freeze function

You want to read out and evaluate the value of the encoder at the encoder inputs. The module start address is 256.

AWL L T U = L T U = L T U = L T PED MD M M PED MD M M PED MD M M MB PAB 256 100 100.7 99.0 260 104 104.7 99.1 264 108 108.7 99.2 99 256 // // // // // // // // // // // // // //

Explanation Read encoder value in the address range for encoder input 0 Store encoder value in marker double word Acquire and store freeze status for later acknowledgment Read encoder value in the address range for encoder input 1 Store encoder value in marker double word Acquire and store freeze status for later acknowledgment Read encoder value in the address range for encoder input 2 Store encoder value in marker double word Acquire and store freeze status for later acknowledgment Load and acknowledge freeze condition (SM 338: output address 256)

Afterwards you can further process the encoder values from the marker range MD 100, MD 104 and MD 108. The encoder value is contained in bits 0 to 30 of the marker double word.

5-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5.4.10

Diagnosis of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

The SM 338 makes diagnostic messages available, i.e., all diagnostic messages are always provided by the SM 338 without your assistance.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the module and forwarded to the CPU. The SF LED on the module lights. If you have programmed Enable Diagnostic Interrupt in STEP 7 , a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message via SF LED

The SM 338 indicate errors for you by means of their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the SM 338. It goes out when all errors have been rectified. The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of encoder supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on). The SF LED lights up temporarily at startup during the self test of the SM 338.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-17

Special Signal modules

Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 338.
Table 5-5 Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT Diagnostics Message Module problem Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present External auxiliary supply missing Module not parameterized. Wrong parameters Channel information available Time monitoring triggered Channel error present Configuring/parameter assignment error External channel error (encoder fault) LED SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF Scope of the Diagnostics Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Channel (encoder input) Channel (encoder input) Channel (encoder input)

5-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

Causes of errors and remedial measures

Table 5-6 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Possible Error Cause An error detected by the module has occurred. Module has detected an error within the automation system. Module has detected an error outside of the automation system. Indicates that only specific channels are faulty. The power supply L+ to the module is missing Feed supply L+ Remedy

Diagnostics Message Module fault Internal error External error Channel error present External auxiliary supply missing Module not parameterized

Module requires information whether it Message present after network active should work with parameters preset by until transfer of the parameters by the the system or with your parameters. CPU complete; parameterize module if necessary. One parameter or the combination of parameters is not plausible Channel error present; module can provide additional channel information. Temporary high electromagnetic interference An error detected by the module has occurred at the encoder input. Illegal parameter had been transferred to module Reassign module parameter Eliminate interference Reassign module parameter

Wrong parameters Channel information present Watchdog tripped Channel error present Configuration / parameterization error External channel error (encoder error)

Broken wire in encoder cable, encoder Check connected encoder cable not connected or encoder defective.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-19

Special Signal modules

5.4.11

Interrupts of the SM 338; POS INPUT

Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the SM 338; POS-INPUT is described. The SM 338 can trigger diagnostic interrupts. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.4.8).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then incoming active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

5-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Special Signal modules

5.4.12

Technical Specifications of the 338; POS-INPUT

Maximum repeat frequency 1 kHz Connection of a twowire Possible BEROS, type 2 Shielded line length 600 m Unshielded line length 32 m Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions B x H x T 40 x 125 x 120 (mm) Weight Approx. 235 g Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC

Range

20.4 ... 28.8 V No no, only against shield 1 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Isolation Permitted potential difference

Diagnostic interrupt

Status display of digital inputs

Parameters can be assigned LED (green)

between input (M connection) and central grounding point of the CPU Output voltage Output current L+ 0.8 V max. 900 mA, short circuitproof max. 160 mA

Group error/fault LED (red) Inaccuracy of the encoder value Free running encoder value acquisition maximum age 1) (2 Message duration)

Encoder supply

minimum age 1) Jitter

Current dissipation max. 10 mA From the load voltage L+ (no load) Power dissipation of the typ. 3 W module Encoder inputs POS INPUT 0 to 2 Position decoding absolute Difference signals for SSI according to RS422 data and SSI clock Data transfer rate and cable 125 kHz max. 320 m length of absolute value 250 kHz max. 160 m encoders (twisted pair and 500 kHz max. 60 m shielded) 1 MHz max. 20 m Message duration of the SSI transmission 13 bits 112 ms 56 ms 28 ms 14 ms 21 bits 25 bits From the backplane bus

+ monoflop time + 580 ms Message duration + 130 ms Message duration + monoflop time + 450 ms

Update rate

Evaluation of the message every 450 ms

Synchronous encoder value acquisition Age Encoder value at time Ti of the current PROFIBUS DP cycle
Inaccuracy of the frozen encoder value (freeze) Free running encoder value acquisition maximum age 1) (2 Message duration)

125 kHz 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz

176 ms 208 ms 88 ms 44 ms 22 ms 104 ms 52 ms 26 ms

Monoflop time2 Isolation Input voltage Input current

16 ms, 32 ms, 48 ms, 64 ms Digital inputs DI 0, DI 1 no, only against shield 0-Signal: 3 V ... 5 V 1-Signal: 11 V ... 30.2 V 0-Signal: v2 mA (quiescent current) 1-Signal: 9 mA (typ.) 0 > 1: max. 300 ms 1 > 0: max. 300 ms

+ monoflop time + 580 ms minimum age 1) Message duration + 130 ms Jitter Message duration + monoflop time + 450 ms Synchronous encoder value acquisition Jitter Max (message durationn + param. Monoflop time n) n = 0, 1, 2, (Channel)
1)

Age of the encoder values determined by the transfer process and the processing 2) The following restriction applies to the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder: (1 / baud rate) < Monoflop time of the absolute value encoder < 64 ms + 2 x (1 / baud rate)

Input delay

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5-21

Special Signal modules

5-22

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Interface Modules

Interface modules
In this chapter you will find the technical specifications and characteristic features of the interface modules for the S7-300.

Contents
The following interface modules are described in this chapter:
Section 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Module Overview Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0) Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361 3CA01-0AA0) Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0) Contents Page 6-2 6-3 6-5 6-7

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

6-1

Interface Modules

6.1

Module Overview

Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the interface modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task.
Table 6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module Characteristics Suitable for plugging into S7-300 mounting racks Data transmission Interface Module IM 360 Interface Module IM 361 Interface Module IM 365

1 to 3

0 and 1

From IM 360 to IM 361 From the IM 360 to the From IM 365 to IM 365
over the connecting cable 386 IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361 via connecting cable 386 via connecting cable 386

Distance between... Special Features

Max. 10 m
---

Max. 10 m
---

1 m, permanently
connected pair

Preassembled module Install only signal

modules in rack 1 the communication bus to subrack 1

IM 365 does not route

6-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Interface Modules

6.2

Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 360 has the following characteristic features: Interface for rack 0 of the S7-300 Data transfer from IM 360 to IM 361 over the connecting cable 368 Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.)

Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 360 has the following status and fault LEDs.
LED SF Meaning Group error/fault Explanation The LED lights up if

the connecting cable is missing. IM 361 is switched off.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

6-3

Interface Modules

Front View
Figure 6-1 shows the front view of the interface module IM 360.
X1 OUT SF

Front View Figure 6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 360.
Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight

Data for Specific Module

40 x 125 x 120 Approx. 250 g

Length of cable

Maximum length to next IM From the backplane bus

10 m

Current consumption 350 mA typ. 2 W Yes

Power loss Status and fault LEDs

6-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Interface Modules

6.3

Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 361 has the following characteristic features: 24 VDC power supply Interface for racks 1 to 3 of the S7-300 Current output via the S7-300 backplane bus max. 0.8 A Data transfer from the IM 360 to the IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361 via connecting cable 368 Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.) Maximum distance between IM 361 and IM 361 is 10 m

Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 361 has the following status and fault LEDs.
LED SF Meaning Group error/fault Explanation The LED lights up if

the connecting cable is

missing

the series-connected the CPU is in the

5 VDC 5 VDC supply for the S7-300 backplane bus POWER OFF state

IM 361 is switched off

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

6-5

Interface Modules

Front View
Figure 6-2 shows the front view of the interface module IM 361.

X1 OUT SF 5 VDC

M L+ M X2 IN

Figure 6-2

Front View of the Interface Module IM 361

6-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Interface Modules

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 361.
Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight

Data for Specific Module

80 x 125 x 120 505 g

Length of cable
Maximum length to next IM

10 m 0.5 A typ. 5 W 0.8 A Yes

Current consumption
From 24 VDC

Power loss Current output

To backplane bus

Status and fault LEDs

6.4

Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0)

Order number: Standard module

6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300-Module

6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 365 has the following characteristic features: Pre-assembled pair of modules for rack 0 and rack 1 Total power supply of 1.2 A, of which up to 0.8 A can be used per rack. Connecting cable with a length of 1 m already permanently connected Install only signal modules in rack 1 IM 365 does not forward the C bus to rack 1, i.e. you cannot plug FMs with a C bus function in rack 1.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

6-7

Interface Modules

Front View
Figure 6-3 shows the front view of the interface module IM 365.

IM 365 RECEIVE

IM 365 SEND

In rack 1

In rack 0

Figure 6-3

Front View of the Interface Module IM 365

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 365.
Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D per rack (in millimeters) Total weight 40 x 125 x 120 580 g Data for Specific Module Length of cable Maximum length to next IM Current consumption From the backplane bus Power loss Current output Per rack Status and fault LEDs 100 mA typ. 0.5 W max. 1.2 A 0.8 A No 1m

6-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

RS 485 Repeater

In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find a detailed description of the RS 485-Repeater. Included in the description are: The purpose of the RS 485 repeater The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals Information about grounded and non-grounded operation Technical specifications and the block diagram

Further information
You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the manuals Hardware and Installation in the Chapter Configuring of an MPI or PROFIBUS-DP network.

Diagnostic repeater
Compared to the RS 485 repeater, the diagnostic repeater has new characteristics: Diagnostic function and modeling as the DP slave. For additional information, refer to the Diagnostic Repeater for PROFIBUS-DP manual, order no. 6ES7972-0AB00-8xA0.

In this chapter
Section 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Contents Application and Characteristics; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) Appearance of the RS-485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation Technical Specification Page 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

7-1

RS 485 Repeater

7.1

Application and Characteristics; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

Order number
6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0

What is an RS 485 repeater?

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus segments.

Application of the RS 485 repeater

You need an RS 485 repeater if: More than 32 nodes are connected to the bus Bus segments are to be operated non-grounded on the bus, or The maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. (See table 7-1).
Table 7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment Max. Cable Length of a Segment (in m) 1000 400 200 100

Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5 kbd 500 kbaud 1.5 Mbaud 3 to 12 Mbaud

Rules
If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters: Up to 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series. The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Maximum Length of Cable between 2 Nodes (in m) with RS 485 Repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) 10000 4000 2000 1000

Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 500 kbaud 1.5 Mbaud 3 to 12 Mbaud

7-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

RS 485 Repeater

7.2

Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

The table below shows the appearance of the RS 485 repeater and lists its functions.

Table 7-3

Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater No. Function Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin M5.2 is the ground reference, if you want to measure the voltage difference between terminals A2 and B2). Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1 Terminating resistance for bus segment 1 Switch for OFF operating mode (= isolate bus segments from each other for example, for startup
10

Repeater Design

10

24 VDC

L+ M PE M 5.2

A1 B1 A1 B1

ON

11 12

PG OP

DP1 OFF DP2

Terminating resistance for bus segment 2 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2 Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the standard rail Interface for programming device/OP in bus segment 1 LED 24 V supply voltage LED for bus segment 1 LED for bus segment 2

ON SIEMENS RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2

11 12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

7-3

RS 485 Repeater

7.3

RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation

Grounded or ungrounded
The RS 485 repeater is ... Grounded, if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded potential Ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded potential Note The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device to the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. Ground connection is effected since the MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG/OP socket is connected internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater.

Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals M and PE on the top of the RS 485 repeater.

Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, M and PE on the top of the RS 485 repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage of the RS 485 repeater must be ungrounded.

Terminal connection diagram

In the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential (ungrounded operation), any interference currents and static charges are discharged by means of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to Figure 7-1) to the protective conductor.

PE
24 VDC L+ M PE M 5.2

22 nF M

10 M

A1 B1 A1 B1

Ground bus

Figure 7-1

RC Network with 10 M for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential

7-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

RS 485 Repeater

Isolation between bus segments

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. The PG/OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1. Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater.
24 VDC

L+ M PE M 5.2

Terminals for bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1

ON

PG/OP interface

PG OP

DP1 OFF DP2

Isolation

ON SIEMENS RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2

Terminals for bus segment 2

Figure 7-2

Isolation between the Bus Segments

Amplification of the bus signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the PG/OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

7-5

RS 485 Repeater

7.4

Technical Specifications

Technical specifications of the RS 485 repeater

Technical Specification Power supply

Rated voltage Ripple Without node at PG/OP socket Node at PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) Node at PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA)

24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC 100 mA 130 mA 200 mA Yes, 500 VAC Yes, via repeater adapters No 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, 45.45 kbaud, 93.75 kbaud, 187.5 kbaud, 500 kbaud. 1.5 Mbaud. 3 Mbaud, 6 Mbaud, 12 Mbaud IP 20 45 x 128 x 67 350 g

Current consumption at rated voltage

Isolation Connection of fiber optic cables Redundancy operation Transmission rate (automatically detected by the repeater)

Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D Weight (incl. packaging)

Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket)

View Pin No. 1 2 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal Name M24V RxD/TxD-P RTS M5V2 P5V2 P24V RxD/TxD-N Ground 24 V Data line B Request To Send Data reference potential (from station) Supply plus (from station) 24 V Data line A Designation

7-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

RS 485 Repeater

Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are galvanically isolated from each other. Signals are amplified between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2
Segment 1 A1 B1 A1 B1 Segment 2 A2 B2 A2 B2

Logic

PG/OPsocket L+ (24 V) M A1 B1 5V M5 V

5V 24V

1M 5V 24V

1M

L+ (24 V) M PE M 5.2

Figure 7-3

Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

7-7

RS 485 Repeater

7-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8
Page 8-2 8-4 8-12 8-20

In this chapter
Section 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 Module Overview Wiring Components Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules Contents

Structure of the chapter

Sections 8.1 and 8.2 apply to SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA. Section 8.3 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect and thus supplements the preceding sections. Section 8.4 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect TPA and thus supplements Sections 8.1 and 8.2.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-1

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.1

Module Overview

Introduction
SIMATIC TOP connect denotes components for wiring digital modules. SIMATIC TOP connect TPA denotes components for wiring analog modules.

Wiring
Wiring with SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA is a fast and cost-effective alternative to conventional wiring of the actuators and sensors directly at the front connector of the module. When using these components, you wire actuators and sensors in situ on one more terminal blocks. You establish the connection to the module by means of a connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable).

Configuration of SIMATIC TOP connect with a S7-300

A SIMATIC TOP connect and a SIMATIC TOP connect TPA always consist of: A front connector module with flat ribbon connection , One or more terminal blocks and One or more connecting cables with plug-and-socket connectors at ends

Figure 8-1

SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300

8-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Advantages
Use of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA features the following advantages: Fast, low-cost wiring (the use of central terminal blocks is no longer necessary) Simple mounting of the components (front connector module, connecting cable, terminal block) Each component can be replaced separately Connecting cable configurable without waste Wiring errors are drastically reduced Neat and tidy cabinet wiring The supply voltage for the module can be connected to components of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA Simplification of the terminals for M- and L+ connection

Range of modules
The table below lists all the modules which you can wire with SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA. You will find a detailed list of the components of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA with their order numbers in Table 8-5 on page 8-12 and Table 8-13 on page 8-20.
Table 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: Connectable Modules Front view of terminal block Wiring possible with module... SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V SIMATIC TOP connect SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/2 A SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 x 12 bits SIMATIC TOP connect TPA
A B C D E F G H I K

Component

SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 x 12 bits SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits
Z

Y YK K A A A A Z Z

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits SM 335; AI 4/AO 4 x 14 bits;

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-3

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.2

Wiring Components

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner or later.

Sequence of steps for wiring

Table 8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA

Step 1. 2. 3. 4.

Procedure Cut connecting cable to length and terminate Wire the front connector module Connect the connecting cable to the terminal block Wire actuators/sensors to the terminal block

Refer to Section... 8.2.1 8.2.2 and 8.3 or 8.4 8.2.3 and 8.3 or 8.4 8.2.4

8.2.1

Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate

Maximum length of cable

The length of the connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable) between the SIMATIC S7 and the terminal blocks must not be more than 30 m.

Using the connectors

You must attach connectors to either end of the round-sheath ribbon cable, for connection to the front connector module and the terminal block.

Connect the round-sheath ribbon cable to connector

1. Cut the round-sheath ribbon cable to the length required and remove part of the cable sheath at both ends. You will find the length of the cable sheath that has to be removed in the following table:

8-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Cable sheath to be removed Cable end to ... 20-pin 40-pin front front connec- connector tor 110 mm 70 mm 115 mm 75 mm

external internal ribbon ribbon cable cable 20-pin front connector

external internal ribbon ribbon cable cable 40-pin front connector

... top connector of front connector module ... bottom connector of front connector module ... top connector of front connector module ... bottom connector of front connector module ... socket of terminal block

1 x 16 core shielded/uns hielded

95 mm 2 x 16 core unshielded 95 mm 115 mm 40 mm 40 mm

115 mm 75 mm

100 mm

2. Thread the cable into the 16-pin connector. It is important that you note the position of the details marked in the following figure.

Triangle Nose

Marked Core

Figure 8-2

Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector

3. Clamp the end of the cable into the connector with the crimping tool. 4. Attach the strain relief device to the connector of the terminal block as follows: Fold back the cable over the connector Push the enclosed strain relief device over the cable Snap the strain relief device into place on the connector

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-5

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.2.2

Wiring the Front Connector Module

Introduction
This chapter describes the principle of wiring the front connector modules. Note also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find, among other things, selection criteria for the front connector modules and specific connection examples.

Using the front connector module

You require the front connector module to connect the connecting cable to the module. In addition, you can connect the supply voltage of the module to the front connector module.

8-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage

The following table shows you what you have to consider when connecting the module supply voltage to the terminal block or front connector module. The terminals for the supply voltage are screws or spring-loaded terminals (refer to Section 8.2.4 for handling spring-loaded terminals).
Table 8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage Terminal block Spring-loaded connection Conductor cross-sections suitable for connection: Solid conductors Stranded conductors No 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 No 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 No 0.25 to 0.75 mm2 0.25 to 0.75 mm2 Screw-type connection Front connector Up to 4 Up to 8 Terminals Terminals

Rules for ...

Without end ferrules With end ferrules

No of conductors per terminal Max. diameter of conductor insulation Length of conductor insulation to be stripped

1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm2 (sum) in a common end ferrule 3.1 mm 3.1 mm 2.0 mm

Without insulation
collar

11 mm 11 mm

6 mm

With insulation collar

End ferrules to DIN 46228

Without insulation
collar

Model A; up to 12 mm long Model E; up to 12 mm long Model E; 12 mm long

Model A; up to 12 mm long Model E; up to 12 mm long Model E; 18 mm long

Model A; 5 to 7 mm long

With insulation collar

0.25 to 1.0 mm2 1.5 mm2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-7

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connect the connecting cable and the supply voltage to the front connector module
1. Open the front door of the module. 2. Bring the front connector into the wiring position. 3. If necessary, connect the cables for the incoming supply of the module supply voltage. 4. Insert the connecting cable into the front connector module as shown in the following figure:

Figure 8-3

Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module

5. Twist every connecting cable 90_ downwards and turn through one whole turn to the extent possible.

Additional steps for wiring for 32-channel digital modules

Note When using 32-channel digital modules, you must observe the assignment of the supply connections to the connecting cable terminals and the assignment of the connecting cable terminals to the address bytes of the module (refer to Figure 8-4 and Table 8-4).

6. Thread a strain relief assembly into the middle of the front connector. This strain relief assembly is used to fix the connecting cables in the narrow cable stowage area of the module. 7. Thread the strain relief assembly into the front connector.

8-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules

The following figure shows the front view of the front connector module for 32-channel digital modules.
+ _ + _ Supply terminals for

Opening for the cable to be connected

Opening for the screwdriver Supply terminals for

Supply terminals for + _ Legend: Openings for strain relief to : Terminals for connecting cable; refer to Table 8-4 for the address assignment Figure 8-4 + _

Supply terminals for

Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules

Assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital modules

Table 8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of 32-Channel Digital Modules Address Assignment for Digital Input Module IB x IB (x+1) IB (x+2) IB (x+3) Digital Output Module QB x QB (x+1) QB (x+2) QB (x+3) Digital Input/Output Module IB x IB (x+1) QB x QB (x+1)

Refer to Figure 8-4: Connecting Cable Terminal

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-9

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.2.3

Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block

Introduction
A description of how to mount the terminal blocks is presented in the following. Note also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find, among other things, selection criteria for the different terminal blocks and specific connection examples.

Mounting the terminal block and connecting cable

1. Attach the terminal block to a 35 mm standard rail in accordance with EN 50 022. 2. Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block as shown in the following figure:

Figure 8-5

Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block

8.2.4

Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block

Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals

To mount the signal leads of the actuators/sensors to the terminal block and the supply lines to the terminal block and front connector module, you can choose between screw-type and spring-loaded components. The principle of spring-loaded components is dealt with in greater detail in the following, since it allows fast and simple connection of the signal lines and supply cables.

8-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Spring-loaded terminal block

Opening for the cable to be connected Opening for the screwdriver for pressing the spring-loaded contact

Figure 8-6

Spring-loaded terminal block

Caution The spring-loaded contact will be damaged, if you insert the screwdriver into the opening for the cable. Make sure that you insert the screwdriver only into the rectangular opening of the terminal block.

Attaching the cable to the spring-loaded contact

Attach the cables to the spring-loaded contacts as follows: 1. Use a screwdriver to press down the spring-loaded terminal in the rectangular opening and to hold it down. 2. Insert the cable into the round opening of the corresponding spring-loaded terminal as far as it will go. 3. Remove the screwdriver from the spring-loaded terminal. The cable is held by the spring-loaded contact.

Figure 8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-11

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3

Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules

Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect, you must first select the components as a function of the module and method of connection (screw type or spring-loaded terminal, one-conductor, three-conductor or 2A connection; relay).

8.3.1

SIMATIC TOP Connect Components and Selection Aid

Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect.
Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Terminal block ... for one-conductor connection ... for one-conductor connection (10 items) ... for three-conductor connection ... for three-conductor connection (10 items) ... for 2A modules ... for 2A modules (10 items) ... for relays Front connector for 32-channel modules (refer to Figure 8-4) for 16-channel modules Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Voltage supply via: Spring-loaded terminals Voltage supply via: spring-loaded screw-type Voltage supply via: spring-loaded screw-type Order number 6ES7924-0AA00-0AB0 6ES7924-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7924-0AA00-1AB0 6ES7924-0AA00-1AA0 6ES7924-0CA00-0AB0 6ES7924-0CA00-0AA0 6ES7924-0CA00-1AB0 6ES7924-0CA00-1AA0 6ES7924-0BB00-0AB0 6ES7924-0BB00-0AA0 6ES7924-0BB00-1AB0 6ES7924-0BB00-1AA0 6ES7924-0CD00-0AB0 6ES7924-0CD00-0AA0 6ES7921 3AA20-0AA0 6ES7921-3AA00-0AA0 6ES7921-3AB00-0AA0 6ES7921-3AC00-0AA0 6ES7921-3AD00-0AA0 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0 6ES7923-0CD00-0AA0 6ES7923-0CG00-0AA0 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0

for 16-channel 2A modules

Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement connectors) Round-sheath Unshielded ribbon cable 1 x 16 Shielded 30 m 60 m 30 m 60 m

8-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Table 8-5

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect, continued Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number 6ES7923-2CD00-0AA0 6ES7923-2CG00-0AA0 6ES7928-0AA00-0AA0

Round-sheath Unshielded ribbon cable 2 x 16 Crimping tool for 16-pin connector

30 m 60 m

Selection aid
In the following table you will find the components of SIMATIC TOP connect with which you can wire the digital modules.
Table 8-6 Selection Table for SIMATIC TOP connect Components Terminal block for... One-conThree-conductor ductor connection connection SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 V SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 V SM 322; DO 8 x 24VDC/0.5 V; with diagnostic interrupt SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24VDC/ 0.5 A SM323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2A module s Relays Front connector module for... SM; 16 or 32 channels 5 5 5 5 5 5 2A modules

Digital Modules

5 5

5 5

5 5

5 5

One-conductor or three-conductor connection

With the three-conductor connection, you can optionally apply the supply voltage for the module to the front connector module or to the terminal block. With the one-conductor connection, this can only be done to the front connector module.

2A module connection
You require the following information on wiring 2A modules only when you want to use the SM 322; 8 x DO 24 VDC/2 A with SIMATIC TOP connect.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-13

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3.2

Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection

Connection Notes
Table 8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor Connection Digital Modules Connection Notes Supply Voltage Feed-In At front connector only Add. ground conn. at terminal block Additional jumper At front required at connector power or terminal supply block Description on terminal block not in line with description on SM 5

SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection

Table 8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection Assignments of the Terminals Top row: Terminals 0 to 7: inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7

Front view of terminal block

8-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connecting the power supply

Always connect the supply voltage to the front connector module Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7. In the following example, you must connect L+ to Plus of the upper terminal and M to Minus of the lower terminal.

Connecting the terminal block for one-conductor connection

+

L+1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17

18 19 M 20 + Front connector module

Terminal block

Terminal block

Figure 8-8

Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a One-Conductor Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-15

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3.3

Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection

Connection Notes
Table 8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor Connection Digital Modules Connection Notes Supply Voltage Feed-In At front connector only Add. ground conn. at terminal block Additional Descripjumper tion on At front required at terminal connector power block not or terminal supply in line with block description on SM 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V SM 321; DI 16 x 4 VDC; source input SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Assignment of the terminal block for three-conductor connection

Table 8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals Top row: Terminals 0to 7:inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7 Center row: All terminals: M potential Bottom row: All terminals: L + potential

8-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connecting the power supply

Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7. With some digital modules, two jumpers are generally required for connecting the supply voltage (refer to Table 8-9 on page 8-16). You can wire the jumpers either in the front connector or in the terminal block. Irrespective of this, you must interconnect the two Plus terminals and the two Minus terminals.

Connecting the terminal block for three-conductor connection

+

L+ 1 3

2 4 6

5 7

8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 M 20

+ Front connector

Jumper (1) Terminal block Terminal block

Jumper (1) or jumper (2) required Figure 8-9

Jumper (2)

Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a Three-Conductor Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-17

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.3.4

Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules

You can use the terminal block for 2A modules to wire the SM 322; 8 x DO 24 VDC/2A.

Connection Notes
Table 8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection Digital Modules Connection Notes Supply Voltage Feed-In At front connector only Add. ground conn. at terminal block 5 At front connector or terminal block Add. jumper required for power supply Descr. on terminal block not in line with descr. on SM

SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/2 A

Assignment of the Terminal Block for Connection of 2A Modules

Table 8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals (left) Top row: Terminals 0 to 3: outputs x.0 to x.3 Center row: Terminals 0 to 3: potential M1 for x.0 to x.3
M1 M2

Assignments of the Terminals (right) Top row, on right: Terminals 0 to 3: outputs x.4 to x.7 Center row, on right: Terminals 0 to 3: potential M2 for x.4 to x.7 Bottom row: two-terminal connection for M2

Bottom row: two-terminal connection for M1

Connecting the power supply

Please observe the following when connecting the power supply: Apply the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7. Connect the supply voltage at the front connector module to the potential terminals using separate cables. You must equip each terminal block with a cable for M1 or M2, in addition to the connecting cable. Connect M1 or M2 via a separate line with the front connector and the terminal block. You may jumper the potential of M1 and M2.

8-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Connection to terminal block for 2A modules

M 1

1 L+

1 2 4

5 6 7 8 9 1 M 10 2 L+ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 M 20

+ Front connector

M 2

Terminal block Figure 8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-19

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4

Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules

Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect TPA, you must first select the components as a function of the method of connection (screw-type or spring-loaded terminal).

8.4.1

SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components and Selection Aid

Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA.
Table 8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Components of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal block Quantity: 1 Quantity: 10 Front connector Spring-loaded terminals Screw-type terminals Spring-loaded terminals Screw-type terminals Voltage supply via: Spring-loaded terminals Screw-type terminals Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement connectors) Shielding plate for terminal block, set of 4 Terminal element for: 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm Round-sheath ribbon cable, shielded 8 mm Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 30 m 60 m

Order number 6ES7924-0CC00-0AB0 6ES7924-0CC00-0AA0 6ES7924-0CC00-1AB0 6ES7924-0CC00-1AA0

6ES7921-3AF00-0AA0 6ES7921-3AG00-0AA0 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0 6ES7928-1BA00-0AA0 6ES7390-5AB00-0AA0 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0 6ES7390-5CA00-0AA0 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0 6ES7928-0AA00-0AA0

8-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4.2

SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Terminal Assignment and Terminal Allocation

Terminal marking
On the TPA terminal block, the terminals are identified by letters. This simplifies the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to the terminals on the terminal block.

Terminal block assignment

Table 8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals Terminals Z and Y can be used for multiplying arbitrary potentials and signals.

A B C D E F G H I K

Y YK K A A A A Z Z

The terminals having identical letters are electrically interconnected, with the exception of terminals Z and Z, and also Y and Y.

Multiplier terminal
The lower tier of terminals on the terminal block is designed as 2 x 5 multiplier terminals.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-21

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

Terminal allocation of an analog module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Terminal number on module

Terminal assignment on terminal block TPA Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Y B C D E F G H I K A

K A B C D E F G H I

Figure 8-11

Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8-22

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4.3

Connecting the Signal-Line Shield

Two options for connecting the shield

You can connect the signal line shield to ground as follows: On the analog module by means of a shield-support element (refer to the manual Hardware and Installation for the S7-300 or the manual Distributed I/O device ET 200M in the section on wiring) Directly to the terminal block by means of a shielding plate

Connecting the shield to the terminal block using a shielding plate

1. Before mounting, attach a shielding plate to the terminal block. 2. Mount the terminal block on the DIN rail. (In the figure below, you can see that the shielding plate is applied to the rear of the terminal block and thus there is a connection to the grounded rail.) 3. Place the signal-line shield with the shield terminals on the shielding plate.
Shield support for shield terminal and connecting cable to analog module

Loosen shielding plate

Press down lightly on the release to loosen the shielding plate

Terminal block

Shielding plate Snap the shielding plate into place Shield support fro shield terminal and signal lines from actuators/sensors

Snap the shielding plate into place at the rear of the terminal block. Figure 8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

8-23

SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA

8.4.4

Connection Example

Connecting the load voltage supply

You can connect the load voltage supply of the analog module to the front connector module. There are separate terminals on the front connector module for the load voltage L+ and M. Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.

Allocation of front connector to terminal block

The upper socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal block 1 and the lower socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal block 2.

Connection example
The illustration below shows an example of connecting the analog input module SM 321; AI 8 x 12 bits in Resistance Test mode.
Resistance test Terminal number on module SF
L+
L+

Terminal assignment on terminal block TPA

Terminal block 1 Y B C D E F G H I K K Terminal block 2 Y

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

M0 + CH0 M0* IC0 + IC0* M1 + CH2 M1* IC1 + IC1* Comp +

Comp

Comp/ Mana M2 + CH4 M2* IC2 + IC2* M3 + CH6 M3* IC3 + IC3* M

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A B C D E F G H I Z

Figure 8-13

Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321; AI 8 x 12 bits

8-24

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A
Page A-1 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-11 A-19 A-27 A-30 A-36 A-39 A-41

In this chapter
Section A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11 Contents How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

A.1

How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7. In the user program, you can use a SFC: To reassign parameters to the module and To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-1

Parameters stored in data records

The parameters of the signal modules are located in data records 0 and 1; for some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well.

Modifiable parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module using SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this! You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program.

SFCs for parameter assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in the user program:
Table A-1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules

SFC No. 55 56 57

Identifier WR_PARM WR_DPARM PARM_MOD

Application Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28) to the addressed signal module. Transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the CPU to the addressed signal module. Transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128) from the CPU to the addressed signal module.

Description of the parameters

The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module classes. The parameters of the signal modules are described: In the on-line help of STEP 7 In this reference manual You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

A-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.2

Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules. Note For details of the parameters of parameterized digital input/output modules, see the respective chapter of the module concerned.

You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: In STEP 7 With SFC 55 WR_PARM With SFB 53 WRREC (e. g. for GSD). The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 and the SFB 53 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55, SFB 53 Input delay Diagnosis of missing sensor supply Diagnosis of broken wire Hardware interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Hardware interrupt with rising edge Hardware interrupt with falling edge 1 0 No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-3

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital input modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Diagnostics interrupt enable Hardware interrupt enable 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 Hardware interrupt on rising edge at channel group 0 on falling edge at channel group 0 on rising edge at channel group 1 on falling edge at channel group 1 on rising edge at channel group 2 on falling edge at channel group 2 on rising edge at channel group 3 on falling edge at channel group 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 Hardware interrupt on rising edge at channel group 4 on falling edge at channel group 4 on rising edge at channel group 5 on falling edge at channel group 5 on rising edge at channel group 6 on falling edge at channel group 6 on rising edge at channel group 7 on falling edge at channel group 7 Byte 3 Figure A-1 Not relevant 0

Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

A-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.3

Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules. Note For details of the parameters of parameterized digital input/output modules, see the respective chapter of the module concerned.

You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: In STEP 7 With SFC 55 WR_PARM With SFB 53 WRREC (e. g. for GSD). The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 and the SFB 53 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55, SFB 53 Diagnosis of missing load voltage L+ Diagnosis of broken wire Diagnosis of shortcircuit to M Diagnosis of shortcircuit to L+ Diagnostics interrupt enable Behavior on CPU STOP Enable substitute value 1 1 0 No No No No Yes Yes Yes ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-5

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital output modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Behavior on CPU STOP Hold last valid value Apply substitute value Diagnostics interrupt enable 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15 Byte 3 Not relevant

Figure A-2

Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Note You should only enable the parameters in byte 0, Hold last valid value and Enable substitute value as an alternative.

A-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.4

Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: In STEP 7 With SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics: With wire-break check Temperature unit Temperature coefficient Smoothing Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Cycle end interrupt enable Interference Suppression Measuring Method Measuring Range Upper limit value Lower limit value 1 0

No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-7

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Cycle end interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Byte 1 Interference suppression 2 0

Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 7 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 4 3 0

See Table A-5

Measurement channel group 0 Measurement channel group 1 Measurement channel group 2 Measurement channel group 3

Measuring Measuring Method Range Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13

See Table A-6 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0

Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Note: For the channel groups, only one limit value for channel 1 is ever set.

High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte

Figure A-3

Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

A-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Interference frequency suppression

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3). You must count the resulting integration time separately for each channel!
Table A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules

Interference Suppression 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 10 Hz

Integration Time 2.5 ms 16.7 ms 20 ms 100 ms

Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the analog input modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3).

Note Please note that a measuring range module may need to be reconnected, depending on the measuring range (see Chapter 4)!

Table A-6

Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules Code 2#0000 2#0001 Measuring Range Deactivated " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V " 25 mV " 50 mV Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1010 2#1011

Measuring Method Deactivated Voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-9

Table A-6

Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules Code 2#0010 " 3.2 mA " 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA " 5 mA 4 to 20 mA 150 W 300 W 600 W 10 kW 52 to 148 W 250 W 400 W 700 W Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard range Pt 200 standard range Pt 500 standard range Pt 1000 standard range Ni 1000 standard range Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 1000 climate Ni 100 standard range Type B [PtRh PtRh] Type N [NiCrSi NiSi] Type E [NiCr CuNi] Type R [PtRh Pt] Type S [PtRh Pt] Type J [Fe CuNi IEC] Type L [Fe CuNi] Type T [Cu CuNi] Type K [NiCr Ni] Type U [Cu Cu Ni] Measuring Range Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0011 2#0010 2#0100 2#0110 2#1001 2#0001 2#0011 2#0101 2#0111 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1001 2#1011 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001

Measuring Method Four-wire transmitter

Two-wire transmitter Resistance, four-conductor connection Resistor four-conductor connection; 100 W compensation Thermal resistance + lineari zation four-conductor connection

2#0011 2#0100

2#0110

2#1000

Thermocouples internal comparison Thermocouples external comparison Thermocouples + linearization internal comparison Thermocouples + linearization external comparison

2#1010

2#1011

2#1101

2#1110

A-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.5

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: In STEP 7 With SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics: With wire-break check Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Cycle end interrupt enable Temperature unit Measuring Method Measuring Range Module filtering mode Temperature coefficient Interference Suppression Smoothing Upper limit value Lower limit value

No No Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

128

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-11

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for SM 331; AI 8 xRTD. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius 1: degrees Fahrenheit Cycle end interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned Figure A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD 2 0

A-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 128

The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD.
7 Byte 0 Byte 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-8) Interference suppression Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Byte 2 Measuring method, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 3 Measuring range, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 4 Temperature coefficient, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-12) Byte 5

(refer to Table A-9)

Measuring method, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 6 Measuring range, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 7 Temperature coefficient, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-12) Figure A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-13

Byte 8 Measuring method, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 9 Measuring range, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 10 Temperature coefficient, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-12) Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 12 Measuring range, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 13 Temperature coefficient, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-12) Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Figure A-6 High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 1 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 1

Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued)

A-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34 Byte 35 Byte 36 Byte 37 Byte 38 Byte 39 Byte 40 Byte 41 Byte 42 Byte 43 Byte 44 Byte 45

High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte

Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Upper limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Upper limit value channel group 2 channel 5 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 5 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 7 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 7

Figure A-7

Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued)

Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-15

Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8

RTD

The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).
Table A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels software filter 4 channels hardware filter

Code 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010

Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Note that the settings 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 400 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60 and 400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.
Table A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Interference Suppression 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50/60/400 Hz

Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).
Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD Measuring Method Deactivated Resistance, four-conductor connection Resistance, three-conductor connection Code 2#0000 2#0100 Measuring Range Deactivated 150 W 300 W 600 W 150 W 300 W 600 W Code 2#0000 2#0010 2#0100 2#0110 2#0010 2#0100 2#0110

2#0101

A-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued Measuring Method Thermal resistance + linearization four-conductor connection Code 2#1000 Measuring Range Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard Ni 100 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 1000 standard Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 1000 climate Pt 200 standard Ni 120 standard Ni 120 climate Cu 10 climate Cu 10 standard Ni 200 standard Ni 200 climate Ni 500 standard Ni 500 climate Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard Ni 100 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 1000 standard Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 1000 climate Pt 200 standard Ni 120 standard Ni 120 climate Cu 10 climate Cu 10 standard Ni 200 standard Ni 200 climate Ni 500 standard Ni 500 climate Code 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010 2#00000011 2#00000100 2#00000101 2#00000110 2#00000111 2#00001000 2#00001001 2#00001010 2#00001011 2#00001100 2#00001101 2#00001110 2#00001111 2#00010000 2#00010001 2#00010010 2#00010011 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010 2#00000011 2#00000100 2#00000101 2#00000110 2#00000111 2#00001000 2#00001001 2#00001010 2#00001011 2#00001100 2#00001101 2#00001110 2#00001111 2#00010000 2#00010001 2#00010010 2#00010011

Thermal resistance + linearization three-conductor connection

2#1001

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-17

Temperature coefficient of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD The table below contains the codes for the temperature coefficient which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).
Table A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Temperature coefficient Pt0.003850 //C (IPTS-68) Pt0.003916 //C Pt0.003902 //C Pt0.003920 //C Pt0.003850 //C (ITS-90) Ni 0.006180 //C Ni 0.006720 //C Cu0.00427 //C

Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#1000 2#1001 2#1100

Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).
Table A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Smoothing None Low Average High

Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11

A-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.6

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: In STEP 7 With SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics: With wire-break check Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Cycle end interrupt enable Temperature unit Measuring Method Measuring Range Module filtering mode Reaction to open thermocouple Interference Suppression Smoothing Upper limit value Lower limit value

No No Yes

Yes Yes Yes

128

Yes Yes Yes Yes

128

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-19

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius 1: degrees Fahrenheit Cycle end interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned Figure A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x TC 2 0

A-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 128

The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 x TC.
7 Byte 0 Byte 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-14) Interference suppression Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Byte 2 Measuring method, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 3 Measuring range, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 4 Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-17) Byte 5

(refer to Table A-15)

Measuring method, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 6 Measuring range, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 7 Smoothing, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-17)

Figure A-9

Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-21

Byte 8 Measuring method, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 9 Measuring range, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 10 Smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-17) Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 12 Measuring range, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 13 Smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-17) Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Figure A-10 High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 1 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 1

Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued)

A-22

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34 Byte 35 Byte 36 Byte 37 Byte 38 Byte 39 Byte 40 Byte 41 Byte 42 Byte 43 Byte 44 Byte 45

High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte

Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Upper limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Upper limit value channel group 2 channel 5 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 5 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 7 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 7

Figure A-11

Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued)

Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-23

Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).
Table A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels software filter 4 channels hardware filter

Code 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010

Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9). Note that the settings 400 Hz, 60 Hz and 50 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60 and 400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.
Table A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Interference Suppression 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50/60/400 Hz

Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11

A-24

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).
Table A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC Measuring Method Deactivated Thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 0 C Code 2#0000 2#1010 Measuring Range Deactivated B N E R S J L T K U C B N E R S J L T K U C B N E R S J L T K U C B N E R S J L T K U C Code 2#0000 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1010 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1010 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1010 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1010

Thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 50 C

2#1011

Thermocouple, linear, internal comparison

2#1101

Thermocouple, linear, external comparison

2#1110

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-25

Reaction to open thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC The table below contains the codes for the reactions to an open thermocouple, which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).
Table A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Reaction to open thermocouple Overflow Underflow

Code 2#0 2#1

Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).
Table A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Smoothing None Low Average High

Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11

A-26

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.7

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input module. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte to 1.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Measuring method and measuring range channel 0 Measuring method and measuring range channel 1 Measuring method and measuring range channel 2 Measuring method and measuring range channel 3 Measuring method and measuring range channel 4 Measuring method and measuring range channel 5 Measuring method and measuring range channel 6 Measuring method and measuring range channel 7 Measuring Range Measuring Method 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 Temperature coefficient channel 0 and 1 Temperature coefficient channel 2 and 3 Temperature coefficient channel 4 and 5 Temperature coefficient channel 6 and 7 Interference suppression Temperature measurement

Channel 1, 3, 5, 7 Channel 0, 2, 4, 6 Figure A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-27

Temperature measurement
The table below contains the codes for the different temperature measurements, which you enter in byte 0 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12).
Table A-19 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module Temperature unit for linearization Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Code 2#0000 0000 2#0000 1000 2#0001 0000

Interference frequency suppression

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12). You must work out the resulting integration time separately for each module!
Table A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module Interference Suppression 60 Hz 50 Hz Integration Time 50 ms 60 ms Code 2#01 2#10

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the analog input module and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 13 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12).

Note Please note that the analog input module must be wired in accordance with the measuring range and at the front connector correspondingly!

Table A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module Measuring Method Deactivated Voltage Code 2#0000 2#0001 Measuring Range Deactivated " 50 mV " 500 mV "1V "5V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V Code 2#0000 2#1011 2#0011 2#0100 2# 0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001

A-28

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Table A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module Measuring Method Current Code 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA 600 6 k Pt 100 Climate Pt 100 Standard Ni 100 Climate Ni 100 Standard Ni 1000 / LG-Ni 1000 Climate Ni 1000 / LG-Ni 1000 Standard Measuring Range Code 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0110 2#1000 2#0000 2#0010 2#0001 2#0011 2#1010 2#0110

Resistors Bulb resistor (linear)

2#0101 2#1001

Temperature coefficient
The table below contains the codes for the temperature coefficient which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record (refer to Figure A-12).
Table A-22 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module Temperature coefficient Pt0.003850 //C (ITS-90) Ni 0.006180 //C Ni 0.005000 //C Measuring Range Pt 100 Ni 100 / Ni 1000 LG-Ni 1000 Code 2#0100 2#1000 2#1010

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-29

A.8

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Parameters Table A-23contains all the parameters which you can set for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x bits. This comparison indicates which methods you can use for the configuration of the individual parameters: SFC 55 WR_PARM STEP 7 programming device The parameters that you have set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module by means of SFC 56 or SFC 57.
Table A-23 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Parameter Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics: With wire-break check Limit value interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Cycle end interrupt enable Module mode Interference Suppression Measuring Method Measuring Range Smoothing Upper limit value Lower limit value 128 1 0 Data Record No. Configurable with... ... SFC 55 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ...programming device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

A-30

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Structure of data record 1 Figure A-13 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits. You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to 1.
Bit number

7 Byte 0

Cycle end interrupt enable

Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable

Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned

Figure A-13

Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-31

Structure of data record 128 Figure shows the structure of data record 128 for the parameters of the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits.
7 Byte 0 Byte 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number Module mode (see Table A-24) Interference frequency suppression Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Byte 2 Measuring method, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 3 Measuring range, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 4 Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-12)

Refer to Table A-25

Byte 5

Measuring method, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 6 Measuring range, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 7 Smoothing, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-12)

Figure A-14

Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

A-32

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Byte 8 Measuring method, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 9 Measuring range, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 10 Smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-12)

Byte 11

Measuring method, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 12 Measuring range, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-26) Byte 13 Smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-12) Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 1 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 1

Figure A-15 Data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (continued)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-33

Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34 Byte 35 Byte 36 Byte 37 Byte 38 Byte 39 Byte 40 Byte 41 Byte 42 Byte 43 Byte 44 Byte 45

High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte

Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Upper limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Upper limit value channel group 2 channel 5 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 5 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 7 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 7

Figure A-16

Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (continued)

Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

A-34

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Module modes Table A-24 contains the codes for the module modes, which you enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (see Figure A-14).
Table A-24 Codes for the modes of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Module mode 8 channels 4 channels Code 2#00000000 2#00000001

Interference suppression Table A-25 contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 128 (see Figure A-14). Note that 4-channel mode only functions if interference frequency suppression of 50, 60 and 400 Hz is set.
Table A-25 Codes for interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Interference Suppression 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50, 60 and 400 Hz Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11

Measuring methods and measuring ranges Table A-26 contains all the measuring ranges for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits. Table A-26 also shows the codes for measuring methods and measuring ranges. You must enter these codes in accordance with the required measuring range in the relevant byte of data record 128 (see Figure A-14).
Table A-26 Codes for the measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits Measuring Method Deactivated Voltage Code 2#0000 2#0001 Measuring Range Deactivated 5V 1 to 5 V 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 20 mA Code 2#0000 2#0110 2#0111 2#1001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100

Current (4-wire transmitter)

2#0002

Settings for input smoothing Table A-27 contains all the smoothing settings for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits. According to the smoothing required, you must enter these codes in the corresponding byte of data set 128 (see imag eA-14.
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-35

Table A-27 Codes for the smoothing mode settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits Smoothing mode setting None Low Average High Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11

A.9

Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameters
Table A-28 contains all the parameters you can set for analog output modules.. The comparison shows: Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM. The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57.
Table A-28 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics interrupt enable Behavior on CPU STOP Output type Output Range Substitute value

No Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

A-36

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Data record 1 structure

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog output modules. You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Diagnostics interrupt enable 7 3 2 1 0 Behavior on CPU STOP Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 7 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 4 3 0 Output channel group 0 Output channel group 1 Output channel group 2 Output channel group 3 Output Range Output type Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 Figure A-17 0

Byte 1

0 = Outputs de-energized 1 = Hold last value

Refer to Table A-29

High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte

Substitute value channel group 0 Substitute value channel group 1 Substitute value channel group 2 Substitute value channel group 3

Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-37

Setting substitute values

Note For output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must set the substitute value E500H so that the output remains de-energized (refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27). The representation of the substitute values corresponds to the analog value representation. You should observe the relevant range limits when setting the substitute values.

Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to FigureA-17).
Table A-29 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules Output type Deactivated Voltage Code 2#0000 2#0001 Deactivated 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA Output Range Code 2#0000 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100

Current

2#0010

A-38

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

A.10

Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits

Parameters
Table A-28 contains all the parameters that you can set for the analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. The comparison shows: Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM. The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57.
Table A-30 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics interrupt enable Behavior on CPU STOP Output type Output Range

No Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-39

Structure of data record 1

The diagram below shows the structure of data record 1 of the parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Diagnostics interrupt enable 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Behavior on CPU STOP 0

Byte 1

Channel 4 Channel 0 Channel 5 Channel 1 Channel 6 Channel 2 Channel 7 Channel 3 7 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 4 3 0

0 = Outputs de-energized 1 = Hold last value

Output channel 0 Output channel 1 Output channel 2 Output channel 3 Output channel 4 Output channel 5 Output channel 6 Output channel 7

Output Range Output type Bytes 10 to 13 are not assigned

See Table A-31

Figure A-18

Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

A-40

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Output method and output range The following table contains all the output methods and output ranges of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits , with their coding. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 9 of data record 1 (refer to FigureA-18).
Table A-31 Codes for the output ranges of the analog output module SM332; AO 8 x 12 bits Output type Deactivated Voltage Code 2#0000 2#0001 Output range Deactivated 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 20 mA Code 2#0000 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100

Current

2#0010

A.11

Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input/output modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: In STEP 7 With SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-32 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Measuring Method Measuring Range Integration Time Output type Output Range 1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-41

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input/output modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to 1.
7 Byte 0 7 Byte 1 0 Reset Time Set the same parameters for all channels. Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 7 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 4 3 0 Meas. channel 0 Meas. channel 1 Meas. channel 2 Meas. channel 3 Measuring Method 7 Byte 6 Byte 7 4 3 Measuring Range 0 Output channel 0 Output channel 1 0 Not relevant

Output type Byte 8 : Byte 13 :

Output Range

Not relevant

Figure A-19

Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

A-42

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Parameter Sets for Signal Modules

Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the analog input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-19).
Table A-33 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules Measuring Method Deactivated Voltage Resistance, four-conductor connection Thermal resistance + linearization four-conductor connection Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0100 2#1000 Measuring Range Deactivated 0 to 10 V 10 kW Pt 100 climate Code 2#0000 2#1000 2#1001 2#0000

Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 6 and 7 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-19).
Table A-34 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules Output type Deactivated Voltage Code 2#0000 2#0001 Deactivated 0 to 10 V Output Range Code 2#0000 2#1000

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

A-43

A-44

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B
Page B-1 B-2 B-5 B-7

In this Appendix
Section B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 Contents Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 7 Diagnostic data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

B.1

Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program

In this Appendix
This Appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostics data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program.

Diagnostic data are contained in data records

The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 16 bytes long and are contained in data records 0 and 1: Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that describe the current status of a programmable logic controller. Data record 1 contains the four bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data record 0 and as many as 12 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

B-1

B.2

Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to 1.

Bytes 0 and 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 Module problem Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present External auxiliary supply missing Front connector missing Module not parameterized. Incorrect parameter in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 0 0

Module type (see Table B-1) Channel information available User information available Figure B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data

Module types
The following table contains the IDs of the module classes (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).
Table B-1 Codes of the Module Types

Code 0101 0110 1000 1100 1111 CPU

Module Type Analog module Function module CP Digital module

B-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

Bytes 2 and 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Memory module or measuring range module (for analog modules) incorrect or missing Communication fault Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP Scan time-out Module-internal supply voltage failure Battery empty Complete backup supply failure 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Rack failure Processor failure EPROM error RAM error ADC/DAC error Fuse blown Hardware interrupt lost Figure B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data

Byte 2

Byte 3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

B-3

Bytes 4 to 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 4

Channel type B#16#70: Digital input B#16#71: Analog input B#16#72: Digital output B#16#73: Analog output Further channel type available? 0: no 1: yes 7 0 Number of diagnostics bits that Byte 5 the module outputs per channel 7 0 Number of channels of the same Byte 6 type in one module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error channel 0 / channel group 0 Channel error channel 1 / channel group 1

... ...

... ... Channel error channel 6 / channel group 6 ... Channel error channel 7 / channel group 7 Figure B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data

B-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B.3

Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8

From byte 8 up to byte 15, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data. The figures below show the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel or a channel group of the specific module. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to 1. You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called Diagnostics of the Modules.

Digital input channel of the SM 321; DI 16 diagnostic interrupts

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0

24 VDC; with hardware and

Configuring/parameter assignment error Ground fault Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire-break Sensor supply missing

Figure B-4

Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Digital output channel of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; with diagnostic interrupt

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Ground fault Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire-break External auxiliary supply missing Overtemperature Figure B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

B-5

Analog input channel of the SM 331 modules with diagnostics capability

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Configuring/parameter assignment error Common mode error Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire-break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow

Figure B-6

Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331 with Diagnostics Capability

Analog output channel of the SM 332 modules with diagnostics capability

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Common mode error Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire-break External auxiliary supply missing Figure B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332 with Diagnostics Capability

B-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules

B.4

Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to 1. Section 5.4 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies.

Bytes 0 and 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Module problem Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present Module not parameterized. Incorrect parameter in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 0 0 0

Byte 0

Module class 05H Channel information available Figure B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

B-7

Bytes 2 to 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Scan time-out 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Not relevant

Byte 2

Byte 4

7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6

Channel type 79H: SM POS-INPUT 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 3 channels

Byte 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 Channel error, channel 2

Figure B-9

Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT

Bytes 8 to 10
From byte 8 up to byte 10, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data. The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuration/parameterization error (internal channel error) Encoder error (external channel error) Figure B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

B-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Dimension Drawings

Introduction
In this appendix you will find the dimension drawings for the most important components of an S7-300. The specifications in these dimension drawings are required for dimensioning the S7-300 configuration. The dimensions of an S7-300 configuration must be taken into account when installing an S7-300 in cabinets, switchgear rooms, etc. This appendix does not contain any dimension drawings of the CPUs of the S7-300 or M7-300 or of the IM 153-1. These dimension drawings are contained in the relevant manuals.

Contents
In this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings of the following S7-300 components.
Section C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 Contents Dimension Drawings of the Rails Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules Dimension Drawings for Accessories Page C-2 C-8 C-13 C-13 C-15

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

C-1

C.1

Dimension Drawings of the Rails

483 mm standard rail

Figure C-1 shows the dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail.
8.7 163.9 465.2 155

24

19

35

15

11 482.6

Figure C-1

Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail

530 mm standard rail

Figure C-2 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm standard rail.
15 25 20 25 = 500

24

19

35

15

18 530

Figure C-2

Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail

C-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5.2

Dimension Drawings

830 mm standard rail

Figure C-3 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm standard rail.
15 25 32 25 = 800

24

19

35

15

18 830

Figure C-3

Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail

2000 mm standard rail

Figure C-4 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm standard rail.

24

19

15

35

2000

Figure C-4

Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

5.2

C-3

160 mm rail
Figure C-5 shows the dimension drawing of the 160 mm rail.

32.5

57.2

10

10

140 160 15

Figure C-5

Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width

482.6 mm rail
Figure C-6 shows the dimension drawing of the 482.6 mm rail.

32.5

57.2

10

8.3

466 482.6 15

Figure C-6

Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width

C-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

122 6

M6

122 6

M6

Dimension Drawings

530 mm rail
Figure C-7 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm rail.

32.5

57.2

10

15

500 530 15

Figure C-7

Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width

830 mm rail
Figure C-8 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm rail.

32.5

57.2

10

15

800 830 15

Figure C-8

Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

122 6

M6

122 6

M6

C-5

2000 mm rail
Figure C-9 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm rail.

2000 15 Figure C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail

C-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

122 6

Dimension Drawings

Rail for Insert and Remove function

Figure C-10 shows the dimension drawing of the rail for the Insert and Remove function with active bus module, S7-300 module and explosion-proof partition. The rail is 482.6 mm or 530 mm long.

Explosion-proof partition

S7-300 module

Rail for the Insert and Remove function

122 125 155

Figure C-10

Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for Insert and Remove Function with Active Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

59

Active bus module

152

166

C-7

Bus modules (Expansion buses)

Figure C-11 shows the dimension drawing of the active bus module for the Insert and Remove function.

Bus modules BM PS/IM (...7HA) BM IM/IM (...7HD) BM 2 40 (...7HB) BM 1 80 (...7HC) 97 92

Figure C-11

Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules

C.2

Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules

PS 307; 2 A
Figure C-12 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 2 A power supply module.
127.5 50 120

Figure C-12

Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

C-8

125

Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 5A
Figure C-13 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 5 A power supply module.
127.5 80 120

Figure C-13

Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

125

C-9

PS 307; 10 A
Figure C-14 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 10 A power supply module.

127.5 200 120

Figure C-14

Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A

125

C-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Dimension Drawings

PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP

Figures C-15 and C-16 show the dimension drawings of the configuration of a power supply module PS 307; 5 A with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Observe the dimensions that result from the use of the power connector for wiring the PS 307; 5 A with the CPU.

27 68

Figure C-15

Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

132

C-11

PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP

Figure C-16 shows the dimension drawing of the power supply module PS 307; 5 A with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP in the side view.

130 120

13

Figure C-16

Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View

C-12

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

125

Dimension Drawings

C.3

Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules

IM 360
Figure C-17 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 360.
40 120

Figure C-17

Interface Module IM 360

IM 361
Figure C-18 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 361.
80 120

Figure C-18

Interface Module IM 361

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

125

125

C-13

IM 365
Figure C-19 shows the dimension drawing of interface module IM 365.
40 120

9 120

Figure C-19

Interface Module IM 365

C-14

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

125

125

Dimension Drawings

C.4

Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules

Signal Module
Figure C-20 shows the dimension drawing of the signal module. A signal module might look slightly different than the example below. The dimensions however are always the same.
40 120

Figure C-20

Signal Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

125

130

C-15

C.5

Dimension Drawings for Accessories

Shield connecting element

Figure C-21 shows the dimension drawing of the shield connecting element in connection with two signal modules.
120

80

Figure C-21

2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element

40

C-16

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

190

Dimension Drawings

SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

Figure C-22 shows the dimension drawing of the 3-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.

35

60

40.5 35.5

Figure C-22

SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier

Figure C-23 shows the dimension drawing of the 2-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.

35

60

40.5 35.5

Figure C-23

SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

70

70

C-17

SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier

Figure C-24 shows the dimension drawing of the 1-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.

35

52

40.5 35.5

Figure C-24

SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier

RS 485 repeater on standard rail

Figure C-25 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the standard rail.
45 73

55

Figure C-25

RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail

C-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

125

128

Dimension Drawings

RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

Figure C-26 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the S7-300 rail.
45 70

Figure C-26

RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

125

C-19

C-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules

Spare parts
Table D-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for S7-300 programmable controllers.

Table D-1

Accessories and Spare Parts

S7-300 Parts Bus connector Power connector between power supply unit and CPU Labeling strip (Qty 10) For 8/16-channel modules For 32-channel modules Labeling strips to be printed For 16-channel modules (petrol) (light beige) (yellow) (red) (petrol) (light beige) (yellow) (red)

Order number 6ES7390-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7390-7BA00-0AA0

6ES7392-2XX00-0AA0 6ES7392-2XX10-0AA0 6ES7392-2AX00-0AA0 6ES7392-2BX00-0AA0 6ES7392-2CX00-0AA0 6ES7392-2DX00-0AA0 6ES7392-2AX10-0AA0 6ES7392-2BX10-0AA0 6ES7392-2CX10-0AA0 6ES7392-2DX10-0AA0 www.siemens.de/automation/csi/ product Contribution ID No.: 11978022 6ES7912-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0 6ES7392-1BJ00-0AA0 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0 6ES7921-3AB00-0AA0 6ES7921-3AA00-0AA0

For 32-channel modules

Instructions for printing labeling strips with

artwork

Slot numbering label Front connector 20-pin Screw-type Connection Spring-loaded Connection Front connector 40-pin Screw-type Connection Front connector for 2 flat ribbon terminals Screw-type Connection Spring-loaded Connection
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

D-1

Table D-1

Accessories and Spare Parts, continued

S7-300 Parts Front connector for 4 flat ribbon terminals Spring-loaded Connection SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier, with Screw-type Connection Spring-loaded Connection SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier, with Screw-type Connection Spring-loaded Connection SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier, with Screw-type Connection Spring-loaded Connection Round-sheath ribbon cable (16-pin) Unshielded 30 m Unshielded 60 m Shielded 30 m

Order number 6ES7921-3AA20-0AA0 6ES7924-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7924-0AA00-0AB0 6ES7924-0BB00-0AA0 6ES7924-0BB00-0AB0 6ES7924-0CA00-0AA0 6ES7924-0CA00-0AB0 6ES7923-0CD00-0AA0 6ES7923-0CG00-0AA0 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0

Shielded 60 m

Plug-in connectors, 16-pin, set of 8 (insulation 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0 displacement connectors) Shield connecting element Shield connection terminals for 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm Measuring range module for analog modules Fuse set for 120/230 VAC digital output modules (contains 10 fuses and 2 fuse carriers) Interconnecting cable between IM 360 and IM 361 or IM 361 and IM 361 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0 6ES7390-5AB00-0AA0 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0 6ES7390-5CA00-0AA0 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7973-1HD00-0AA0

1m 2.5 m 5m 10 m

6ES7368-3BB01-0AA0 6ES7368-3BC51-0AA0 6ES7368-3BF01-0AA0 6ES7368-3CB01-0AA0

D-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

Introduction
In this appendix, we explain what is meant by electrostatic sensitive devices the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic sensitive devices.

Contents
This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices:
Section E.1 E.2 E.3 What is ESD? Electrostatic Charging of Persons General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage Contents Page E-2 E-3 E-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

E-1

E.1

What is ESD?

Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge. The abbreviation ESD has been introduced for these Electrostatic Sensitive Devices/Modules. The designation ESD is used internationally for electrostatic sensitive device. Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:

Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation.

E-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

E.2

Electrostatic Charging of Persons

Charging
Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be charged electrostatically. Figure E-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure. These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801-2.

Voltage in kV (kV) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 Synthetic material Wool

3 Antistatic material, for example, wood or concrete

2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative air humidity in %

Figure E-1

Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

E-3

E.3

General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. You thus avoid electrostatic charging.

Avoid direct contact

You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable (for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices. If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use grounded measuring devices only.

E-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation AC ADC AI AO PLC COMP CP CPU DAC DB DC DI DO ESD EMC EPROM EWS FB FC FEPROM ES I+ IC KV L+ LWH FOC M M+ M MANA MPI Alternating current Analog-to digital converter Analog input Analog output Programmable logic controller Compensating terminal Communications processor Central processing unit of a PLC Digital-to-analog converter Data block Direct current Digital input Digital output Electrostatic sensitive devices Electromagnetic compatibility Erasable programmable read-only memory Apply substitute value Function block Function Flash erasable programmable read only memory Encoder supply Measuring lead for current input Constant-current lead Shunt comparison Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Hold last valid value Fiber-optic cable Ground terminal Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Multipoint interface Explanation

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

F-1

OB OP OS PIQ PII Programming device PS QI QV RAM RL S+ S SF SFB SFC SM PLC SSI TD U+ UCM Uiso Sign

Organization block Operator panel Operator system Process-image output table Process-image input table Programming device Power supply Analog output current Analog output voltage Random access memory Load impedance Detector lead (positive) Detector lead (negative) Group error error LED System function block System function Signal module Programmable logic control Synchronous serial interface Text display Measuring lead for voltage input Common mode voltage Potential difference between MANA and local ground Sign

F-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary
Address An address denotes a specific operand or address area; examples of this are: input I 12.1; memory word MW 25; data block DB 3.

Aggregate current Sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module. Backplane bus The backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to communicate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require. The interconnection of the modules is established by the bus connector.

Basic conversion time Time for the actual encoding of a channel (integration time) plus the required times for the internal control; i. e. after this time a channel is completely processed.

Basic error limit The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 C, referred to the rated range of the analog module.

Basic response time Time which an analog input/output module requires for a cycle if all channels are released; it corresponds to the number of all channels x basic conversion time.

Bus A bus is a transmission medium that interconnects several nodes. Data transmission can be serial or parallel, and be performed over electric conductors or fiberoptic cables.

Bus segment A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments are interconnected by means of repeaters.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary-1

Glossary

CiR Equipment changes in running operations (Configuration in RUN)

Common mode voltage A voltage that is common to all inputs/outputs of a group and is measured between this group and any reference point (usually to ground).

Communication processor Programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking, point-topoint connection.

Comparison point When using thermocouples on analog input modules: point of known temperature (for example, compensating box).

Compensating box Compensating boxes can be used for measuring temperatures with thermocouples on analog input modules. The compensating box is a compensation circuit for compensating temperature fluctuations at the Comparison point.

Complete restart When a CPU starts up (say, when the mode selector switch is moved from STOP to RUN or when the mains supply is turned on), OB 100 (Restart) is processed before cyclic programming processing (OB 1). With a complete restart, the Process input image is read in and the STEP 7 user program is processed, starting with the first instruction in OB1.

Configure Select and put together different components on a programmable logic controller and install the requisite software and adapt to the specific use (for example, by assigning parameters to the modules).

CP Communications processor

CPU The CPU (central processing unit) is a CPU module of the programmable logic controller that stores and runs the user program. It contains the operating system, memory, processing unit and communication interface.

Glossary-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary

Default setting The default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other value is used.

Destruction limit Limit of permitted input voltage / input current. If this limit is exceeded, the measuring accuracy may deteriorate. If the destruction limit is exceeded by a vast amount, this may destroy the internal measuring circuit.

Diagnostic buffer The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU which stores the diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred. For troubleshooting, the user can read out the exact error cause in STEP 7 (PLC > Module State) from the diagnostic buffer.

Diagnostic data All the diagnostics events that occurred are collected in the CPU and entered in the Diagnostic buffer. If there is an error OB, it is started.

Diagnostic Interrupt Modules with diagnostics capability report system errors by means of diagnostic interrupts to the CPU. The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 in the course of a diagnostic interrupt.

Diagnostics Generic term for System diagnostics, process error diagnosis and user-defined diagnostics.

Direct access A direct access is the direct accessing of the CPU by means of the Backplane bus to modules while avoiding the Process image.

Encoder absolute An encoder absolute determines the path traveled during position detection by reading a numerical value. In the case of encoders absolute with a serial interface (SSI), path information is transferred synchronously and serially according to the SSI protocol (synchronous serial interface).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary-3

Glossary

Equipotential bonding Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor), which brings the bodies of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approximately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages between these bodies.

FREEZE Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The FREEZE function is a control command for freezing current encoder values of the SM 338 to the instantaneous value.

Ground The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point. In the proximity of grounding electrodes, the ground can have a potential differing from zero. The term reference ground is frequently used to describe such circumstances.

Ground, to To ground means connect an electrically conductive part by means of a grounding system to the grounding electrode (one or more conductive parts having a very good contact to ground).

Hardware interrupt A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a certain event in the process (overshooting or undershooting of a limit value; a module has completed the cyclic conversion of its channels). The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU. In accordance with the priority of this interrupt, the Organization block assigned to it is scanned.

Hold last value (LWH) The module retains the last value read out before STOP mode.

Input delay Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to suppress injected interference. Interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay are suppressed. The set input delay is subject to a tolerance, which can be taken from the technical specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses long interfering pulses, whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones. The permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the encoder and the module. For example, a high input delay has to be set for long unshielded supply conductors to the encoder (longer than 100m).

Glossary-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary

Integration time Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The integration time is the inverse value of the Interference frequency suppression in ms.

Interface, multipoint MPI

Interference frequency suppression Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the AC network can interfere with the measured value, especially with measurements in low voltage ranges and with thermocouples. This parameter is used by the user to specify the prevailing line frequency on his system.

Interrupt The SIMATIC S7 is familiar with 28 different run-time level, which govern running of the user program. These run-time levels include interrupts such as hardware interrupts, among other things. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program the reaction he wants (for example, in an FB).

Interrupt, diagnostic Diagnostic Interrupt

Interrupt, end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Hardware interrupt

Interrupt, hardware Hardware interrupt

Linearity error The linearity error identifies the maximum deviation of the measured/output value from the ideal linear relationship between the measuring/output signal and the digital value. The data is a percentage and relates to the rated range of the analog module.

Logic block In a SIMATIC S7 context, a logic block is a block that contains a part of the STEP 7 user program. By contrast, a data block only contains data. There are the following logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs), functions (FCs), system function block (SFBs), system functions (SFCs).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary-5

Glossary

Measuring range module Measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adaptation to different measuring ranges.

Module filtering mode By operating mode we mean: 1. The selection of an operating mode of the CPU using the mode switch or the PG 2. The type of program execution in the CPU 3. A parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules

Monoflop time Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames ( Encoder absolute).

MPI The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programmer port of the SIMATIC S7. It is used to access programmable modules ((CPUs, CPs), text displays and operator panel from a central point. The nodes on the MPI can communicate with each other.

Non-isolated In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are electrically connected.

Normalizing Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. Normalizing right justifies the encoder value of the encoder absolute; non-relevant places are discarded.

OB Organization block

Operational limit The operational limit is the measuring or output error of the analog module over the entire temperature range, referred to the rated range of the analog module.

Glossary-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary

Optically isolated With optically isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are galvanically isolated; for example, by an optocoupler, contact assembly or repeater. Input/output circuits can be connected to common potential.

Organization block Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system of the CPU and the user program. The order in which the user program is processed is defined in the organization blocks.

Parameters 1. Tag of a Logic block 2. Tag for setting the characteristics of a module (one or more per module). When delivered to the customer, each module has a practical basic setting for its parameters, which the user can modify in STEP 7.

Process image The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in process image. A distinction is made between the process-image of inputs and of outputs. The process input image (PII) is read by the input modules before the operating system scans the user program. The process output image (PIQ) is transferred to the output modules at the end of program scanning.

Product status Products having an identical order number are distinguished by their product status. The product status is incremented for upwards compatible extensions, modifications due to production reasons (use of new component parts and components) and troubleshooting.

Programming device Programming device

Programming device A programming device (PG) is a personal computer in a specific industry-standard and compact design. A PG is completely equipped for programming SIMATIC programmable logic controllers.

Reaction to open thermocouple Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when using Thermocouples. This parameter defines whether Overflow (7FFF0H0) or Underflow (80000H0) is output by the module in the event of an open thermocouple.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary-7

Glossary

Reference potential Potential from the point of view of which the voltages of the involved circuits are analyzed and measured.

Repeat accuracy The repeat accuracy identifies the maximum deviation among the measured/output values that then occurs, when the same input signal is again applied or the same input value specified. The repeat accuracy relates to the rated range of the module and applies to the settled temperature state.

Repeater Equipment for the amplification of bus signals and connection of ments over long distances. bus seg-

Resolution With analog modules, the number of bits which represent the digitized analog value in binary. Resolution depends on the module and with analog input modules on the integration time. The precision of the resolution of a measured value increases with the length of the integration time. The resolution can be as many as 16 bits, including sign.

Retentivity Data areas in data blocks, and also timers, counters and memory markers are retentive when their contents are not lost upon a complete restart or POWER DOWN.

Scan time The scan time is the time required by the CPU to scan the user program once.

Segment Bus segment

SFC System function

Signal module Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the programmable logic controller. There are input modules, output modules, input/output modules (both digital and analog).

Glossary-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary

Smoothing Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. For specific modules it is possible to choose between no, low, medium and high smoothing. The higher the smoothing, the greater is the time constant of the digital filter.

STARTUP The STARTUP mode is transvered during the transition from STOP mode to RUN mode. STARTUP can be triggered by the Mode switch or following power-on or by means of an operator input on the programming device. With the S7-300 and M7-300, a Complete restart is performed.

Status mode The SIMATIC S7 programmable logic controllers are familiar with the following of status modes: STOP, STARTUP, RUN and STOP.

Substitute value Substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal output modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process value when signal input modules have failed. The substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in STEP 7 (old value retained, substitute value 0 or 1). They are values which the output(s) have to output in the event of a CPU STOP.

System diagnostics System diagnostics is the detection, analysis and reporting of errors that occur within the programmable logic controller. Examples of such errors are: program errors or failures on modules. System errors can be indicated with LED displays or in STEP 7.

System function A system function (SFC) is a function that is integrated in the operating system of the CPU a function that can be triggered in the STEP 7 user program, if necessary.

Temperature coefficient Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures with a resistance thermometer (RTD). The temperature coefficient you select depends on the resistance thermometer being used (to DIN standard).

Temperature error The temperature error identifies the drift of the measured/output value caused by the change in the ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a percentage per Kelvin and relates to the rated range of the analog module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Glossary-9

Glossary

Temperature errors of internal compensation The temperature error of internal compensation only occurs during thermocouple measurement. It identifies the additional error which is to be taken into account and added to the actual temperature error when internal comparison mode is selected. The data is either given as a percentage relative to the physical rated range of the analog module or as an absolute value in C.

Two-conductor/three-conductor/four-conductor connection Method of connection to the module for example, of resistance thermometers/ resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of loads at the voltage output of an analog output module.

Two-wire transmitter/four-wire transmitter Kind of transmitter (two-wire transmitter: supply (via terminals of the analog input module; 4-wire transmitter: supply via separate terminals of the transmitter)

Ungrounded Without galvanic connection to ground

User program The user program contains all the statements, tags and data for signal processing used to control a system or a process. It is assigned to a programmable module (CPU, FM, for example) and can be structured in smaller units (blocks).

Wire-break Parameter in STEP 7. A wire-break test is used for monitoring the connection from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator. With wirebreak, the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized input/output.

Glossary-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index
potential difference, 4-45 reaction with open thermocouple, 4-41 2-wire transmitters, 4-52 SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, 4-115 SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed, 4-97 SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, 4-86 A SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, 4-125 Absolute value encoder (SSI), SM 338; SM 331; AI 8 x TC, 4-138 POS-INPUT, 5-14 smoothing of analog input values, 4-42 Accessories, D-1 structure of data record 1, A-8 Active bus module, dimension drawing, C-8 temperature coefficient, 4-42 Actuator connection, to analog output module, temperature unit, 4-41 4-66 underflow, 4-74 Address, Glossary-1 wire-break, 4-73, 4-74 Addressing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-15 wire-break check, 4-40 Aggregate current, Glossary-1 Analog Input Module Ambient conditions SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits, 4-153 mechanical, 1-10, 1-16 SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, 4-77 SIPLUS S7-300-modules, 1-16 Analog input modules Analog functions, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 causes of errors and remedies, 4-73 Analog Input Module, SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, diagnostic messages, 4-72 4-108 Analog input modules, SM 331, Analog input module channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6 common-mode error, 4-73 Analog input/module, structure of data record configuring error, 4-73 1, A-42 connecting resistance thermometers, 4-53 Analog input/output module connecting resistors, 4-53 integration time, 4-44 connecting sensor, 4-45 measurement, 4-44 connecting thermocouple, 4-58 measuring method, 4-44 diagnostic interrupt, 4-40 measuring range, 4-44 diagnostic message in measured value, output range, 4-44 4-72 output type, 4-44 diagnostics, 4-40 parameters, 4-44, A-41 group diagnostics, 4-40 SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits, 4-188 interference frequency suppression, 4-42, Analog Input/Output Module , SM 334; AI 4/AO A-9 2 x 12 bits, 4-194 isolated, 4-45 Analog module limit value, 4-40 assigning parameters, 4-39 load voltage missing, 4-73 behavior, 4-31 measurement, 4-41 Determination of measuring error/output measuring method, 4-41 error, 4-34 measuring methods and measuring ranges, diagnostics, 4-71 A-9 dimension drawing, C-15 measuring range, 4-41 group error LED, 4-72 module filtering mode, 4-41 interrupts, 4-75 non-isolated, 4-45 sequence of steps for commissioning, 4-8 Overflow, 4-74 SF LED, 4-72 parameter assignment error, 4-73 supply voltage failure, 4-32 parameters, 4-40, A-7 Analog output channel, conversion time, 4-37

Numbers

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index-1

Index

Analog Output Module, SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits, 4-182 Analog output module connecting loads and actuators, 4-66 connecting loads to current output, 4-70 connecting loads to voltage output, 4-67 diagnostic interrupt, 4-43 diagnostic messages, 4-73 diagnostics, 4-43 group diagnostics, 4-43 isolated, 4-66 load voltage missing, 4-74 M short-circuit, 4-74 non-isolated, 4-66 output methods and output ranges, A-38 output range, 4-43 output type, 4-43 parameter assignment error, 4-74 parameters, 4-43 response with CPU-STOP, 4-43 setting substitute values, A-38 settling time, 4-38 SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits, 4-176 SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit, 4-169 SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, 4-163 structure of data record 1, A-37 analog output module, response time, 4-38 Analog output modules causes of errors and remedies, 4-74 parameters, A-36 Analog output modules, SM 332, channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6 Analog value conversion, 4-9 sign, 4-9 Analog value representation, 4-9 binary representation of input ranges, 4-12 binary representation of output ranges, 4-24 for current measuring ranges, 4-144-17 for current output ranges, 4-274-30 for resistance type transmitters, 4-15 for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors, 4-16, 4-17, 4-19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23 for RTD resistance temperature detectors, 4-18 for voltage measuring ranges, 4-134-15 for voltage output ranges, 4-264-29 Analog-to-digital conversion, 4-35 Approval CE, 1-2 CSA, 1-3 FM, 1-4 Shipbuilding, 1-4 UL, 1-3 Approvals, Standards, 1-2

Auxiliary supply missing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19

B
Backplane bus, Glossary-1 Backup battery, 1-9 shipping and storage conditions, 1-8 Basic conversion time, Glossary-1 Basic error limit, 4-34 Basic response time, Glossary-1 Battery. See backup battery Baud rate, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14 Behavior, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-29 Bus segment, Glossary-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data, B-2 of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-7 Bytes 2 and 3, of diagnostic data, B-3 Bytes 2 to 7, of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-8 Bytes 4 to 7, of diagnostic data, B-4 Bytes 8 to 10, of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-8

C
Cables, for analog signals, 4-45, 4-66 Causes of error and remedial action, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 Causes of error and remedial measures, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Causes of errors and remedies analog input module, 4-73 analog output module, 4-74 CE, Approval, 1-2 Channel error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Channel information present, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Channel-specific diagnostics, B-5 Climatic conditions, 1-11 Code type, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14 Commissioning analog modules, sequence of steps, 4-8 Commissioning digital modules, sequence of steps, 3-10 Common mode voltage, Glossary-2 Common-mode error, analog input module, 4-73 Communication processor, Glossary-2 Comparison point, 4-62, Glossary-2

Index-2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index

Compensating box, 4-59 channel-specific, for SM 321; connecting, 4-61 DI 16 x 24 VDC, B-5 Compensation channel-specific, for SM 322; external, 4-59 DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, B-5 internal, 4-59, 4-61 channel-specific, for SM 338; POS-INPUT, Complete restart, Glossary-2 B-8 Configuration error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 data record, B-1 Configure, Glossary-2 SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-7 Configuring error, analog input module, 4-73 Diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, Conversion time bytes 0 and 1, B-7 analog input channels, 4-35 Diagnostic data of SM 338; POS-INPUT analog output channel, 4-37 Bytes 2 to 7, B-8 Converting, analog values, 4-9 Bytes 8 to 10, B-8 CP, Glossary-2 Diagnostic interrupt CPU, Glossary-2 analog input module, 4-40 CSA, Approval, 1-3 analog output module, 4-43 Current sensors, connecting, 4-51 of analog modules, 4-75 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-32 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-80 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 D Diagnostic messages, 3-12, 4-71, 5-17 Data record, for diagnostic data, B-1 of analog input modules, 4-72 Data record 1 of analog output modules, 4-73 analog input module configuration, A-8 reading out, 3-13, 4-72, 5-17 analog output module configuration, A-37 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78 Configuration SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, A-40 Diagnostics digital input module configuration, A-4 analog input module, 4-40 digital output module configuration, A-6 analog output module, 4-43 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-27 of analog modules, 4-71 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-12 of digital modules, 3-12 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-20 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-29 structure of analog input/output module, system, Glossary-9 A-42 Diagnostics entry, 4-32 Structure of digital input-/output module, Digital Input Module 3-120 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed, 3-20 Data record 128 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input, structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-13 3-34 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-21 SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24, 3-18 Data records, for parameters, A-2 Digital input module Default setting, Glossary-3 SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V, 3-36 Degree of protection, 1-12 SM 321; DI 32 x 120/230 VAC ISOL, 3-44 IP 20, 1-12 structure of data record 1, A-4 Destruction limit, Glossary-3 Digital Input Module Diagnosis, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17, 5-18 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with process and Diagnosis interrupt release, SM 338; diagnostic interrupt, 3-22 POS-INPUT, 5-14 SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125, 3-38 Diagnostic buffer, Glossary-3 SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24, 3-13 Diagnostic data, Glossary-3 SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230, 3-42 bytes 0 and 1, B-2 Digital input module bytes 2 and 3, B-3 SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V, 3-40 bytes 4 to 7, B-4 SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC, 3-16 channel-specific, B-5 Digital input modules, parameters, A-3 channel-specific, for analog input modules Digital Input/Output Module, SM 323; of SM 331, B-6 DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A, 3-113 channel-specific, for analog output modules Digital input-/output module of SM 332, B-6
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index-3

Index

SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-110 SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable, 3-116 Structure of data record 1, 3-120 Digital module assigning parameters, 3-11 diagnostics, 3-12 dimension drawing, C-15 group error LED, 3-13 sequence of steps for commissioning, 3-10 SF LED, 3-13 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A , 3-49 SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt, 3-72 Digital output module parameters, A-5 SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed, 3-56 SM 322; DO 32 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL , 3-87 SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-46 structure of data record 1, A-6 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC, 3-59 SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 3-53 SM 322; DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A, 3-66 SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A , 3-84 SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48125/1,5 A , 3-81 Digital output module , SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A, 3-69 Dimension drawing, active bus module, C-8 Dimension drawings, C-1 analog module, C-15 digital module, C-15 IM 361, C-13 interface module, C-13 power supply module PS 307, C-8 PS 307, C-8 rail, C-2 RS 485 repeater, C-18 shield connecting element, C-16 signal module, C-15 SIMATIC TOP connect, C-17 Direct access, Glossary-3 Dummy module , DM 370, 5-5

EPROM error SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 Equipotential bonding, Glossary-4 Error, of an analog module, 4-34 Extended environmental conditions, 1-14 External auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31

F
FM, Approval, 1-4 Four-conductor connection, 4-54, Glossary-10 Four-wire transmitter, Glossary-10 Four-wire transmitters, 4-52 FREEZE, Glossary-4 Freeze-function, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-12, 5-14 Fuse blown SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79

G
Ground, Glossary-4 Grounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4 Group diagnostics analog input module, 4-40 analog output module, 4-43 Group error LED analog module, 4-72 digital module, 3-13 Group fault-LED, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17

H
Hardware interrupt, Glossary-4 End of scan cycle, 4-76 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-32 when limit exceeded, 4-75 Hardware interrupt lost, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31, 3-33 Hold last value, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76

I E
Electromagnetic compatibility, 1-6 Encoder absolute, Glossary-3 encoder error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Environmental conditions, 1-9 extended, 1-14 Identifiers for Australia, 1-4 IEC 61131, 1-4 IM 360 dimension drawing, C-13 interface module, 6-3 IM 361, interface module, 6-5

Index-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index

IM 365 dimension drawing, C-14 Interface Module , 6-7 Input delay, Glossary-4 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27 Insulation test, 1-12 Integration time, Glossary-5 analog input/output module, 4-44 Interface module, 6-1 dimension drawing, C-13 IM 360, 6-3 IM 361, 6-5 Interface Module , IM 365, 6-7 Interference pulse-shaped, 1-6 sinusoidal, 1-7 Interference frequency suppression, Glossary-5 analog input module, 4-42, A-9 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24 Internal auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 Internal compensation, Temperature error, Glossary-10 Internal error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Interrupt, Glossary-5 Interrupt-triggering channels, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-33 Interrupts enabling, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75, 5-20 of analog modules, 4-75 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-32 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-80 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 IP 20, 1-12 Isolated measuring sensors, 4-46 connecting, 4-46

Logic block, Glossary-5 LWH, Glossary-4

M
M short-circuit, analog output module, 4-74 Measurement analog input module, 4-41 analog input/output module, 4-44 Measuring method analog input channels, 4-28 analog input module, 4-41, A-9 analog input/output module, 4-44 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25 Measuring range analog input module, 4-41, A-9 analog input/output module, 4-44 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25 Measuring range module, 4-28 replugging, 4-29 Measuring ranges, analog input channels, 4-28 Measuring sensors, isolated, 4-46 Module Classes, ID, B-2 Module fault, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Module filtering mode, Glossary-6 analog input module, 4-41 Module not parameterized, SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V , 3-31 Module overview, 4-3 digital modules, 3-4 SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-2 special signal modules, 5-2 Modules, shipping and storage conditions, 1-8 Monoflop time, Glossary-6 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14 MPI, Glossary-6

L
Lack of encoder supply, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 Limit value, analog input module, 4-40 Linearity error, Glossary-5 Load connection, to analog output module, 4-66 Load connection to current output, to analog output module, 4-70 Load connection to voltage output, to analog output module, 4-67 Load voltage missing analog input module, 4-73 analog output module, 4-74
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

N
No external auxiliary voltage, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 No internal auxiliary voltage, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 No load voltage L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79 Non-isolated, Glossary-6 Non-isolated sensors, 4-48 connecting, 4-48 Normalization, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11, 5-14

Index-5

Index

Normalizing, Glossary-6

O
OB, Glossary-7 OB 40, 3-32, 4-75 start information, 4-76 OB 82, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75 Operating conditions, 1-9 Operating mode of CPU, 4-31 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24 operational limit, 4-34, Glossary-6 Optically isolated, Glossary-7 Order number 6AG1 321-1BH02-2AA0, 3-18 6AG1 321-1BL00-2AA0, 3-13 6AG1 321-1CH20-2AA0, 3-38 6AG1 321-1FF01-2AA0, 3-42 6AG1 321-7BH01-2AB0, 3-22 6AG1 322-1BH01-2AA0, 3-53 6AG1 322-1CF00-2AA0, 3-81 6AG1 322-1FF01-2AA0, 3-84 6AG1 322-1HF10-2AA0, 3-106 6AG1 322-8BF00-2AB0, 3-72 6AG1 323-1BH01-2AA0, 3-113 6AG1 331-7KB02-2AB0, 4-153 6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0, 4-182 6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0, 4-194 6AG1 365-0BA01-2AA0, 6-7 6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0, 2-2 6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0, 2-6 6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0, 2-9 6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0, 2-9 6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0, 2-14 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0, 3-18 6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0, 3-20 6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0, 3-34 6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0, 3-13 6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0, 3-36 6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0, 3-38 6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0, 3-16 6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0, 3-42 6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0, 3-44 6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0, 3-40 6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0, 3-22 6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0, 3-69 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0, 3-53 6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0, 3-56 6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0, 3-46 6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0, 3-81 6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0, 3-84 6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0, 3-66 6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0, 3-49

6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0, 3-96 6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0, 3-106 6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0, 3-93 6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0, 3-87 6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0, 3-59 6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0, 3-100 6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0, 3-72 6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0, 3-113 6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0, 3-110 6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0, 3-116 6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0, 4-108 6ES7331-7HF00-0AB0, 4-97 6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0, 4-97 6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0, 4-153 6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0, 4-115 6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0, 4-77 6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0, 4-86 6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0, 4-125 6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0, 4-138 6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0, 4-182 6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0, 4-176 6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0, 4-163 6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0, 4-169 6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0, 4-188 6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0, 4-194 6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0, 5-7 6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0, 6-3 6ES7361 3CA01-0AA0, 6-5 6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0, 6-7 6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0, 5-5 6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0, 5-3 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0, 7-2 Organization block (OB), Glossary-7 Output analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 Output method, analog output module, A-38 Output range analog input/output module, 4-44 analog output module, 4-43, A-38 Output type analog input/output module, 4-44 analog output module, 4-43 Overflow, analog input module, 4-74

P
Parameter assignment for analog modules, 4-39 for digital modules, 3-11 in user program, A-1 Parameter assignment error analog input module, 4-73 analog output module, 4-74 Parameterization error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19

Index-6

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index

Parameterization missing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Parameters, Glossary-7 analog input module, 4-40, A-7 analog input/output module, 4-44, A-41 analog output module, 4-43 analog output modules, A-36 data records, A-2 digital input modules, A-3 digital output module, A-5 dynamic, 3-11, 4-39 modifying in user program, 3-11, 4-39 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76 SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable, 3-119 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-11 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-19 SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, A-39 SM 338; POS-INPUT , 5-14 static, 3-11, 4-39 Parameters, wrong SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 PARM_MOD, SFC 57, A-2 Pin assignment, RS 485 repeater, 7-6 POS-Input module SM 338, 5-7 Position decoder module, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-7 Potential difference, with analog input modules, 4-45 Power supply module, 2-1 dimension drawing, C-8 PS 305 2 A, 2-2 PS 307 10 A, 2-14 PS 307 2 A, 2-6 PS 307 5 A, 2-9 Process image, Glossary-7 Product status, Glossary-7 Programming device (PG), Glossary-7 Protection class, 1-12 PS 307, dimension drawing, C-8 Pulse edge, 3-27 Pulse-shaped interference, 1-6

Reaction to open thermocouple, SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-26 Read analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 Reference junction temperature with thermocouples, compensating, 4-59 Reference potential, Glossary-8 Relay output module SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC, 3-93 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, 3-100 Relay Output Module , SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A, 3-106 Relay output module , SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC, 3-96 Repeat accuracy, Glossary-8 Repeater, Glossary-8 See RS 485-Repeater Resistance thermometer connection, to analog input module, 4-53 Resistor connection, to analog input module, 4-53 Resolution, 4-9, Glossary-8 Response time, 4-38 Response with CPU-STOP, analog output module, 4-43 Retentivity, Glossary-8 RS 485 repeater Appearance, 7-3 application, 7-2 definition, 7-2 dimension drawing, C-18 grounded operation, 7-4 rules, 7-2 ungrounded operation, 7-4 RS 485-Repeater, 7-1 grounded, 7-4 ungrounded, 7-4

S
Scan time, Glossary-8 analog input channels, 4-35 analog output channels, 4-37 Screw-type terminals, SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-10 Sensor connection, to analog input module, 4-45 Sensors, non-isolated, 4-48 Settling time, 4-38 SF LED analog module, 4-72 digital module, 3-13 SF-LED, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17 SFC, Glossary-8, Glossary-9 SFC 51, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75 SFC 55 WR_PARM, A-2

R
Radio interference, emission of, 1-7 Rail for the Insert and Remove function, dimension drawing, C-7 Rails, dimension drawing, C-2 RAM error SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 Rated voltages, 1-13
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index-7

Index

SFC 56 WR_DPARM, A-2 SFC 57 PARM_MOD, A-2 SFC 59, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75 Shield connecting element, dimension drawing, C-16 Shipbuilding, Approval, 1-4 Short-circuit to L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79 Short-circuit to M, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79 Sign, analog value, 4-9 Signal module, Glossary-8 dimension drawing, C-15 SIMATIC TOP connect components, 8-12 connection for 2A modules, 8-18 dimension drawing, C-17 one-conductor connection, 8-14 selecting components, 8-13 three-conductor connection, 8-16 wiring 32-channel digital modules, 8-8 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA component selection, 8-20 connection example, 8-24 multiplier terminal, 8-21 shield connection, 8-23 terminal allocation to analog module, 8-22 terminal assignment, 8-21 SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA advantages of using, 8-3 components, 8-3 Configuration, 8-2 connecting cable, 8-4 connectors, 8-4 mounting terminal block and connecting cable, 8-10 screw-type terminals, 8-10 spring-loaded terminals, 8-10 wiring, 8-4 wiring actuators/sensors to terminal block, 8-10 wiring rules, 8-7 wiring the front connector module, 8-6 wiring with modules..., 8-3 Simulator module, SM 374; IN/OUT 16, 5-3 Sinusoidal interference, 1-7 SIPLUS S7-300-modules, 1-14 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5 diagnostic interrupt, 3-32 diagnostics, 3-27 EPROM error, 3-31 external auxiliary voltage missing, 3-31 fuse blown, 3-31 input delay, 3-27

internal auxiliary voltage missing, 3-31 interrupts, 3-32 lack of encoder supply, 3-31 redundant encoder supply, 3-24 voltage type, 3-27 watchdog, 3-31 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC causes of error and remedial measures, 3-31 diagnostic interrupt, 3-27 hardware interrupt, 3-27, 3-32 hardware interrupt lost, 3-31, 3-33 interrupt-triggering channels, 3-33 parameters, wrong, 3-31 RAM error, 3-31 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V Resistive circuit of the encoder, 3-24 Synchronous operation, 3-26 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V , Module not parameterized, 3-31 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A apply substitute value 1, 3-76 causes of error and remedial action, 3-79 channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5 diagnostic interrupt, 3-76, 3-80 diagnostic messages, 3-78 EPROM error, 3-79 fuse blown, 3-79 hold last value, 3-76 interrupts, 3-80 no external auxiliary voltage, 3-79 no internal auxiliary voltage, 3-79 no load voltage L+, 3-76, 3-79 parameters, 3-76 RAM error, 3-79 short-circuit to L+, 3-76, 3-79 short-circuit to M, 3-76, 3-79 substitute value application, 3-76 watchdog, 3-79 wire-break, 3-76, 3-79 SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable, Parameters, 3-119 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bit, Parasitic frequency suppression, A-29 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits Interference frequency suppression, A-28 Measuring methods and measuring ranges, A-28 structure of data record 1, A-27 SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed, Synchronous operation, 4-101 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD interference frequency suppression, A-16 operating modes, A-16 parameters, A-11

Index-8

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index

smoothing, A-18 structure of data record 1, A-12 structure of data record 128, A-13 Temperature coefficient, A-18 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD x 24 bits, measuring methods and measuring ranges, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC interference frequency suppression, A-24 measuring methods and measuring ranges, A-25 operating modes, A-24 parameters, A-19 reaction to open thermocouple, A-26 smoothing, A-26 structure of data record 1, A-20 structure of data record 128, A-21 SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, Synchronous operation, 4-173 SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits Parameters, A-39 Structure of data record 1, A-40 SM 338 Encoder value acquisition, 5-10 Free running encoder value acquisition, 5-10 POS-Input module, 5-7 Synchronous operation, 5-8 SM 338; POS-INPUT Absolute value encoder (SSI), 5-14 Addressing, 5-15 Auxiliary supply missing, 5-19 Baud rate, 5-14 Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures, 5-19 Channel error, 5-19 Channel information present, 5-19 channel-specific diagnostic data, B-8 Code type, 5-14 Configuration error, 5-19 Diagnosis, 5-17 Diagnosis interrupt release, 5-14 diagnostic data, B-7 Diagnostic interrupt, 5-20 encoder error, 5-19 External error, 5-19 Freeze-function, 5-12, 5-14 Group fault-LED, 5-17 Internal error, 5-19 Interrupts, 5-20 Module fault, 5-19 Monoflop time, 5-14 Normalization, 5-11, 5-14 Parameterization error, 5-19 Parameterization missing, 5-19 SF-LED, 5-17

Watchdog tripped, 5-19 Wrong parameters, 5-19 Smoothing, Glossary-9 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-26 Smoothing analog input values, 4-36 Smoothing of analog input values, analog input module, 4-42 Spare parts, D-1 Spring-loaded terminals, SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-10 Standards and approvals, 1-2 Startup, Glossary-9 Status mode, Glossary-9 STEP 7 blocks, for analog functions, 4-1 Substitute value, Glossary-9 analog output module, A-38 Substitute value 1 application, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76 Substitute value application, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76 Supply voltage failure, of the analog module, 4-32 Synchronous operation SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V, 3-26 SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed, 4-101 SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, 4-173 SM 338, 5-8 System diagnostics, Glossary-9 System function (SFC), Glossary-9

T
Technical specifications, RS 485 repeater, 7-6 Temperature coefficient, Glossary-9 analog input module, 4-42 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bit, A-29 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18 Temperature error, Glossary-9 Temperature errors of internal compensation, Glossary-10 Temperature measurement, SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bit, A-28 Temperature unit, Analog input module, 4-41 Test voltages, 1-12 Thermo emf, 4-58 Thermocouple design, 4-58 open, reaction to, Glossary-7 principle of operation, 4-58 Thermocouple connection, to analog input module, 4-58 Three-conductor connection, 4-54, Glossary-10 Two-conductor connection, 4-55, Glossary-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Index-9

Index

Two-wire transmitter, Glossary-10

W
Watchdog SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 Watchdog tripped, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Wire-break, Glossary-10 Analog input module, 4-73 analog input module, 4-74 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79 wire-break check, analog input module, 4-40 WR_DPARM, SFC 56, A-2 WR_PARM, SFC 55, A-2

U
UL, Approval, 1-3 Underflow, analog input module, 4-74 Ungrounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4 Use in an industrial environment, 1-5 Use in residential environments, 1-5 Use of the ET 200 / S7-300 in Zone 2, 1-17 User program, Glossary-10 parameter assignment in, A-1

V
Vibrations, 1-10 Voltage sensors, connecting, 4-50 Voltage type, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27

Index-10

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data A5E00105505-03

Product Information on the Manual

Edition 02.2004

S7-300 Programmable Controller; Module Specifications, as of Edition 02/2004 (A5E00105505)

ET 200M Distributed I/O Device Signal Modules for Process Automation, as of Edition 01/2002 (A5E00085262)

S7-300, ET 200M Programmable Controller, Modules with Intrinsically-Safe Signals, as of Edition 08/2003 (A5E00172008)

Introduction
Parameterizable signal modules of the S7-300 product family mentioned in this product information document can be reparameterized online using STEP7 HWCONFIG in RUN mode of the CPU. In other words, the module parameters can be changed without switching the CPU to STOP mode or affecting other modules. The following prerequisites must be met in order to use this function: STEP7 as of Version 5.2 Distributed use of the S7-300 modules described in the S7-400 programmable controller (CPUs as of V3.1 or CP 443-5 extended as of V5.0). Use of the ET 200M with the IM 153-2 as of 6ES7153-2BA00-0XB0 or 6ES7153-2BB00-0XB0 Use of the IM 157 as of 6ES7157-0AA82-0XA00 You will find a detailed description of the prerequisites and principles of operation in the manual Modifying the System during Operation via CiR (visit http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support and enter the entry ID: 14044916).

Copyright 2004 by Siemens AG A5E00201782-02

Reparameterization steps in RUN mode

Observe the reparameterization steps described in the above manual. Note the peculiarities of certain modules described in the table. Example 1: To change a measuring range for modules, proceed as follows: 1. Change the user program so that the channel to be reparameterized is no longer evaluated, and download it to the CPU. 2. Change the measuring range for the module in HWCONFIG, and download the changed configuration to the CPU. 3. Adapt the user program to the changed channel, and download it to the CPU. Example 2: When reparameterizing certain modules (see the table), you should ensure that there is no pending diagnostic event (e.g. a wire break message) before carrying out reparameterization, since otherwise it may happen in some cases that outgoing diagnostic events are no longer reported. As a result, the SF LEDs on the CPU, IM, or module will continue to shine, for example, although the reparameterized module is working correctly. If such a situation does arise, however, the module must be removed and then plugged in again.

Product Information on the Manual A5E00201782-02

Notes on the table

There is a separate table for each manual that describes the technical specifications of the signal modules of the S7-300 product family. The Behavior of the Inputs/Outputs column indicates the behavior of the inputs/outputs when reparameterization is carried out in RUN mode, provided they are not affected by reparameterization.

Module S7-300 module specifications 6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0 6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0 SM 321; DI 16 DC 24 V; with hardware interrupt and diagnostic interrupt 6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0 SM 321; DI 16 DC 24 V; with hardware interrupt and diagnostic interrupt, clocked 6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0 6ES7 322-8BF80-0AB0 SM 322; DO 8 DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; with diagnostic interrupt 6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0 SM 322;DO 8 AC 120/230V/ 2A ISOL 6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0 SM 322; DO 8 Rel. AC 230V/5A 6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit 6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0 SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit 6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 8 RTD 6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0 SM 331; AI 8 TC

Behavior of the inputs/outputs

Peculiarities when reparameterizing

Supply the last valid process value before parameterization

---

Output the last valid output value before parameterization

---

Supply the last valid process value before parameterization

SF LED shines: If there was a pending diagnosis before reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining although there is no longer a pending diagnosis and the module is working correctly. Remedy:

Only reparameterize when there is no

pending diagnosis on the module, or

Remove the module, and then plug it in

again

Product Information on the Manual A5E00201782-02

Module 6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0 SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit

Behavior of the inputs/outputs

Peculiarities when reparameterizing SF LED shines: If there was a pending diagnosis before reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining although there is no longer a pending diagnosis and the module is working correctly. Remedy:

6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0 6ES7 332-5HB81-0AB0 SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit

Output the last valid output value before parameterization

Only reparameterize when there is no

pending diagnosis on the module, or

Remove the module, and then plug it in

again 6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0 6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0 SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit

---

Module

Behavior of the inputs/outputs

Peculiarities when reparameterizing

ET 200M signal modules for process automation (PCS7) 6ES7 321-7TH00-0AB0 SM 321; DI 16 NAMUR Supply the last valid process value (including the value status) before parameterization SF LED shines: If there was a pending diagnosis before reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining although there is no longer a pending diagnosis and the module is working correctly. Remedy: 6ES7 322-8BH00-0AB0 SM 322; DO 16 DC 24 V/0,5A Output the last valid output value before parameterization

Only reparameterize when there is no

pending diagnosis on the module, or

Remove the module, and then plug it in

again

Product Information on the Manual A5E00201782-02

Module

Behavior of the inputs/outputs

Peculiarities when reparameterizing

S7-300, ET 200, I/O modules with intrinsically-safe signals 6ES7 321-7RD00-0AB0 SM 321; DI 4 NAMUR Supply the last valid process value before parameterization SF LED shines: If there was a pending diagnosis before reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining although there is no longer a pending diagnosis and the module is working correctly. Remedy:

Only reparameterize when there is no

pending diagnosis on the module, or

Remove the module, and then plug it in

again 6ES7 322 5RD00-0AB0 SM 322; DO 4 15V/20mA 6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0 SM 322; DO 4 24V/10mA 6ES7 331-7RD00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 4 0/4...20mA 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 2 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7 332-5RD00-0AB0 SM 332; AO 4 0/4...20mA SF LED shines: If there was a pending diagnosis before reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining although there is no longer a pending diagnosis and the module is working correctly. Remedy: Supply the last valid process value before parameterization --Output the last valid output value before parameterization

---

Output the last valid output value before parameterization

Only reparameterize when there is no

pending diagnosis on the module, or

Remove the module, and then plug it in

again 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0 SM 332; AO 2 0/4...20mA HART ---

Product Information on the Manual A5E00201782-02

Product Information on the Manual A5E00201782-02